THE GIFT OF 
 
 FLORENCE V. V. DICKEY 
 
 TO THE 
 
 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA 
 AT LOS ANGELES 
 
 THE DONALD R. DICKEY 
 
 LIBRARY 
 OF VERTEBRATE ZOOLOGY
 
 A MANUAL OF STYLE
 
 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 CHICAGO, ILLINOIS 
 
 THE BAKER AND TAYLOR COMPANY 
 
 KEW YORK 
 
 THE CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY PRESS 
 
 LOSDOH 
 
 THE MARUZEN-KABUSHIKI-KAISHA 
 
 TOSTO, OSAKA, ETOTO, FUIUOKA, SIVDAI 
 
 THE MISSION BOOK COMPANY 
 
 SHAK8HAI
 
 A MANUAL OF STYLE 
 
 A COMPILATION OF 
 
 TYPOGRAPHICAL RULES GOVERNING THE PUBLICATIONS OF 
 
 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO, WITH SPECIMENS OF 
 
 TYPES USED AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS 
 
 SEVENTH EDITION 
 
 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 CHICAGO, ILLINOIS
 
 COPYRIGHT 1906, 1910, 1911, 1914, W7, 1010, AND 1920 Bv 
 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO 
 
 All Rights Reserved 
 
 Published November 1906 
 
 Second Edition March 1910 
 
 Third Edition December 1911 
 
 Second Impression August 1912 
 
 Fourth Edition February 1914 
 
 Fifth Edition November 1917 
 
 Sixth Edition October 1919 
 
 Seventh Edition November 1920 
 
 Second Impression January 1923 
 
 Composed and Printed By 
 
 The University of Chicago Press 
 
 Chicago. Illinois, U.S.A.
 
 SRI* 
 imc 
 
 5137lo 
 
 INTRODUCTORY NOTE 
 
 The present work is a codification of the typographical 
 rules employed by the University of Chicago in connection 
 with its official printing and publications issued through 
 its University Press. Having its genesis, over two 
 decades ago, in a single sheet of fundamentals, jotted 
 down by the first proofreader at odd moments for his 
 own guidance; added to from year to year, as oppor- 
 tunity offered or new necessities arose; revised and 
 re-revised as the scope of the work, and, it is hoped, the 
 wisdom of the workers, increased it emerges in its present 
 form as the embodiment of traditions, the crystallization 
 of usages, the blended product of the reflections of many 
 minds. 
 
 Regulations like these, hi the nature of the case, 
 cannot be endowed with the fixity of unchanging law. 
 They are meant for the average case, and must be 
 applied with a certain degree of elasticity. Exceptions 
 will constantly occur, and ample room is left for individual 
 initiative and discretion. They point the way and survey 
 the road, rather than remove the obstacles. Throughout 
 this book it is assumed that no regulation contained therein 
 is absolutely inviolable. Wherever the peculiar nature of 
 the subject-matter, the desirability of throwing into relief 
 a certain part of the argument, the reasonable preference 
 
 501579 .
 
 vi INTRODUCTORY NOTE 
 
 of a writer, or a typographical contingency suggests a 
 deviation, such deviation may legitimately be made. Each 
 case of this character must be decided largely upon its 
 own merits. Generally it may be stated that, where no 
 question of taste or logic is involved, deference should 
 be shown to the expressed wishes of the author. 
 
 The nature of the work of the Press itself and this 
 will apply, to a greater or less extent, to any similar in- 
 stitution affected by local conditions constantly calls for 
 modification, now of this rule, now of that. It would be 
 found impracticable, even were it desirable, to bring all 
 its publications into rigid uniformity of "style" and 
 appearance. Methods have been devised, systems evolved, 
 in certain lines of work, which cannot be carried bodily 
 over into the field of others. Thus, in the matter of literary 
 references, for instance, general practice has established 
 certain usages in some of the sciences which it would not 
 be advisable to ignore. Similar differences in practice 
 may be observed in other directions. These deviations 
 from the general rules will be found mentioned at the 
 appropriate places in the body of the book. On the whole, 
 however, the rules are designed to govern all publications 
 sent forth with the official publishing imprint, "The 
 University of Chicago Press." 
 
 Concerning the character and contents of the book 
 little need be added. Its origin, its primary aim, and its 
 limitations, as outlined above, will suggest the bounds of 
 its usefulness. It does not pretend to be exhaustive; a 
 few things must be taken for granted, and the traditional
 
 INTRODUCTORY NOTE vn 
 
 territory of the dictionary has only exceptionally been 
 invaded. It does not presume to be inflexibly consistent; 
 applicability, in the printing-office, is a better test than 
 iron-clad consistency, and common sense a safer guide 
 than abstract logic. It lays no claim to perfection in any 
 of its parts; bearing throughout the inevitable earmarks 
 of compromise, it will not carry conviction at every point 
 to everybody. Neither is it an advocate of any radical 
 scheme of reform; in the present state of the agitation 
 for changes in spelling, progressive conservatism has 
 been thought to be more appropriate for an academic 
 printing-office than radicalism. As it stands, this Manual 
 is believed to contain a fairly comprehensive, reasonably 
 harmonious, and wholesomely practical set of work-rules 
 for the aid of those who have to do with questions of 
 typographical style. For the benefit of those whose duties 
 bring them into direct contact with the manufacturing 
 department of the Press, specimen pages of the available 
 types, special characters, etc., have been added. 
 
 The Manual of Style is now in its seventh edition. 
 That it is recognized as possessing merit is evidenced by 
 its adoption and use in many editorial offices, libraries, 
 and proofrooms in the United States and Canada. 
 This edition incorporates several new rules which it is 
 believed will prove helpful, and at the same time seeks 
 to elucidate some of the older rules, in the application 
 of which difficulties may arise. Changes in literary 
 practice, the legislation of learned societies, the recent 
 development of the profession of the librarian, with the
 
 Viii INTRODUCTORY NOTE 
 
 attendant uniformity of practice recommended by the 
 national association of librarians, and the added experi- 
 ence resulting from a daily application of these rules to 
 a very varied list of publications, are all factors con- 
 tributing to the need of periodical revision. 
 
 The work, thus remodeled, is again offered to the 
 public, in the hope that it may continue to be useful 
 to those whose occupations require some familiarity with 
 the niceties of typographical form. 
 
 THE UNIVERSITY PRESS 
 
 CHICAGO, ILL. 
 November, 1920
 
 CONTENTS 
 
 FAGS 
 
 RULES FOR COMPOSITION i 
 
 Capitalization 3 
 
 The Use of Italics 25 
 
 Quotations 33 
 
 Spelling . . 37 
 
 Punctuation 50 
 
 Divisions 81 
 
 Footnotes 88 
 
 Indexing 92 
 
 Tabular Work 95 
 
 TECHNICAL TERMS 103 
 
 APPENDIX 119 
 
 Hints to Authors and Editors 121 
 
 Hints to Proofreaders 125 
 
 Hints to Copyholders 130 
 
 Proofreader's Marks 133 
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 135 
 
 INDEXES 283 
 
 Index to Manual 285 
 
 Index to Types, etc 299
 
 RULES FOR COMPOSITION
 
 CAPITALIZATION 
 
 CAPITALIZE 
 
 1. Proper nouns and adjectives: 
 
 George, America, North America, Englishman; Elizabethan, 
 French. (See 53.) 
 
 Do not capitalize verbs derived from proper names 
 and having a specialized meaning: 
 
 to boycott, to fletcherize, to pasteurize; 
 
 nor such words as the following, when used in 
 
 their special scientific or trade significance: 
 
 volt, ampere, angstrom, farad, watt, henry, ohm, coulomb. 
 
 2. Epithets used as substitutes for proper names, or 
 affixed to a name: 
 
 the Pretender, Bloody Mary, Richard the Lion-hearted, 
 Alexander the Great. 
 
 3. The particles in French names, a: "le," "la," "de," 
 "du," when they are not preceded by a Christian 
 name or title; but do not capitalize them when 
 they are preceded by such name or title: 
 
 Le Bossu, La Torre, La Rochelle, De Coligny, D'Aubigne*, 
 Du Maurier (but: Rene le Bossu, Miguel de la Torre, 
 Gaspard de Coligny, Thomas d'Aubigne, George du 
 Maurier). 
 
 3
 
 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 Capitalize "Van" in Dutch names; do not capi- 
 talize "von" in German names unless it begins a 
 sentence: 
 
 Stephen Van Rensselaer; Hugo von Martius, von Dobschiitz. 
 
 NOTE. Personal preference is responsible for the following ex- 
 ceptions: Henry van Dyke, J. H. van't Hoff, A. van Maanen. 
 
 4. Generic terms forming a part of geographical names: 
 
 Atlantic Ocean, Dead Sea, Baffin's Bay, Gulf of Mexico, 
 Straits of Gibraltar, Straits Settlements, Mississippi River, 
 Three Rivers, Laughing Brook, Rocky Mountains, Blue 
 Hills, Pike's Peak, Mount of Olives, Great Desert, Death 
 Valley, Prince Edward Island, Sea (Lake) of Galilee. 
 
 But do not capitalize words of this class when simply 
 added by way of description to the specific name, 
 without forming an organic part of such name: 
 
 the river Elbe, the desert of Sahara, the island of Madagascar. 
 
 Subject to the rule above, the following lists will be 
 found useful (see 104) : 
 
 CAPITALIZE, IN SINGULAR FORM ONLY, WHEN IMMEDIATELY 
 FOLLOWING NAME 
 
 Archipelago 
 Borough 
 Branch (stream) 
 Butte 
 
 Fork 
 Gap 
 Glacier 
 Gulch 
 
 Park 
 Plateau 
 Range 
 Reservation 
 
 Canyon 
 County 
 Crater 
 
 Harbor 
 Head 
 Hollow 
 
 Ridge 
 River 
 Run 
 
 Creek 
 Delta 
 
 Mesa 
 Ocean 
 
 Valley 
 
 Forest 
 
 Parish (La.) 

 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: CAPITALIZATION 
 
 CAPITALIZE, IN SINGULAR OR PLURAL FORM, WHEN IMME- 
 DIATELY FOLLOWING THE NAME 
 
 Hill Mountain Spring 
 
 Island Narrows 
 
 CAPITALIZE, IN SINGULAR FORM, EITHER BEFORE OR AFTER 
 THE NAME; AND IN PLURAL FORM BEFORE THE NAME 
 
 Bay Fort Peak 
 
 Bayou Isle Point 
 
 Camp (military) Lake Port 
 
 Cape Mount Sea 
 
 Dalles Oasis Strait 
 
 Desert Pass Volcano 
 Falls 
 
 5. Adjectives and nouns used singly or in conjunction, 
 to distinguish definite regions, and when used in 
 connection with a recognized geographical term; 
 and also terms applied to groups of states: 
 
 Old World, Western Hemisphere, Continental Europe, the 
 Continent (to distinguish it from the British Isles), North 
 Pole, Equator, the North ( = Scandinavia), the East (the 
 Orient), the Far East, the Levant; the North, South, East, 
 West, Middle West (United States) ; Northern Europe (but : 
 southern California); North Atlantic states, Gulf states, 
 Pacific Coast states. 
 
 But do not, as a rule, capitalize adjectives derived 
 from such names or nouns simply designating 
 direction or point of compass: 
 
 oriental customs, the southern states, the middle western 
 states, a southerner (but: Northman = Scandinavian) ; an 
 invasion of barbarians from the north, extending through 
 the south of Europe.
 
 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 In order that a distinction may be made between 
 a local and a world-wide application, the latter 
 should be capitalized: 
 
 Eastern peoples (i.e., peoples of the Orient); Western 
 nations. 
 
 6. Generic terms for political divisions: 
 
 (1) when the term is an organic part of the name, 
 following the proper name directly : 
 
 Holy Roman Empire, German Empire (=Deutsches Reich), 
 French Republic (=Republique franfaise), United Kingdom, 
 Northwest Territory, Cook County, Evanston Township, 
 Kansas City (New York City exception). 
 
 (2) when, with the preposition "of," it is used as 
 an integral part of the name to indicate certain 
 minor administrative subdivisions in the United 
 States: 
 
 Department of the Lakes, Town of Lake, Borough of Man- 
 hattan. 
 
 (3) when used singly as the accepted designation 
 for a specific division: 
 
 the Union, the States, the Republic (= United States), [the 
 Confederacy], the Dominion (= Canada), the West Side. 
 
 (4) when it is part of a fanciful or popular appel- 
 lation used as if a real geographical name : 
 
 Celestial Empire, Holy (Promised) Land, Badger State, 
 Eternal City, Garden City.
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: CAPITALIZATION 7 
 
 But do not (with the exceptions noted) capitalize such 
 terms when standing alone, or when, with "of," 
 preceding the specific name: 
 
 the empire, the state; empire of Russia, kingdom of Servia, 
 duchy of Anhalt, state of Illinois, county of Cook, city of 
 Chicago; but: the Empire (meaning the Roman Empire). 
 
 7. Numbered political divisions (see 100) : 
 
 Eleventh Congressional District, First Ward, Second Precinct. 
 
 8. The names of thoroughfares, parks, squares, blocks, 
 buildings, etc. (see 100) : 
 
 Drexel Avenue, Rings trasse, Via Appia, Chicago Drainage 
 Canal; Lincoln Park; Trafalgar Square; Monadnock 
 Block; Lakeside Building, Capitol, White House, County 
 Hospital, Theatre Francais, Lexington Hotel, Masonic 
 Temple [Solomon's temple, but, when standing alone: the 
 Temple]. 
 
 But do not capitalize such general designations of 
 buildings as "courthouse," "post-office," "library," 
 etc., except in connection with the name of the place 
 in which they are located, when they thus form a 
 proper name. 
 
 9. The names of political parties, religious denomina- 
 tions or sects, and philosophical, literary, and artistic 
 schools, and their adherents: 
 
 Republican, Conservative, National Liberal, Social Democ- 
 racy (where, as in Continental Europe, it is organized as 
 a distinct parliamentary faction); Christian, Protestantism
 
 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 Evangelical Lutheran, Catholic, Reformed, Greek Orthodox, 
 Anabaptist, Seventh-Day Adventists, the Establishment, 
 High Church, High Churchman, Separatist, Nonconform- 
 ist, Dissenter, Papist, Ultramontane, Theosophist, Jew, 
 Gentile as a noun, Pharisee (but: scribe) (adjective: 
 Pharisaic, but : pharisaic, when used of characteristics, and 
 not of the sect itself); Epicurean, Stoic, Gnosticism (but: 
 neo-Platonism, pseudo-Christianity, un-Christian see 203, 
 208), Literalist; the Romantic movement, the Symbolic 
 school of painters. 
 
 But do not capitalize any of the foregoing or similar 
 words, or their derivatives, when used in their origi- 
 nal or acquired general sense of pervading spirit, 
 point of view, trend of thought, attitude of mind, or 
 mode of action: 
 
 republican form of government, a true democrat and a con- 
 servative statesman, socialism as an economic panacea, the 
 communistic theory, single-taxer, anarchism; catholicity of 
 mind, puritanical ideas, evangelical spirit, pharisaic super- 
 ciliousness; deist, pantheism, rationalist; epicurean tastes, 
 stoic endurance, dualism and monism in present-day philoso- 
 phy, an altruistic world-view; the classics, a nemesis. 
 
 10. The names of monastic orders and their members: 
 Black Friars, Dominican, Jesuit. 
 
 11. The proper (official) titles of social, religious, educa- 
 tional, political, commercial, and industrial organiza- 
 tions and institutions: 
 
 Union League Club, Knights Templar; Young People's 
 Society of Christian Endeavor, Associated Charities; Smith- 
 sonian Institution, State University of Iowa, Hyde Park High
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: CAPITALIZATION 9 
 
 School; the Commercial Academy (Handelsakademie) of 
 Leipzig, the Paris Lyceum (Lycee de Paris); the Forty 
 [Immortals]; Cook County Democracy, Tammany Hall; 
 Associated Press, Typographical Union No. 16; Chicago, 
 Milwaukee & St. Paul Railroad, The Macmillan Company. 
 
 But do not capitalize such generic terms when used 
 to designate a class; nor when standing alone, even 
 if applied to a specific institution, except to avoid 
 ambiguity or, rarely, where the word is consistently 
 and clearly used in place of the true name : 
 
 young people's societies, the high school at Lemont, local 
 typographical unions; the club, the association, the company; 
 but: "He joined the Hall [Tammany]," "a member of the 
 [French] Academy." (See 49.) 
 
 12. The names of legislative, judiciary, and administra- 
 tive bodies and governmental departments, and their 
 branches, when specifically applied: 
 
 Congress (Senate, House of Representatives [the House], 
 Committee of Ways and Means), Parliament (House of 
 Lords, House of Commons), Reichstag, Chamber of Deputies 
 (the Chamber), General Assembly of Illinois, Chicago City 
 Council, South Park Commissioners; Supreme Court of the 
 United States, Circuit Court of Cook County, [Sanhedrin]; 
 Department of the Interior, Census Office, Springfield Board 
 of Education, Department of Public Works, the United 
 States Army (but : he has served in the army; an army man). 
 
 But do not capitalize such general, paraphrastic, or 
 incomplete designations as 
 
 the national assembly, the legislature of the state, the upper 
 house of Congress, the Dutch diet; the council, the depart- 
 ment, the board.
 
 10 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 13. Ordinals used to designate Egyptian dynasties, 
 sessions of Congress, names of regiments, and in 
 similar connections (see 100) : 
 
 the Eighteenth Dynasty (but: the Ming dynasty), the 
 Fifty-third Congress, the Second Illinois Regiment Band. 
 
 14. Commonly accepted appellations for historical 
 epochs, periods in the history of a language or 
 literature, and geological ages and strata, the word 
 "age" itself being capitalized only where a failure 
 to do so would result in ambiguous meaning: 
 
 Neolithic age (but: Stone Age, Middle Ages), Crusades, 
 Renaissance, Reformation, Inquisition, Commonwealth 
 (Cromwell's), Commune (Paris); Old English (OE see 
 123), Middle High German (MHG), the Age of Elizabeth; 
 Pleistocene, Silurian, Lower Carboniferous, Christian Era. 
 
 But do not capitalize informal adjectives in such 
 phrases as 
 
 early Algonkian, late Permian. 
 
 15. Names of important events: 
 
 Thirty Years' War, Peasants' War (German), Revolution 
 (French), Revolutionary War or War of Independence 
 (American), Whiskey Insurrection (American), Civil War 
 (American), War of 1812, Franco-Prussian War, Battle of 
 Gettysburg; Peace of Utrecht, Louisiana Purchase. 
 
 16. Political alliances, and such terms from secular or 
 ecclesiastical history as have, through their associa-
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: CAPITALIZATION II 
 
 tions, acquired special significance as designations 
 for parties, classes, movements, etc. (see 9) : 
 
 Protestant League, Holy Alliance, Dreibund; the Roses, the 
 Roundheads, Independents, Independency (English history), 
 Nonconformist, Dissenter, Separatist. 
 
 17. Conventions, congresses, expositions,etc. : 
 
 Council of Nicaea, Parliament of Religions, Fifteenth Inter- 
 national Congress of Criminology, Westminster Assembly, 
 Chicago World's Fair, Louisiana Purchase Exposition. 
 
 18. Titles of specific treaties, acts, laws (juridical), 
 bills, etc.: 
 
 Treaty of Verdun, Art. V of the Peace of Prague, Edict of 
 Nantes, Concordat, the Constitution (of the United States, 
 when standing alone, or when referred to as a literary docu- 
 ment; but not usually that of any other state or country, e.g., 
 the constitution of Illinois), Declaration of Independence, 
 Act of Emancipation, Magna C(h)arta, Corn Laws, Reform 
 Bill (English), Fourteenth Amendment, Sherman Anti- 
 trust Law (but not such bills as have not yet become laws 
 nor such treaties or laws when cited otherwise than under 
 their formal titles: treaty at Versailles, Food bill). 
 
 19. Creeds and confessions of faith: 
 
 Apostles' Creed, Nicene Creed (but: ante-Nicene see 203, 
 208), Augsburg Confession, Thirty-nine Articles. 
 
 20. Civic holidays and ecclesiastical fast and feast days : 
 Fourth of July (the Fourth), Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day; 
 Easter, Passover, Feast of Tabernacles, New Year's Day. 
 
 21. Titles of honor and respect, whether religious, 
 civil, or military, preceding the name, and academic
 
 12 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 degrees following the name; all titles of honor or 
 of nobility, when referring to specific persons, 
 either preceding the name or used in place of the 
 proper name; familiar names applied to particular 
 persons; orders (decorations) and the titles accom- 
 panying them; titles, without the name, used in 
 direct address; titles without the name when used 
 of existing incumbents of office; and such words 
 as "President," "King," "Sultan," and "Pope," 
 standing alone, when referring to a specific ruler 
 or incumbent: 
 
 Queen Victoria, ex-President Cleveland, Rear-Admiral 
 Dewey, Brigadier General Brown, Lieutenant Commander 
 Smith; United States Commissioner of Education Harris, 
 Dr. Davis; Father Boniface, Deacon Smith; Timothy 
 Dwight, D.D., LL.D. ; James Brown, Doctor of Philosophy; 
 Thomas Graham, Fellow of the Royal Geographical Society; 
 the Prince of Wales, the Marquis of Lome, His Majesty, 
 His Grace; the Apostle to the Gentiles, "the Father of his 
 Country"; Order of the Red Eagle, Knight Commander 
 of the Bath; "Allow me to suggest, Judge . . . ."; the 
 Bishop of London; the Senator; "The President [of the 
 United States] was chosen arbitrator," "the Pope's policy." 
 
 But do not capitalize the official title of a person 
 when the title follows the name (see 49); when 
 standing alone, without the name (with the excep- 
 tions noted above, and see 49) ; or when, followed 
 by the name, it is preceded by the article "the": 
 
 Woodrow Wilson, president of the United States; B. L. 
 Gildersleeve, professor of Greek (see 49); Ferdinand W.
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: CAPITALIZATION 13 
 
 Peck, commissioner-general to the Paris Exposition; the 
 archbishop (meaning other than the existing incumbent), 
 the senator (when not speaking of the existing member), 
 the archduke Francis Ferdinand, the apostle Paul. 
 
 22. Abbreviations like Ph.D., M.P., and F.R.G.S., and 
 
 designations of celestial objects (see 48) (such 
 titles to be set without space between the letters) 
 (see 52, 103, 106). 
 
 23. Abbreviations consisting of one letter, except in 
 case of units of measurement and minor literary 
 subdivisions (see 54, 55, no, in): 
 
 R.V. (Revised Version), F. (Fahrenheit), C. (centigrade), 
 A (angstrom units) (but: p., 1., n., etc.). 
 
 24. Nouns and adjectives used to designate the Supreme 
 Being or Power, or any member of the Christian 
 Trinity; and all pronouns referring to the same, 
 when not closely preceded or followed by a dis- 
 tinctive name, or unless such reference is otherwise 
 perfectly clear: 
 
 the Almighty, Ruler of the universe, the First Cause, the 
 Absolute, Providence (personified), Father, Son, Holy Ghost, 
 the Spirit, Savior, Messiah, Son of Man, the Logos, [and 
 the Virgin Mary]; "Trust Him who rules all things" (but: 
 "When God had worked six days, he rested on the seventh"). 
 
 But do not capitalize such expressions and deriva- 
 tives as 
 
 (God's) fatherhood, (Jesus') sonship, messiahship, messianic 
 hope, christological (but: Christology).
 
 14 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 25. Words which have an acquired, limited, or special 
 meaning: 
 
 the Doctor's degree; a report of the Master (in chancery); 
 a Bachelor's hood; a Freshman. 
 
 But do not capitalize such expressions as 
 the doctorate, a master in chancery (the last two words being 
 explanatory, the capitalization of "master" is here no longer 
 necessary to indicate a special meaning). 
 
 26. "Nature" and similar terms, and abstract ideas, 
 when personified: 
 
 "Nature wields her scepter mercilessly"; "Vice in the old 
 English morality plays." 
 
 27. "Father" used for church father, and "reformers" 
 used of Reformation leaders, whenever the meaning 
 otherwise would be ambiguous: 
 
 the Fathers, the early Fathers, the Greek Fathers, [Pilgrim 
 Fathers], the Reformers (but: the church reformers of the 
 fifteenth century). 
 
 28. The word "church" in properly cited titles of 
 nationally organized bodies of believers in which, 
 through historical associations, it has become insepa- 
 rably linked with the name of a specific locality; or 
 when forming part of the name of a particular 
 edifice: 
 
 Church of Rome, Church of England, High Church; Church 
 of the Holy Sepulcher, Fifth Avenue Baptist Church, First 
 Methodist Church. 
 
 But do not capitalize, except as noted above, when 
 standing alone, in any sense universal, national,
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: CAPITALIZATION 15 
 
 local or when the name is not correctly or fully 
 quoted : 
 
 the church (= organized Christianity), the Eastern (Greek 
 Orthodox) church, the Roman Catholic church, the estab- 
 lished church (but: the Establishment), the state church; the 
 Baptist church in Englewood. 
 
 NOTE. In exceptional cases, where the opposition of Church 
 and State constitutes a fundamental part of the argument, and 
 it is desired to lend force to this antithesis, emphasis may be added 
 by capitalizing the two words. 
 
 29. Names for the Bible and other sacred books: 
 
 (Holy, Sacred) Scriptures, Holy Writ, Word of God, Book of 
 Books; Koran, Vedas, Mishna, the Upanishads; Apocrypha. 
 
 But do not capitalize adjectives derived from such 
 
 nouns : 
 
 biblical, scriptural, koranic, vedic, talmudic, apocryphal. 
 
 30. Versions and editions of the Bible: 
 
 King James's Version, Authorized Version (A.V.), Revised 
 Version (R.V.), Polychrome Bible, Septuagint (LXX), 
 Peshitto. 
 
 31. Books and divisions of the Bible and of other sacred 
 books (Christian or otherwise) (see 60) : 
 
 Old Testament, Pentateuch, Exodus, II (Second) Kings, 
 Book of Job, Psalms (Psalter), the [Mosaic] Law and the 
 [writings of the] Prophets, Minor Prophets, Wisdom Literature, 
 Gospel of Luke, Synoptic Gospels, Fourth Gospel, Acts of 
 the Apostles (the Acts), Epistle to the Romans, Pastoral 
 Epistles, Apocalypse (Revelation), Sermon on the Mount, 
 Beatitudes, Lord's Prayer, Ten Commandments (Decalogue), 
 Judith, Bel and the Dragon, the Koran, the Vedas.
 
 1 6 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 But do not capitalize words like "book," "gospel," 
 "epistle," "psalm" in such connections as 
 
 the five books of Moses, the first forty psalms, the gospels 
 and epistles of the New Testament, [the synoptic problem, 
 the synoptists], the biblical apocalypses. 
 
 32. Biblical parables: 
 
 the parable of the Prodigal Son. 
 
 33. Such miscellaneous terms as 
 
 Last Supper, Eucharist, the Passion, the Twelve (apostles), 
 the Seventy (disciples), the Servant, the Day of Yahweh, the 
 Chronicler, the Psalmist, the Golden Rule, the Kingdom of 
 God, or of Heaven. 
 
 34. The first word of a sentence, and in poetry the first 
 word of each line: 
 
 In summer, on the headlands, 
 
 The Baltic Sea along, 
 Sit Neckan, with his harp of gold, 
 
 And sings his plaintive song. 
 
 But in Greek and Latin poetry capitalize only the 
 first word of a paragraph, not of each verse (line) : 
 
 Town 8' dotSos aeiSe irepixAvTos, ot Sc cruairrj 
 eurr' axouovTCs' 6 8' 'A^atwv voarov aeiSev, 
 Avypdv, ov fK TpoirjS eTreretXaro IlaAAas 'Adrivrj. 
 
 TOV 8' VTTp(l)l6$V <f>p<TL (TVvOeTO QicrinV (ZOtS^V 
 
 Kovprj 'iKoptoio, Trcpu^pwv II^veXoTreta' 
 
 Talia praefantes quondam felicia Pelei 
 carmina diuino cecinerunt pectore Parcae 
 praesentes: namque ante domos inuisere castas 
 heroum et sese mortali ostendere coetu 
 caelicolae nondum spreta pietate solebant
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: CAPITALIZATION 17 
 
 35. The first word after a colon only when introducing 
 a complete passage, or sentence which would have 
 independent meaning, as in summarizations and 
 quotations not closely connected with what precedes; 
 or where the colon has the weight of such expres- 
 sion as "as follows," "namely," "for instance," or 
 a similar phrase, and is followed by a logically com- 
 plete sentence: 
 
 "In conclusion I wish to say: It will be seen from the above 
 that ...."; "As the old proverb has it: 'Haste makes 
 waste'"; "My theory is: The moment the hot current strikes 
 the surface . . . ." 
 
 But do not capitalize the first word of a quotation if 
 immediately connected with what precedes (unless, 
 as the first word of a sentence, beginning a paragraph 
 in reduced type) ; or the first word after a colon, if 
 an implied "namely," or a similar term, is followed 
 by a brief explanatory phrase, logically dependent 
 upon the preceding clause: 
 
 "The old adage is true that 'haste makes waste'"; "Two 
 explanations present themselves: either he came too late for 
 the train, or he was detained at the station." 
 
 36. As a rule, the first word in sections of an enumera- 
 tion, if any one link contains two or more distinct 
 clauses, separated by a semicolon, colon, or period, 
 unless all are dependent upon the same term pre- 
 ceding and leading up to them (see 138) : 
 
 His reasons for refusal were three: (i) He did not have the 
 time. (2) He did not have the means; or, at any rate, had no
 
 l8 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 funds available at the moment. (3) He doubted the feasi- 
 bility of the plan. But: He objected that (i) he did not 
 have the time; (2) he did not have the means; or, at any 
 rate, had no funds available; (3) he doubted the feasibility 
 of the plan. 
 
 37. As a rule, nouns followed by a numeral particu- 
 larly a capitalized Roman numeral indicating 
 their order in a sequence; also sums of money in 
 German and French: 
 
 Room 16, Ps. 20, Grade IV, Act I, Vol. I, No. 2, Book II, 
 Div. Ill, Part IV, Plate III; M. 6; Fr. 5. 
 
 But do not capitalize such minor subdivisions of 
 publications as 
 
 sec 4, scene i, art. "Evidence," chap. 2 (ii), p. 7 (vii), 
 vs. n, 1. 5, n. 6. (See no.) 
 
 38. The first word of a cited speech (or thought) in 
 direct discourse, whether preceded by a colon or a 
 comma (on this see 131): 
 
 On leaving he remarked: "Never shall I forget this day"; 
 With the words, "Never shall I forget this day," he departed; 
 I thought to myself: This day I shall never forget (without 
 quotation marks). 
 
 39. In resolutions, the first words following " WHEREAS" 
 and "Resolved": 
 
 WHEREAS, It has pleased God . . . . ; therefore be it 
 Resolved, That .... 
 
 40. The exclamations "O" and "Oh" (see 117): 
 
 "O Lord!" "I know not, Oh, I know not!" "Oh, that I 
 were home again!"
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: CAPITALIZATION 1 9 
 
 41. All the principal words (i.e., nouns, pronouns, 
 adjectives, adverbs, verbs, first and last words) in 
 English titles of publications (books, pamphlets, doc- 
 uments, periodicals, reports, proceedings, etc.), and 
 their divisions (parts, chapters, sections, poems, 
 articles, etc.) ; in subjects of lectures, papers, toasts, 
 etc.; in cap-and-small-cap and italic center-heads 
 (both of which, however, should be avoided), and 
 bold-face cut-in heads and side-heads; in cap-and- 
 small-cap box-heads in tables (see 279-83) : 
 
 The Men Who Made the Nation; The American College 
 Its Past and Present; the Report of the Committee oj Nine; 
 "In the Proceedings of the National Education Association 
 for 1907 there appeared a paper entitled, 'The Financial 
 Value of Education.'" 
 
 NOTE. The Botanical Gazette capitalizes only first words and 
 proper names; and the practice may properly be followed in 
 general bibliographies, such as are to be found under the title 
 "Literature Cited" in the Botanical Gazette (see 60). This style 
 is very generally followed by librarians and others in the com- 
 pilation of lists of books and publications. 
 
 42. In foreign titles, in addition to capitalizing the first 
 word, follow these general rules: 
 
 a) In Latin, capitalize proper nouns, and adjectives 
 
 derived therefrom: 
 
 De amicitia, Bettum Gallicum. 
 
 6) In French, Italian, Spanish, Swedish, and Nor- 
 wegian titles, capitalize proper nouns but not ad- 
 jectives derived therefrom :
 
 20 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 Histoire de la litterature franfaise, Novelle e racconti popolari 
 iialiani, Antologia de poetas liricos castellanos, Svenska littera- 
 turens historic. 
 
 c} In German and Danish, capitalize all nouns but 
 not the adjectives, except German adjectives derived 
 from the names of persons: 
 
 Geschichte des deutschen Feudalwesens (but: die Homer ische 
 Frage), Videnskabens Fremskridt i detnittende Aarhundrede; 
 and in abbreviations, B.P.W. for Berliner philologische 
 W ochenschrift. 
 
 d) In Dutch, capitalize all nouns, and all adjectives 
 derived from proper nouns: 
 Geschiedenis der Nederlandsche Taal. 
 
 43. In mentioning titles of newspapers, magazines, and 
 similar publications, do not, as a rule, treat the 
 definite article as part of the title: 
 
 the Chicago Tribune, the School Review, the Annual Register 
 of the University of Chicago. 
 
 44. Titles of ancient manuscripts (singular, MS; plural, 
 MSS) (see 60): 
 
 Codex Bernensis, Cod. Canonicianus. 
 
 45. In titles with the main words capitalized, all nouns 
 forming parts of hyphenated compounds: 
 
 "Twentieth-Century Progress," "The Economy of High- 
 Speed Trains." 
 
 But do not capitalize such components when other 
 than nouns: 
 
 Fifty-first Street, "Lives of Well-known Authors," "World- 
 Dominion of English-speaking Peoples."
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: CAPITALIZATION 21 
 
 And in side-heads do not capitalize any but the first 
 word and proper nouns (see 56 and 172). 
 
 46. In botanical, geological, zoological, and paleonto- 
 logical matter, the scientific (Latin) names of divi- 
 sions, orders, families, and genera, but not their 
 English derivatives: 
 
 Cotylosauria, but: cotylosaurs; Felidae, but: felids; 
 Carnivora, but: carnivores. 
 
 Also in botanical and zoological matter, the names 
 of species, if derived from names of persons, or 
 from generic names; but in geological and medical 
 matter the names of species are never capitalized: 
 
 Felis leo, Cocos nucifera, Rosa Carolina, Parkinsonia Torrey- 
 ana, Styrax californica, Lythrum hyssopifolia, Phyleuma 
 Halleri, Car ex Halleriana (but [geological] : Pterygomatopus 
 schmidti, Conodectus favosus). (See 71.) 
 
 47. The names and epithets of peoples, races, and tribes: 
 
 Kafir, Negro (in its ethnic sense), Hottentot, Makassar, 
 Buginese, Celestials. 
 
 48. In astronomical work, the names of the bodies of 
 the planets, stars, and groups of stars (but not 
 "sun," "earth," "moon," "stars"); designations 
 of celestial objects in well-known catalogues ; also 
 the Flams teed numbers: 
 
 Saturn, Ursa Major, the Milky Way, the Great Bear; 
 M 13 (for No. 13 of Messier's Catalogue of Nebulae and 
 Clusters). Bond 619, N.G.C. 6165, B.D.-i8487i; 85 
 Pegasi, Lalande 5761.
 
 22 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 49. Divisions, departments, officers, and courses of 
 study of the University of Chicago, in all official 
 work dealing with its administration or curricula: 
 
 (the University), the School of Education (the School), the 
 University Extension Division (but: the division), the Depart- 
 ment of Anthropology (also: the Department); the Board 
 of Trustees (the Trustees, the Board), the Senate, the 
 Council, University College (also: the College), the School 
 of Commerce and Administration (also: the School), the 
 Faculty of the College of Commerce and Administration, 
 Dean of the Faculties (also: the Faculty); .the President, 
 the Recorder, Professor of Physics, Assistant in Chemistry, 
 Fellow, Scholar; the Van Husen Scholarship (but: the 
 scholarship); courses in Political Economy, Autumn Quarter 
 (but: a quarter), First Term (but: two terms; major, minor); 
 [Hall (referring to the University dormitories)]. 
 
 USE CAPITALS AND SMALL CAPITALS FOR 
 
 50. The names of town and state in the date line, and 
 the salutatory phrase at the beginning, of letters, 
 and the signature and residence at the end of letters 
 or articles, etc.: 
 
 CHICAGO, ILL., January i, 1911 
 
 (Set to the right, with one em's indention, and preferably in 
 smaller type than the body of the letter.) 
 
 MY DEAR MR. SMITH: 
 
 (Set flush, followed by a colon, in the same type as the body 
 of the letter, and in a separate line, unless preceded by 
 another line giving the name and address, in which case it
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: CAPITALIZATION 23 
 
 should be run in with the text of the letter, indented as a 
 paragraph [see 64].) 
 
 CHARLES W. SCOTT 
 
 (Set to the right, with one em's indention, and in the same 
 type as the body of the letter or article.) 
 
 HARVARD UNIVERSITY 
 
 CAMBRIDGE, MASS. 
 
 June 7, 1911 
 
 (Set to the left, with two ems' indention, in smaller type.) 
 (Each line of the address should be in caps and small caps, 
 and should be centered on the one preceding. The date 
 should be in caps and lower case, likewise centered on those 
 above.) 
 
 51. In resolutions, the word "WHEREAS" (see 39); in 
 notes (not footnotes), the word "NOTE," which 
 should be followed by a period and a dash; in con- 
 stitutions, by-laws, etc., the word "SECTION" intro- 
 ducing paragraphs and followed by a number: 
 
 NOTE. It should be noticed that .... 
 
 SECTION i. This association shall be styled .... 
 
 The usual practice is to abbreviate the word 
 "section" each time it is used in such a connection 
 except the first: 
 
 SECTION i. The name of the association .... 
 SEC. 2. The object of the association .... 
 
 SET IN SMALL CAPITALS 
 
 52. A.M. and P.M. (ante and post meridiem), and B.C. 
 and A.D. ("before Christ" and anno Domini); these
 
 24 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 should be set without a space between (see 22, 
 
 103, 106, 219): 
 
 11:30 A.M.; 53 B.C., 1906 A.D. 
 
 USE SMALL (i.e., "lower-case") INITIAL LETTER FOR 
 
 53. Words of common usage, originally proper names, 
 and their derivatives in whose present, generalized 
 acceptation the origin has become obscured, and 
 generally all verbs derived from proper names 
 (see i) : 
 
 Utopia, bohemian, philistine, titanic, platonic, quixotic, 
 bonanza, china, morocco, guinea-pig, boycott, roman (type), 
 italicize, anglicize, macadamize, paris green. 
 
 54. In literary references, such minor subdivisions and 
 their abbreviations as 
 
 chapter, section, page, article, verse, line, note; chap., sec., 
 p., art., vs., 1., n. (See 37, no, and 237.) 
 
 55. Units of measurement as 
 
 h.=hour, min.=minute, sec.=second; lb.=pound, oz.= 
 ounce; yd.=yard, ft. = foot; etc. 
 
 56. In side-heads, all but the first word and proper 
 names (see 172 and 280). 
 
 57. The first word of a quotation which, through a con- 
 junction or otherwise, is immediately connected with 
 what precedes, even if such word in the original 
 begins a sentence. 
 
 For illustration and exception see 35 and 131.
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: ITALICS 25 
 
 THE USE OF ITALICS 
 ITALICIZE 
 
 58. Words or phrases to which it is desired to lend 
 emphasis, importance, etc.: 
 
 "This was, however, not the case"; "It is sufficiently plain 
 that the sciences of life, at least, are studies of processes." 
 
 But beware of the excessive use of italics, for the 
 appearance of the over-italicized page is not 
 pleasing and the too frequent use of italics for 
 emphasis weakens the text. See note to 41. 
 
 59. Words and phrases from foreign languages, inserted 
 into the English text, and not incorporated into the 
 English language; and also (as a rule) single sen- 
 tences or brief passages not of sufficient length to 
 call for reduced type (see 85) : 
 
 "the Darwinian Weltanschauung"; "Napoleon's coup d'etat"; 
 "the debater par excellence of the Senate "; "De gustibus non 
 est disputandum, or, as the French have it, Chacun & son 
 goto." 
 
 But do not italicize foreign titles preceding names, 
 or names of foreign institutions or places the meaning 
 or position of which in English would have required 
 roman type, and which either are without English 
 equivalents or are by preference used in lieu of these: 
 
 Pere Lagrange, Freiherr von Schwenau; the German 
 Reichstag, the Champs Elysees, the Museo delle Tenne;
 
 26 
 
 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 nor words of everyday occurrence which have become 
 sufficiently anglicized, even though still retaining the 
 accents of the original language: 
 
 addendum 
 
 chiaroscuro 
 
 ensemble 
 
 (plur. -da) 
 
 clientele 
 
 entente 
 
 ad interim 
 
 confrere 
 
 entree 
 
 ad lib[itumj 
 
 connoisseur 
 
 entrep6t 
 
 ad valorem 
 
 consensus 
 
 entrepreneur 
 
 aide de camp 
 
 contra 
 
 erratum (plur. -a) 
 
 alias 
 
 contretemps 
 
 et cetera 
 
 alibi 
 
 corrigendum 
 
 ex cathedra 
 
 Alma Mater 
 
 (plur. -da) 
 
 ex officio 
 
 amateur 
 
 coup d'e"tat 
 
 expose 
 
 anno Domini 
 
 coup de grace 
 
 facade 
 
 ante-bellum 
 
 creche 
 
 facsimile 
 
 a posteriori 
 
 criterion (plur. -a) 
 
 faience 
 
 a priori 
 
 cul-de-sac 
 
 fete 
 
 apropos 
 
 datum (plur. -a) 
 
 finis 
 
 atelier 
 
 debris 
 
 fracas 
 
 attache 
 
 debut 
 
 gratis 
 
 au revoir 
 
 decollete 
 
 Gymnasium 
 
 barrage 
 
 delicatessen 
 
 (German) 
 
 bas-relief 
 
 demilune 
 
 habeas corpus 
 
 beau ideal 
 
 demimonde 
 
 habitue 
 
 billet doux 
 
 demirelievo 
 
 hangar 
 
 bona fide 
 
 demi-tasse 
 
 hegira 
 
 bon ton 
 
 denouement 
 
 hors d'ceuvres 
 
 bouillon 
 
 depdt (= deposi- 
 
 innuendo 
 
 bourgeois 
 
 tory) 
 
 laissez faire 
 
 bourgeoisie 
 
 de rigueur 
 
 lese majeste 
 
 bravo 
 
 detour 
 
 levee 
 
 bric-a-brac 
 
 dilettante 
 
 litterateur 
 
 cabaret 
 
 divorcee 
 
 litterati 
 
 cafe 
 
 doctrinaire 
 
 Magna C[h]arta 
 
 camouflage 
 
 dramatis per- 
 
 mandamus 
 
 cantina 
 
 sonae 
 
 marchen 
 
 carte blanche 
 
 eclat 
 
 massage 
 
 chaperon 
 
 elite 
 
 matador 
 
 charge d'affaires 
 
 encore 
 
 matinee 
 
 chauffeur 
 
 ennui 
 
 melange 
 
 chef d'oeuvre 
 
 en route 
 
 melee
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: ITALICS 
 
 27 
 
 menu 
 
 portmonnaie 
 
 savant 
 
 milieu 
 
 postmortem (n. 
 
 senor 
 
 mitrailleuse 
 
 and adj.) 
 
 seraglio 
 
 mores 
 
 post obit 
 
 sobriquet 
 
 naive 
 
 prima facie 
 
 soiree 
 
 nee 
 
 pro and con[tra] 
 
 spirituel 
 
 neve 
 
 proces verbal 
 
 stein 
 
 niche 
 
 pro rata 
 
 subpoena 
 
 nil 
 
 protege 
 
 tte-a-tete 
 
 nol[le] pros[equi] 
 
 pro tem[pore] 
 
 tonneau 
 
 nom de plume 
 
 protocol 
 
 ultimatum 
 
 onus 
 
 queue 
 
 umlaut 
 
 papier mache 
 
 quondam 
 
 verbatim 
 
 par excellence 
 
 ragout 
 
 verso 
 
 parvenu 
 
 regime 
 
 versus (v., vs.) 1 
 
 paterfamilias 
 
 rendezvous 
 
 via 
 
 patois 
 
 resume 
 
 vice versa 
 
 per annum 
 
 reveille 
 
 vis-a-vis 
 
 per capita 
 
 role 
 
 vise 
 
 per contra 
 
 sauerkraut 
 
 viva voce 
 
 per se 
 
 
 
 1 But italicize v. or vs. when standing between two opposing terms not 
 themselves italicized (see 63) when otherwise the meaning would not be clear: 
 Michigan vs. Minnesota, 3 to o. 
 
 But do not hyphenate any of these foreign words 
 when used as adjectives. 
 
 60. Titles of publications books (including plays, essays, 
 cycles of poems, single poems of considerable length, 
 and symphonies, usually printed separately, and 
 not from the context understood to form parts of a 
 large volume [see 81]), pamphlets, treatises, tracts, 
 documents, operas, oratorios, and periodicals (in- 
 cluding regularly appearing proceedings and trans- 
 actions; and also the name of a journal appearing 
 in the journal itself, and the word "journal," 
 "review," etc., standing alone, if a part of the
 
 28 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 name of the publication) (see 41) ; and in the case 
 of newspapers, periodicals, etc., the name of the 
 city (where published) when forming an integral 
 part of the name : 
 
 Spencer, Principles of Sociology; A Midsummer-Night's 
 Dream; Idylls of the King; Paradise Lost; The Messiah; 
 Lohengrin; the Modern Language Review, the Chicago 
 Tribune, the Indianapolis Star, Report of the United Slates 
 Commissioner of Education, Groningen Publications, No. 27. 
 
 NOTE. The Botanical Gazette uses italics for such titles in the 
 text only; in footnotes, roman. Its own name it prints in caps 
 and small caps BOTANICAL GAZETTE. 
 
 This rule may be departed from in lengthy biblio- 
 graphical lists, in tables, or in other matter where 
 to follow it would result in an undue preponder- 
 ance of italics (see note to 41). 
 Books of the Bible, both canonical and apocryphal, 
 and titles of ancient manuscripts should be set in 
 roman type, as also symbols used to designate 
 manuscripts (see 31 and 44) : 
 Psalms 53: 10, Di6, Mb, P, J. 
 
 61. The following words, phrases, and abbreviations 
 used in literary and legal references: 
 
 ad loc., circa (ca.), et al., ibid., idem, infra, loc. cit., op. cit., 
 passim, sic, sc., supra, s.v., vide. 
 
 But do not italicize 
 
 cf., e.g., i.e., v. or vs. (versus) (unless ambiguity would 
 result; see note to 59), viz., etc.
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: ITALICS 29 
 
 62. The words See and See also, when used in an index 
 or similar compilation, for the purpose of a cross- 
 reference, where the differentiation of those words 
 from the context is desirable ; and the words for 
 and read in lists of errata, to separate them from 
 the incorrect and correct readings: 
 
 See also Sociology; for levee read Iev6e. 
 
 63. The names of plaintiff and defendant in the citation 
 of legal causes; also the titles of proceedings con- 
 taining such prefixes as in re, ex parte, and in the 
 matter of, etc. : 
 
 Conolly v. Union Sewer Pipe Co.; In re Smith; Ex parte 
 Brown; In the matter of the petition of Henry Robinson for a 
 writ of habeas corpus. 
 
 64. Address lines in speeches, reports, etc., and primary 
 address lines in letters (set flush, in a separate line, 
 with nouns capitalized [see 50]) : 
 
 Mr. President, Ladies and Gentlemen: 
 Mr. John Smith, 321 Dearborn Street, Chicago, III. 
 DEAR SIR: I take pleasure in announcing .... 
 
 65. In signatures, the position or title added after the 
 name. If this consists of only one word, it is run into 
 the same line with the name; if of more than one, 
 but no longer than the name, center the first letter 
 under the name line, and indent one em on the 
 right; if longer than the name, center the name over
 
 30 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 the second line and set this flush. These rules are, 
 however, subject to the exigencies of special cases: 
 
 ARTHUR P. MAGUIRE, Secretary 
 Yours very truly, 
 
 CARTER H. HARRISON 
 
 Mayor of Chicago 
 
 CHARLES M. GAYLEY 
 Professor of English Language and Literature 
 
 66. a), b), c), etc., used to indicate subdivisions (single 
 parenthesis if beginning a paragraph, double paren- 
 theses if "run in"); and a, 6, c, etc., affixed to the 
 number of verse, page, etc., to denote fractional part: 
 Luke 4:310. 
 
 67. Letters used to designate unknown quantities, lines, 
 etc., in algebraic, geometrical, and similar matter: 
 ac+bc=c(a+b); the lines ad and A D; the nth power. 
 
 68. As a rule, letters in legends or in the text referring 
 to corresponding letters in accompanying illustra- 
 tions whether or not they are in italics on the 
 illustration : 
 
 "At the point A above (see diagram)." 
 
 69. References to particular letters: 
 the letter u, a small v, a capital S. 
 
 But do not italicize a letter used in the place of a 
 name in hypothetical statements or in cases where
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: ITALICS 31 
 
 only the initial is used with a dash or as a simple 
 abbreviation : 
 
 "A bought land from B without registration of title"; 
 
 "The news was brought at once to General M "; "Mr. 
 
 G. was not at home when we called." 
 
 70. s. and<f. (= shillings and pence) following numerals: 
 3*. 6d. (See 270.) 
 
 71. In zoological, geological, and paleontological mat- 
 ter, scientific (Latin) names of genera and species 
 when used together, the generic name being in the 
 nominative singular : 
 
 Felis leo, Rosa Carolina, Conodectes favosus, Phyteuma 
 Halleri. (See 46, 48.) 
 
 In botanical, geological, and paleontological matter, 
 the names of genera and species when used together, 
 and of genera, only, when used alone: 
 Acer saccharum, Basidiobolus, Alternaria, Erythrosuchits. 
 In medical matter, however, the general practice 
 is to print such names in roman, avoiding italics 
 altogether. 
 
 In astronomical and astrophysical matter : 
 a) The lower-case letters designating certain 
 Fraunhof er lines : 
 a, b, g, h. 
 
 6) The lower-case letters used by Baeyer to desig- 
 nate certain stars in constellations for which the 
 Greek letters have been exhausted: 
 f Tauri, u Herculis.
 
 32 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 c) When initials are used to express the titles of 
 catalogues, as such, and not to designate a 
 particular celestial object, such initials are to be 
 italicized (see 48, 60) : 
 B.D.,N.G.C. 
 
 d} Symbols for the chemical elements: 
 H, Ca, Ti. 
 
 In accordance with the best modern practice, 
 italics should no longer be used for: 
 
 a) The capital letters given by Fraunhofer to 
 spectral lines : 
 A-H, and K. 
 
 6) The letters designating the spectral types of 
 
 stars : 
 
 AS, 64, Mb. 
 
 c) The capital letter H with different Greek letters, 
 used to designate the various lines of hydrogen: 
 Ha, H/?, etc. 
 
 72. In resolutions, italicize the word "Resolved." (See 
 39-) 
 
 73. After headlines or titles, as a rule, the word "Con- 
 tinued" ; and "To be continued" at the end of articles 
 (see 179) : 
 
 THE SCOPE OF SOCIOLOGY Continued 
 [To be continued]
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: QUOTATIONS 33 
 
 QUOTATIONS 1 
 
 PUT BETWEEN QUOTATION MARKS (and in roman type 
 i.e., "roman-quote") 1 
 
 74. Citations, run into the text, of a passage from an 
 author in his own words (see 85). 
 
 75. Quotations from different authors, or from different 
 works by the same author, following each other, 
 uninterrupted by any intervening original matter, or 
 by any reference to their respective sources (other 
 than a reference figure for a footnote), even though 
 such quotations are reduced (see 85-87) . 
 
 76. A word or phrase accompanied by its definition: 
 "Drop-folio" means a page-number at the foot of the page. 
 
 77. An unusual, technical, ironical, etc., word or phrase 
 in the text, whether or not accompanied by a word, 
 like "so-called," directing attention to it: 
 
 Her "five o' clocks" were famous in the neighborhood; She 
 was wearing a gown of "lobster-colored" silk; He was elected 
 "master of the rolls"; We then repaired to what he called 
 his "quarter deck"; A "lead" is then inserted between the 
 lines; This so-called "man of affairs." 
 
 78. In translations, the English equivalent of a word, 
 phrase, or passage from a foreign language : 
 Weltanschauung, "world- view" or "fundamental aspect of 
 life"; Mommsen, Rimische Geschichte ("History of Rome"). 
 
 l ln French small angle marks are used for quotation marks; in German two 
 primes on one type body are used.
 
 34 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 79. The particular or unusual word or words to which 
 attention is directed : 
 
 the term "lynch law"; the phrase "liberty of conscience"; 
 the concepts "good" and "bad"; the name "Chicago." 
 
 But not in matter discussing terms or words where 
 
 the meaning is clear: 
 
 The definition of the word God. 
 
 80. Titles of book series: 
 
 "English Men of Letters Series"; "International Critical 
 Commentary"; the series "Handbooks of Ethics and 
 Religion." 
 
 81. Titles of shorter poems (see 60): 
 Shelley's "To a Skylark." 
 
 82. Cited titles of subdivisions (e.g., parts, books, chap- 
 ters, etc.) of publications; titles of papers, lectures, 
 sermons, articles, toasts, mottoes, etc.: 
 
 The Beginnings of the Science of Political Economy, Vol. I, 
 "The British School," chap, ii, "John Stuart Mill"; the 
 articles "Cross," "Crucifixion," and "Crusade" in Hast- 
 ings' Dictionary of the Bible; The subject of the lecture was 
 "Japan Its Past, Present, and Future"; the next toast on 
 the program was "Our Canadian Visitor"; The king's 
 motto is "For God and My Country." 
 
 NOTE. The Botanical Gazette, in footnotes, does not use 
 quotation marks for such titles. 
 
 References to the Preface, Introduction, Table of 
 Contents, Index, etc., of a specific work, should be 
 set with capitals, without quotation marks: 
 
 Preface, p. iii; "The Introduction contains ...."; "The 
 Appendix occupies a hundred pages"; but: "The book has 
 a very complete index."
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: QUOTATIONS 35 
 
 83. Names of ships: 
 
 the U.S. SS." Oregon." 
 
 84. Titles of pictures and works of art: 
 Murillo's "The Holy Family." 
 
 SET IN SMALLER TYPE 
 
 85. Ordinarily, all prose extracts which will make five 
 or more lines in the smaller type, and all poetry 
 citations of two lines or more. An isolated prose 
 quotation may properly be run into the text if it 
 bears an organic relation to the argument presented. 
 But a quotation of one or two lines which is closely 
 preceded or followed by longer extracts in smaller type 
 may be reduced as a matter of uniform appearance. 
 
 86. As a rule, reduce from n pt. and 10 pt. to 9 pt., 
 from 9 pt. to 8 pt., from 8 pt. to 6 pt. (see 252). 
 
 87. Reduced citations should not have quotation marks, 
 except in such cases as noted in 75; nor should 
 quotation marks, as a rule, be used in connection 
 with italics. 
 
 GENERAL RULES 
 
 88. Quotation marks should always include ellipses, and 
 the phrase "etc." when it otherwise would not be 
 clear that it stands for an omitted part of the matter 
 quoted, perfect clearness in each individual case 
 being the best criterion: 
 
 "Art. II, sec. 2, of the Constitution provides that 'each state 
 shall appoint .... a number of electors equal to the whole 
 number of senators and representatives . . . .'"; "He also
 
 36 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 wrote a series of 'Helps to Discovery, etc.'" "etc." here 
 indicating, not that he wrote other works which are unnamed, 
 but that the title of the one named is not given in full; but, 
 on the other hand: "Preaching from the text, 'For God so 
 
 loved the world,' etc " "etc." here being placed 
 
 outside of the quotation marks in order to show that it does 
 not stand for other, unnamed, objects of God's love. 
 
 89. Quoted prose matter (i.e., matter set with quotation 
 marks; see above) which is broken up into para- 
 graphs should have the quotation marks repeated 
 at the beginning of each paragraph. 
 
 90. Where alignment is desired, the quotation marks 
 should be "cleared" i.e., should project beyond 
 the line of alignment: 
 
 "Keep away from dirtiness keep away from mess. 
 Don't get into doin' things rather-more-or-less ! " 
 
 91. Double quotation marks are used for primary quota- 
 tions; for a quotation within a quotation, single; 
 going back to double for a third, to single for a 
 fourth, and so on: 
 
 "Let me quote from Rossetti's Life of Keats" he said. 
 "Mr. Rossetti writes as follows: 
 
 "'To one of these phrases a few words of comment may 
 be given. That axiom which concludes the "Ode on a 
 Grecian Urn" 
 
 '""Beauty is truth, truth beauty that is all 
 
 Ye know on earth, and all ye need to know," 
 is perhaps the most important contribution to thought 
 which the poetry of Keats contains: it pairs with and 
 transcends 
 
 "'"A thing of beauty is a joy forever."' 
 
 "And now I shall conclude my first point," he continued, 
 "by remarking that . . . ."
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: SPELLING 37 
 
 SPELLING 
 SPELL OUT 
 
 92. All religious, civil, and military titles of honor and 
 respect, and forms of address, preceding the name, 
 except Mr., Messrs., Mrs. (French: M., MM., 
 Mme, Mile), Dr., Rev., Hon., St. (do not, except 
 in quotations and in correspondence, set the Rev., 
 the Hon.); Esq., following the name, should like- 
 wise always be abbreviated. 
 
 93. Christian names, as George, Charles, John (not: 
 Geo., Chas., Jno.), except where the abbreviated 
 form is used in quoted matter or in original signa- 
 tures; and "von" as part of a person's name (see 
 240) ; references in text (not parenthetical or foot- 
 note citations) to chapters, pages, lines, figures, 
 etc. (See 69.) 
 
 94. Subject to the exceptions named at the end of this 
 section, in ordinary reading-matter, all numbers of 
 less than three digits, unless of a statistical or 
 technical character, or unless occurring in groups 
 of six or more following each other in close succes- 
 sion. (See 2736.) 
 
 "There are thirty -eight cities in the United States with a 
 population of 100,000 or over"; "a fifty-yard dash"; "two 
 pounds of sugar"; "Four horses, sixteen cows, seventy-six 
 sheep, and a billy goat constituted the live stock of the farm"; 
 "He spent a total of two years, three months, and seventeen
 
 38 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 days in jail." But: "He spent 128 days in the hospital"; 
 "a board 20 feet 2 inches long by i$ feet wide and ij inches 
 thick"; "the ratio of 16 to i"; "In some quarters of Paris, 
 inhabited by wealthy families, the death-rate is i to every 65 
 persons; in others, inhabited by the poor, it is i to 15"; "His 
 purchase consisted of 2 pounds of sugar, 20 pounds of flour, 
 i pound of coffee, \ pound of tea, 3 pounds of meat, and 
 ij pounds of fish, besides 2 pecks of potatoes and a pint of 
 vinegar." 
 
 Treat all numbers in connected groups alike, as far 
 as possible; do not use figures for some and spell out 
 others; if the largest contains three or more digits, 
 use figures for all (see 96) : 
 
 "The force employed during the three months was 87, 93, 
 and 106, respectively." 
 
 As a general rule, however, decimals, degrees, 
 dimensions, distances, enumerations, money, per- 
 centage, weights, and like matter should be 
 expressed in figures: 
 
 10, 45 miles, 3 cubic feet, 24 pages, 100 bushels, 9 per cent 
 (see 123), 45 pounds, $1,000, etc. 
 
 95. Round numbers (i.e., approximate figures in even 
 units, the unit being 100 in numbers of less than 
 1,000, and 1,000 in numbers of more) : 
 
 "The attendance was estimated at five hundred" (but: "at 
 550"); "a thesis of about three thousand words" (but: "of 
 about 2,700"); "The population of Chicago is approximately 
 three millions" (but: "2,900,000"). Cases like 1,500, if for 
 some special reason spelled out, should be written "fifteen 
 hundred," not "one thousand five hundred."
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: SPELLING 39 
 
 96. All numbers, no matter how high, and all terms of 
 measurement or number otherwise abbreviated, 
 commencing a sentence in ordinary reading-matter: 
 "Five hundred and ninety-three men, 417 women, and 126 
 children under eighteen, besides 63 of the crew, went down 
 with the ship"; "Figure 3 shows the comparative difference 
 in prices." 
 
 When this is impracticable, or for any reason unde- 
 sirable, reconstruct the sentence; e.g.: 
 "The total number of those who went down with the ship 
 was 593 men," etc. 
 
 97. Sums of money, when occurring in isolated cases in 
 ordinary reading-matter : 
 
 "The admission was two dollars." 
 When several such numbers occur close together, and 
 in all matter of a statistical character, use figures: 
 "Admission: men, $2; women, $i; children, 25 cents." 
 
 98. Time of day, in ordinary reading-matter: 
 
 at four; at half-past two in the afternoon; at seven o'clock. 
 Statistically, in enumerations, and always in connec- 
 tion with A.M. and P.M., use figures: 
 at 4: 15 P.M. (omit "o'clock" in such connections). 
 
 99. Ages: 
 
 eighty years and four months old; children between six and 
 fourteen. 
 
 100. Numbers of centuries, of Egyptian dynasties, of 
 sessions of Congress, of military bodies, of political 
 divisions, of thoroughfares, and in all similar cases, 
 unless brevity is an important consideration (see 
 7, 8, and 13) :
 
 40 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 nineteenth century; Fifth Dynasty; Fifty-fourth Congress, 
 second session; Fifteenth Infantry I.N.G.; Sixth Con- 
 gressional District, Second Ward; Fifth Avenue. 
 
 101. References to particular decades: 
 in the nineties (see 165). 
 
 102. Names of months, except in statistical matter or in 
 long enumerations: 
 
 from January i to April 15 (omit, after dates, st, d, and th). 
 
 103. "United States," except in quotations and such con- 
 nections as: General Schofield, U.S.A.; U.S. SS. 
 " Oregon"; in footnotes and similar references: U.S. 
 Geological Survey (see 22, 52, 106). 
 
 104. "Railroad (-way)," and "Fort," "Mount," and 
 "Port" in geographical appellations (see 4): 
 
 Chicago, Milwaukee & St. Paul Railroad (not: R.R. orRy.); 
 Fort Wayne, Mount Elias, Port Huron. 
 
 105. In most cases, all names of publications. This rule, 
 like many another, is open to modification in particu- 
 lar instances, for expediency, nature of context, 
 authoritative usage, and author's preference. Gen- 
 erally, if in doubt, spell out; good taste will 
 condone offenses in this direction more readily than 
 in the opposite. 
 
 ABBREVIATE 
 
 106. Names of states, territories, and possessions of the 
 United States following those of towns, as follows, 
 without space between the letters of abbrevia- 
 tions (see 22, 52, 103), when mentioned in lists, 
 signatures, bibliographical matter, etc., but not 
 ordinarily in text-matter:
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: SPELLING 41 
 
 Ala. 
 
 Iowa 
 
 Neb. 
 
 Samoa 
 
 Alaska 
 
 Kan. 
 
 Nev. 
 
 S.C. 
 
 Ariz. 
 
 Ky. 
 
 N.H. 
 
 S.D. 
 
 Ark. 
 
 La. 
 
 NJ. 
 
 Tenn. 
 
 Cal. 
 
 Me. 
 
 N.M. 
 
 Tex. 
 
 Colo. 
 
 Mass. 
 
 N.Y. 
 
 T.H. = Territory 
 
 Conn. 
 
 Md. 
 
 Ohio 
 
 of Hawaii 
 
 B.C. 
 
 Mich. 
 
 Okla. 
 
 Utah 
 
 Del. 
 
 Minn. 
 
 Ore. 
 
 Vt. 
 
 Fla. 
 
 Miss. 
 
 Pa. 
 
 Va. 
 
 Ga. 
 
 Mo. 
 
 P.I. = Philippine 
 
 Wash. 
 
 Idaho 
 
 Mont. 
 
 Islands 
 
 Wis. 
 
 111. 
 
 N.C. 
 
 P.R. = Porto Rico W.Va. 
 
 Ind. 
 
 N.D. 
 
 R.I. 
 
 Wyo. 
 
 107. In technical matter (footnote references, bibliogra- 
 phies, etc.), "Company" and "Brothers," and the 
 word "and" (& =" short and" or "ampersand"), in 
 names of commercial firms: 
 
 The Macmillan Co., Macmillan & Co., Harper Bros.; 
 Chicago, Milwaukee & St. Paul Railroad. 
 
 In text-matter, not of a technical character, " Com- 
 pany " and " Brothers" may, however, be spelled out: 
 
 "Harper Brothers have recently published . . . ."; "The 
 Century Company announces . . . ."; "The extraordinary 
 story of the South Sea Company." 
 
 And when the name of a commercial concern does 
 not consist of proper names, the "and" should be 
 spelled out: 
 
 American Steel and Wire Co. 
 
 108. "Saint" or "Saints" before a name: 
 
 St. Louis, St. Peter's Church, SS. Peter and Paul.
 
 109. 
 
 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 "St." should, however, be omitted in connection 
 with names of apostles, evangelists, church fathers: 
 Luke, Paul, Augustine; not: St. Luke, St. Paul, etc. 
 
 In exact references 1 to Scripture passages (134, 173), 
 the books of the Bible and of the Apocrypha, 
 the Apocalyptic, and versions of the Bible: 
 
 OLD TESTAMENT 
 
 Gen. 
 Exod. 
 Lev. 
 Num. 
 Deut 
 Josh. 
 Judg. 
 Ruth 
 I and II Sam. 
 I and II Kings 
 
 Matt. 
 Mark 
 Luke 
 John 
 Acts 
 Rom. 
 I and II Cor. 
 
 I and II Esd. 
 Tob.=Tobit 
 Jth.= Judith 
 Rest of Esther 
 
 En. 
 Sib. Or. 
 
 I and II Chron. Isa. Jonah 
 Ezra Jer. Mic. 
 Neh. Lam. Nah. 
 Esther Ezek. Hab. 
 Job Dan. Zeph. 
 Ps. (Pss.) Hos. Hag. 
 Prov. Joel Zech. 
 Eccles. Amos Mai. 
 Song of Sol. (or Obad. 
 Cant.) 
 
 NEW TESTAMENT 
 
 Gal. Philem. 
 Eph. Heb. 
 Phil. Jas. 
 Col. I and II Pet. 
 I and II Thess. I, II, and III John 
 I and II Tim. Jude 
 Titus Rev. 
 
 APOCRYPHA (APOC.) 
 
 Wisd. of Sol. Sus. 
 Ecclus. Bel and Dragon 
 Bar. Pr. of Man. 
 Song of Three I, II, III, and IV 
 Children Mace. 
 
 APOCALYPTIC 
 
 Asmp. M. Ps. Sol. Bk. Jub. 
 Apoc. Bar. XII P. Asc. Isa. 
 
 1 But in text matter do not abbreviate references to whole books or chapters 
 : 'The story is presented in Revelation, chapter 10."
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: SPELLING 43 
 
 VERSIONS OF THE BIBLE COMMONLY REFERRED TO 
 
 A.V. = Authorized Version. 
 
 R.V. = Revised Version. 
 
 R.V.m. = Revised Version, margin. 
 
 A. R.V. = American Standard Revised Version. 
 
 A.R.V.m. = American Standard Revised Version, margin. 
 
 E.R.V. = English Revised Version. 
 
 E.R.V.m. = English Revised Version, margin. 
 
 E.V. = English Version(s) of the Bible. 
 
 Vulg. = Vulgate. 
 
 LXX = Septuagint. 
 
 MT =Masoretic text 
 
 no. In parenthetical literary references, in footnotes, 
 and in matter of a bibliographical character, "vol- 
 ume," "number," "psalm," "division," "chapter," 
 "article," "section," "page," "column," "verse," 
 "line," "note," "figure," followed by their number 
 (see 37, 96, and 237); and the word "following" 
 after the number to denote continuance: 
 
 Vol. I (plural, Vols.), No. i (Nos.), Ps. 20 (Pss.), Div. Ill, 
 chap, ii (chaps.), art. iii (arts.), sec. 4 (sees.), p. 5 (pp.), 
 col. 6 (cols.), vs. 7 (vss.), 1. 8 (11.), n. 9 (nn.), Fig. 7 (Figs.); 
 PP- S~7 (= pages 5 to 7 inclusive), pp. $f. (=page 5 and the 
 following page), pp. sff. (=page 5 and the following 
 pages) ; ed (d) . ( = edition[s]) . 
 
 in. The common designations of weights and measures 
 in the metric system, as well as the symbols of meas- 
 urement in common use, when following a numeral: 
 
 i m., 2 dm., 3 cm., 4 mm.; c.m. (=cubic meter), c.d., c.c., 
 c.mm.; sq. mi. ( = square mile); gm. ( = gram); gr. 
 ( = grain); h. ( = hour), min. ( = minute), sec. (= second); 
 Ib. ( = pound), oz. ( = ounce); yd., ft., in.; kg. (=kilogram), 
 kw. ( = kilowatt); mg. ( = milligram) ; mag. ( = magnitude), 
 A ( = angstrom units), h.p. (= horse-power), C. (= Centi- 
 grade), F. (= Fahrenheit), etc. (See 123.)
 
 44 
 
 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 The following is a list of the standard abbreviations for 
 technical values, recommended by the American Insti- 
 tute of Electrical Engineers: 
 
 alternating current . 
 
 brake horse-power . 
 boiler horse-power . 
 British thermal units 
 candle-power 
 centimeters . 
 circular mils . 
 counter electromotive 
 
 a-c. (when used as a compound 
 adjective; otherwise spell out) 
 b.h.p. 
 boiler h.p. 
 B.t.u. 
 c-p. 
 cm. 
 cir. mils 
 
 force 
 
 counter e.m.f. 
 
 
 cubic 
 
 cu. 
 
 
 direct current 
 
 d-c. (when used as 
 
 a compound 
 
 adjective; otherwise spell out) 
 
 electric horse-power 
 
 e.h.p. 
 
 
 electromotive force . 
 
 e.m.f. 
 
 
 feet 
 
 ft. 
 
 
 foot-pounds .... 
 
 ft-lb. 
 
 
 gallons 
 
 gal. 
 
 
 grains 
 
 gr- 
 
 
 grams 
 
 g. or gm. 
 
 
 gram-calories 
 
 g-cal. 
 
 
 hours 
 
 hr. 
 
 
 inches 
 
 in. 
 
 
 indicated horse-power . 
 
 i.h.p. 
 
 
 kilograms .... 
 
 kg. 
 
 
 kilogram-meters 
 
 kg-m. 
 
 
 kilogram-calories 
 
 kg-cal. 
 
 
 kilometers .... 
 
 km. 
 
 
 kilowatts 
 
 kw. 
 
 
 kilowatt-hours . 
 
 kw-hr. 
 
 
 magnetomotive force 
 
 m.m.f. 
 
 
 miles per hour (second) . 
 
 m.p.hr. (sec.) 
 
 
 millimeters .... 
 
 mm. 
 
 
 milligrams .... 
 
 mg. 
 
 
 minutes 
 
 min. 
 
 
 meters 
 
 m. 
 
 
 meter-kilograms 
 
 m-kg. 

 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: SPELLING 45 
 
 pounds Ib. (not Ibs.) 
 
 revolutions per minute . rev. per min., or r.p.m. 
 
 seconds sec. 
 
 square sq. 
 
 square-root-of-mean- 
 
 square effective, or r.m.s. 
 
 kilovolts kv. 
 
 kilovolt-amperes . . kv-a. 
 
 watt-hours .... watt-hr.. 
 
 watts per candle-power watts per c-p. 
 
 yards yd. 
 
 NOTE. In the case of hyphenated abbreviations, the first ele- 
 ment of the compound does not take a period. 
 
 GENERAL RULES 
 
 112. In extracts from modern authors whose spelling and 
 punctuation differ but slightly from ours, and where 
 such variations do not affect the meaning, use office 
 style. In citations from Old English works, and 
 in cases where it appears to be essential to the 
 writer's plan or the requirements of the context to 
 give a faithful rendering, follow the original copy. 
 Titles should always be accurately quoted. 
 
 113. Form the possessive of proper names ending in s or 
 another sibilant, if monosyllabic, by adding an 
 apostrophe and s; if of more than one syllable, by 
 adding an apostrophe only, except names ending 
 in -ce (see 165) : 
 
 King James's Version, Burns's poems, Marx's theories; 
 Moses' law, Jesus' birth, Demosthenes' orations, Berlioz' 
 compositions; Horace's odes. 
 
 But in the case of proper names ending in a silent 
 sibilant the possessive is formed by the addition
 
 46 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 of the apostrophe and s, whether the word is 
 
 monosyllabic or not: 
 
 Charlevoix's discoveries, Des Moines's population. 
 
 114. Before sounded h, long u (or eu), and the words 
 "one," "once," use "a" as the form of the indefinite 
 article: 
 
 a hotel, a harmonic rendition, a historical work, a union, 
 a euphonious word, such a one. 
 
 115. The ligatures & and ce are not used at the present 
 day, either in Latin and Greek words, or in words 
 adopted into English from these languages. In 
 English these words are written either with ae, oe, 
 separately, or with e alone. The ligature is re- 
 tained, however, in Old English and in French: 
 
 aetas; Oedipus Tyrannus; aesthetic; (but: ceuvre, 
 French); but: maneuver; Alfred (Alfred in English). 
 
 116. Differentiate "farther" and "further" by using the 
 former in the sense of "more remote," "at a greater 
 distance" (with verbs of action); the latter in the 
 sense of "moreover," "in addition": 
 
 the farther end; he went still farther; further, he suggested; a 
 further reason. 
 
 117. In forms of address (vocative) use the "O" without 
 a comma following; for an exclamation use "Oh," 
 followed by a comma or an exclamation point 
 (see 40) : 
 
 "O thou most mighty ruler!" "Oh, why did not Cerberus 
 drag me back to hell ?"
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: SPELLING 
 
 47 
 
 1 1 8. The following participles retain the final e in the 
 primary word: 
 
 agreeing hieing singeing 
 
 dyeing hoeing tingeing 
 
 eyeing shoeing vicing 
 
 The following participles illustrate those that omit 
 the e before the terminal : 
 
 abridging 
 acknowledging 
 aging 
 
 encouraging judging 
 filing mistaking 
 firing moving 
 
 arguing 
 
 glazing 
 
 organizing 
 
 awing 
 
 gluing 
 
 owing 
 
 
 biting 
 
 grudging 
 
 trudging 
 
 bluing 
 
 icing 
 
 truing 
 
 
 changing 
 
 issuing 
 
 
 
 1 19. Spell: 
 
 
 
 
 abridgment 
 
 aye 
 
 clamor 
 
 dulness 
 
 accouter 
 
 backward 
 
 clinch 
 
 dwelt 
 
 acknowledgment 
 
 bark (vessel) 
 
 clue 
 
 embitter 
 
 adz 
 
 barreled 
 
 coeval 
 
 emir 
 
 aegis 
 
 bazaar 
 
 color 
 
 employee 
 
 Aeolian 
 
 Beduin 
 
 controller 
 
 encyclopedic 
 
 aeroplane 
 
 behavior 
 
 cotillion 
 
 endeavor 
 
 aesthetic 
 
 biased 
 
 councilor 
 
 enfold 
 
 afterward 
 
 blessed 
 
 counselor 
 
 engulf 
 
 almanac 
 
 bowlder 
 
 cozy 
 
 enrol 
 
 ambassador 
 
 burned 
 
 cue 
 
 ensnare 
 
 amid 
 
 caesura 
 
 defense 
 
 envelope (n.) 
 
 among 
 
 caliber 
 
 demarcation 
 
 enwrapped 
 
 anemia 
 
 canceled 
 
 demeanor 
 
 equaled 
 
 appareled 
 
 candor 
 
 descendant (n.) 
 
 Eskimo 
 
 appendixes 
 
 cannoneer 
 
 diarrhea 
 
 esophagus 
 
 (of book) 
 
 canyon 
 
 dieresis 
 
 exhibitor 
 
 arbor 
 
 carcass 
 
 disheveled 
 
 fantasy 
 
 archaeology 
 
 caroled 
 
 disk 
 
 favor 
 
 ardor 
 
 castor (roller) 
 
 dispatch 
 
 fetish 
 
 armor 
 
 caviler 
 
 distil 
 
 fetus 
 
 ascendancy 
 
 center 
 
 downward 
 
 fiber 
 
 ascendent 
 
 check 
 
 draft 
 
 flavor 
 
 Athenaeum 
 
 chiseled 
 
 drought 
 
 fluorid 
 
 ax 
 
 chock-full 
 
 dueler 
 
 focused
 
 4 8 
 
 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 forward intrench 
 
 fulfil (fulfilled) intrust 
 
 fulness inward 
 
 gaiety jeweled 
 
 Galilean Judea 
 
 gild (to cover judgment 
 
 with gold) katabolism 
 
 gipsy kidnaper (but 
 glamor (kidnapped) 
 
 glycerin Koran 
 
 goodbye labeled 
 
 graveled labor 
 
 gray lacquer 
 
 Graeco-Roman leukocyte 
 
 gruesome leveled 
 
 guarantee (v.) libeled 
 
 guaranty (n.) liter 
 
 guild (an organi- loath 
 
 zation) lodgment 
 
 hamartiology Lukan 
 
 harbor maneuver 
 
 hematoxylin Markan 
 
 hemorrhage marshaled 
 
 Hindu marvelous 
 
 honor meager 
 
 imbed medieval 
 
 impaneled meter 
 
 imperiled miter 
 
 incase modeled 
 
 inclose Mohammedan 
 
 incrust mold 
 
 incumbrance molt 
 
 indexes (of book) moneyed 
 
 indices (mathe- moneys 
 
 matical only) movable 
 
 indorse mustache 
 
 ingraft nearby (adj.) 
 
 instal (installed) neighbor 
 
 instil (instilled) 
 insure 
 
 niter 
 odor 
 
 offense 
 
 one's self 
 
 outward 
 
 oxid 
 
 paean 
 
 paleography 
 
 paleontology 
 
 Paleozoic 
 
 paneled 
 
 paraffin 
 
 parceled 
 
 parole 
 
 parquet 
 
 partisan 
 
 peddler 
 
 penciled 
 
 Phoenix 
 
 pigmy 
 
 plow 
 
 practice 
 
 (n. and v.) 
 pretense 
 primeval 
 program 
 quarreled 
 quartet 
 raveled 
 reconnoiter 
 refill 
 reinforce 
 rencounter 
 reverie 
 rhyme 
 rigor 
 rivaled 
 riveted 
 ruble 
 rumor 
 saber 
 salable 
 
 Savior 
 
 savor 
 
 scepter 
 
 sepulcher 
 
 skepticism 
 
 skilful 
 
 smolder 
 
 specter 
 
 staunch 
 
 steadfast 
 
 subtle 
 
 succor j 
 
 sumac , 
 
 syrup 
 
 taboo 
 
 talc 
 
 technique 1 
 
 theater 
 
 thraldom 
 
 thrash 
 
 timbre (of 
 
 music) 
 today 
 tormentor 
 toward 
 trammeled 
 tranquilize 
 tranquillity 
 traveler 
 trousers 
 truncated 
 upward 
 vapor 
 vendor 
 vigor 
 whiskey 
 wilful 
 woeful 
 woolen 
 
 worshiper 
 
 NOTE. Make one word of "anyone," "everyone," "today," 
 "tomorrow," "tonight," "cannot" (see 204). Distinguish 
 between "sometimes" and "some time(s)," "someone" 
 and "some one (or more) of the number." Use the form 
 "someone else's." 
 
 1 In medical work more generally spelled "technic."
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: SPELLING 
 
 49 
 
 120. Differentiate between the terminations -ise and -ize 
 as follows: 
 
 SPELL WITH -IS6 
 
 advertise 
 
 compromise 
 
 excise 
 
 premise 
 
 advise 
 
 demise 
 
 exercise 
 
 reprise 
 
 affranchise 
 
 despise 
 
 exorcise 
 
 revise 
 
 apprise (to 
 
 devise 
 
 franchise 
 
 rise 
 
 inform) 
 
 disfranchise 
 
 improvise 
 
 supervise 
 
 arise 
 
 disguise 
 
 incise 
 
 surmise 
 
 chastise 
 
 emprise 
 
 manuprise 
 
 surprise 
 
 circumcise 
 
 enfranchise 
 
 merchandise 
 
 
 comprise 
 
 enterprise 
 
 
 
 SPELL WITH -ize (-yze) 
 
 aggrandize 
 
 dramatize 
 
 mercerize 
 
 revolutionize 
 
 agonize 
 
 economize 
 
 mesmerize 
 
 satirize 
 
 analyze 
 
 emphasize 
 
 metamorphize 
 
 scandalize 
 
 anatomize 
 
 energize 
 
 methodize 
 
 scrutinize 
 
 anglicize 
 
 epitomize 
 
 minimize 
 
 signalize 
 
 apologize 
 
 equalize 
 
 modernize 
 
 solemnize 
 
 apostrophize 
 
 eulogize 
 
 monopolize 
 
 soliloquize 
 
 apprize (to 
 
 evangelize 
 
 moralize 
 
 specialize 
 
 appraise) 
 
 extemporize 
 
 nationalize 
 
 spiritualize 
 
 authorize 
 
 familiarize 
 
 naturalize 
 
 standardize 
 
 autolyze 
 
 fertilize 
 
 neutralize 
 
 stigmatize 
 
 baptize 
 
 fossilize 
 
 organize 
 
 subsidize 
 
 brutalize 
 
 fraternize 
 
 ostracize 
 
 summarize 
 
 canonize 
 
 galvanize 
 
 oxidize 
 
 syllogize 
 
 catechize 
 
 generalize 
 
 paralyze 
 
 symbolize 
 
 catholicize 
 
 gormandize 
 
 particularize 
 
 sympathize 
 
 cauterize 
 
 harmonize 
 
 pasteurize 
 
 tantalize 
 
 centralize 
 
 hellenize 
 
 patronize 
 
 temporize 
 
 characterize 
 
 humanize 
 
 philosophize 
 
 tranquilize 
 
 Christianize 
 
 immortalize 
 
 plagiarize 
 
 tyrannize 
 
 civilize 
 
 italicize 
 
 polarize 
 
 utilize 
 
 classicize 
 
 jeopardize 
 
 professionalize 
 
 vaporize 
 
 colonize 
 
 legalize 
 
 protestantize 
 
 visualize 
 
 criticize 
 
 liberalize 
 
 pulverize 
 
 vitalize 
 
 crystallize 
 
 localize 
 
 realize 
 
 vocalize 
 
 demoralize 
 
 magnetize 
 
 recognize 
 
 vulcanize 
 
 deputize 
 
 manumize 
 
 reorganize 
 
 vulgarize 
 
 dogmatize 
 
 memorialize 
 

 
 50 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 PUNCTUATION 
 
 121. All punctuation marks should be printed in the same 
 style or font of type as the word, letter, or character 
 immediately preceding them: 
 
 "With the cry of Banzai! the regiment stormed the hill", 
 Luke 4:160; paragraph 2 (a); Botanical Gazette 20:144. 
 
 PERIOD 
 
 122. A period is used to indicate the end of a declarative 
 sentence (see 125). 
 
 123. a) Put a period after abbreviations: 
 
 Macmillan & Co., Mr. Smith, St. Paul, No. i, Chas. (see 
 93), ibid., s.v., ip mm., 1201 E. Main St., SE. J of SW. J, 
 T. 3 N., R. 69 W., Sec. n, middle of S. line, N.NE. (north 
 by northeast) . 
 
 V) Do not use a period after contractions cases 
 where a mechanical necessity compels the omission 
 of a letter or letters in the middle of a word for which 
 there is no recognized abbreviated form; such omis- 
 sion is indicated by an apostrophe: 
 m'f 'g pl't ( = manufacturing plant) ; 't isn't. 
 c) Treat the metric symbols as abbreviations, but 
 not the chemical symbols, nor the phrase "per 
 cent," nor the format of books: 
 O, Fe; 2 per cent (see 94); 4to, 8vo. 
 
 NOTE. With respect to symbols for measures the following 
 exceptions should be noted: Astrophysical Journal, 12 mm (with 
 thin space and no period) (but: 2 h 3 m 4 s ); Botanical Gazette, 
 i2mm., i25ft.,9cc. (on line, with period).
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: PUNCTUATION 51 
 
 But do not use a period, in technical matter, after the 
 recognized abbreviations for linguistic epochs, or 
 for titles of well-known publications of which the 
 initials only are given, nor after MS (= manuscript), 
 nor after Mme and Mile in French (see 92) : 
 IE (=Indo-European), OE (= Old English), MHG (=Middle 
 High German); AJSL (= American Journal of Semitic 
 Languages and Literatures), ZAW (=Zeitschrijt filr alttesta- 
 mentliche Wissenschaff), CIL (= Cor pus Inscriptionum Lati- 
 norum), PMLA (= Publications of the Modern Language 
 Association}. 
 
 124. Use no period after Roman numerals, even if having 
 the value of ordinals: 
 
 Vol. IV; Louis XVI was on the throne. 
 
 125. Omit the period after running-heads (for explanation 
 of this and the following terms see 279-83); after 
 centered headlines; after side-heads set in separate 
 lines; after cut-in heads; after box-heads in tables; 
 and after superscriptions and legends which do not 
 form a complete sentence (with subject and predi- 
 cate), or which do not make more than a single line 
 of type; after date lines at top of communications, 
 and after signatures (see 50) . 
 
 126. The period is always placed inside the quotation 
 marks; and inside the parentheses when the matter 
 inclosed is an independent sentence and forms no 
 part of the preceding sentence; otherwise outside: 
 
 Tennyson's "In Memoriam." Put the period inside the 
 quotation marks. (This is a rule without exception.) When 
 tie parentheses form part of the preceding sentence, put 
 the period outside (as, for instance, here).
 
 52 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 EXCLAMATION POINT 
 
 127. The exclamation point is used to mark an outcry, or 
 an emphatic or ironical utterance: 
 
 "Long live the king!" "Heaven forbid!" "Good!" he 
 cried; "How funny this seems!" "This must not be!" The 
 subject of his lecture was "The Thisness of the That"! The 
 speaker went on: "Nobody should leave his home tomorrow 
 without a marked ballot in their (!) pocket." 
 
 128. The exclamation point is placed inside the quotation 
 
 marks or parentheses when part of the quotation 
 or parenthetical matter; otherwise outside. 
 See illustrations in 127. 
 
 INTERROGATION POINT 
 
 129. The interrogation point is used to mark a query, or 
 to express a doubt: 
 
 "Who is this ?" The prisoner gave his name as Roger Crown- 
 inshield, the son of an English baronet ( ?). Can the Bible 
 be applied to children ? is a question involved. 
 
 In Spanish the question mark is expressed before 
 as well as after the question, but the mark that 
 precedes is inverted. 
 
 Indirect questions should not be followed by an 
 interrogation point: 
 She asked whether he was ill. 
 
 A technically interrogative sentence disguised as 
 a question out of courtesy but actually embody- 
 ing a request does not need the interrogation 
 point: 
 Will you kindly sign and return the inclosed card.
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: PUNCTUATION 53 
 
 130. The interrogation point should be placed inside the 
 quotation marks or parentheses only when it is a 
 part of the quotation or parenthetical matter: 
 
 "Take hold, my son, of the toughest knots in life and try 
 to untie them; try to be worthy of man's highest estate; 
 have high, noble, manly honor. There is but one test of 
 everything, and that is, Is it right?" (Henry A. Wise). 
 The question: "Who is who, and what is what?" Were 
 you ever in "Tsintsinnati" ? 
 
 COLON 
 
 131. The colon is used to "mark a discontinuity of 
 grammatical construction greater than that indicated 
 by the semicolon and less than that indicated by the 
 period. It is commonly used (i) to emphasize a 
 close connection in thought between two clauses 
 each of which forms a complete sentence, and which 
 might with grammatical propriety be separated by 
 a period; (2) to separate a clause which is gram- 
 matically complete from a second which contains 
 an illustration or amplification of its meaning; (3) 
 to introduce a formal statement, an extract, a speech 
 in a dialogue, etc." (Century Dictionary] (unless 
 this is preceded by a conjunction, like "that," 
 immediately connecting it with what goes before). 
 Before the quotation of a clause in the middle of a 
 sentence use a comma: 
 
 (i) "This argument undeniably contains some force: Thus 
 it is well known that . . ." "The secretion of the gland
 
 54 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 goes on uninterruptedly: this may account for the condition 
 of the organ." "The fear of death is universal: even the 
 lowest animals instinctively shrink from annihilation." (2) 
 "Most countries have a national flower: France the lily, 
 England the rose, etc." "Lambert pine: the gigantic sugar 
 pine of California." (3) "The rule may be stated thus: 
 . . . ." "We quote from the address: . . . ." "Charles: 
 'Where are you going?' George: 'To the mill-pond.'" 
 But: "He stoutly maintained that 'the letter is a monstrous 
 forgery'"; and: "Declaring, 'The letter is a monstrous 
 forgery,' he tried to wash his hands of the whole affair." 
 
 132. The colon thus often takes the place of an implied 
 "namely," "as follows," "for instance," or a similar 
 phrase. Where such word or phrase is used, it 
 should be followed by a colon if what follows consists 
 of one or more grammatically complete clauses 
 (see 36) ; otherwise by a comma (see 145) : 
 
 "This is true of only two nations the wealthiest, though not 
 the largest, in Europe: Great Britain and France"; but: 
 "This is true of only two nations the wealthiest, though 
 not the largest, in Europe viz., Great Britain and France." 
 "He made several absurd statements. For example: ...."; 
 but: "There are several states in the Union for instance, 
 Kansas and Wyoming which . . . ." 
 
 133. Put a colon after the salutatory phrase at the begin- 
 ning of a letter and after the introductory remark 
 of a speaker addressing the chairman or the audi- 
 ence: 
 
 MY DEAR MR. BROWN: (See 50.) 
 
 Mr. Chairman, Ladies and Gentlemen: (See 64.)
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: PUNCTUATION 55 
 
 134. Put a centered (g-unit) colon between chapter and 
 verse in Scripture passages, between hours and 
 minutes in time indications, and between volume 
 and page reference when such style is used: 
 Matt. 2:5-13; 4:30 P.M.; Botanical Gazette 20:144. 
 
 135. Put a colon between the place of publication and the 
 publisher's name in literary and bibliographical 
 references : 
 
 Clement of Alexandria (London: Macmillan), II, 97. 
 
 136. The colon should be placed outside the quotation 
 marks, unless a part of the quotation: 
 
 He writes under the head of "Notes and Comments": 
 " Many a man can testify to the truth of the old adage :" etc. 
 
 SEMICOLON 
 
 137. A semicolon is used to mark the division of a 
 sentence somewhat more independent than that 
 marked by a comma, or to separate complete 
 statements the argument of which is dependent 
 upon their remaining in the same sentence: 
 
 "Are we giving our lives to perpetuate the things that the 
 past has created for its needs, forgetting to ask whether these 
 things still serve today's needs; or are we thinking of living 
 men ?" "This is as important for science as it is for practice; 
 indeed, it may be said to be the only important consideration." 
 "It is so in war; it is so in the economic life; it cannot be 
 otherwise in religion." "In Persia the final decision rests with 
 the Shah, advised by his ministers; in most constitutional 
 countries, indirectly with the people as represented in parlia- 
 ment; in Switzerland alone, through the referendum, directly 
 with the electorate at large.'' "This, let it be remembered,
 
 56 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 was the ground taken by Mill; for to him 'utilitarianism,' 
 in spite of all his critics may say, did not mean the pursuit of 
 bodily pleasure." ("For" in such cases should commonly be 
 preceded by a semicolon.) 
 
 138. In enumerations use a semicolon between the differ- 
 ent links, if these consist of more than a few words 
 closely connected, and especially if individual clauses 
 contain any punctuation mark of less value than a 
 period, or an exclamation or interrogation point 
 (unless inclosed in parentheses), yet are intimately 
 joined one with the other, and all with the sentence 
 or clause leading up to them, for instance through 
 dependence upon a conjunction, like "that," pre- 
 ceding them (see 36) : 
 
 "The membership of the international commission was made 
 up as follows: France, 4; Germany, 5; Great Britain, i 
 (owing to a misunderstanding, the announcement did not 
 reach the English societies in time to secure a full quota from 
 that country. Sir Henry Campbell, who had the matter in 
 charge, being absent at the time, great difficulty was experi- 
 enced in arousing sufficient interest to insure the sending of 
 even a solitary delegate); Italy, 3; the United States, 7." 
 "The defendant, in justification of his act, pleaded that (i) 
 he was despondent over the loss of his wife; (2) he was out 
 of work; (3) he had had nothing to eat for two days; (4) he 
 was under the influence of liquor." "Presidents Hadley, of 
 Yale; Eliot, of Harvard; Butler, of Columbia; and Angell, 
 of Michigan." 
 
 139. In Scripture references a semicolon is used to 
 separate passages containing chapters: 
 
 Gen. 2:3-6, 9, 14; 3:17; chap. 5; 6:15.
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: PUNCTUATION 57 
 
 140. The semicolon should be placed outside the quota- 
 tion marks or parentheses, unless a part of the 
 quotation or parenthetical matter. 
 
 COMMA 
 
 141. The comma is "used to indicate the smallest inter- 
 ruptions in continuity of thought or grammatical 
 construction, the marking of which contributes to 
 clearness" (Century Dictionary)'. 
 
 "Here, as in many other cases, what is sometimes popularly 
 supposed to be orthodox is really a heresy, an exaggeration, 
 a distortion, a caricature of the true doctrine of the church. 
 The doctrine is, indeed, laid down by an authority here and 
 there; but, speaking generally, it has no place in the stand- 
 ards, creeds, or confessions of the great communions; e.g., 
 the Apostles' Creed, the Nicene Creed, the canons of the early 
 ecumenical councils, the Westminster Confession, the Thirty- 
 nine Articles." "Shakspere and other, lesser, poets." "The 
 books which I have read I herewith return" (i.e., I return 
 those [only] which I have read); but: "The books, which I 
 have read, I herewith return" (i.e., having read them [all], 
 I now return them). "Gossiping, women are happy"; and: 
 "Gossiping women are happy." "Of these four, two Ameri- 
 cans and one Englishman started"; and: "Of these, four 
 two Americans and two Englishmen started." "The suffer- 
 ing, God will relieve." "Behind, her 'stage mother' stood 
 fluttering with extra wraps." "Some boys and girls pre- 
 maturely announce themselves, usually in uncomfortable, 
 sometimes in bad, ways." 
 
 142. Use a comma to separate proper nouns belonging 
 to different individuals or places: 
 
 "To John, Smith was always kind"; "To America, Europe 
 awards the prize of mechanical skill."
 
 58 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 143. Put a comma before "and," "or," and "nor" 
 connecting the last two links in a sequence of three 
 or more; or all the links in a series of greater length, 
 or where each individual link consists of several 
 words; always put a comma before "etc.": 
 
 Tom, Dick, and Harry; either copper, silver, or gold; "He 
 was equally familiar with Homer, and Shakspere, and 
 Moliere, and Cervantes, and Goethe, and Ibsen"; "Neither 
 France for her art, nor Germany for her army, nor England 
 for her democracy, etc." 
 
 But do not use a comma where "and," etc., serves 
 to connect all of the links in a brief and close-knit 
 phrase : 
 
 "a man good and noble and true"; "I do not remember who 
 wrote the stanza whether it was Shelley or Keats or Moore." 
 
 144. Ordinarily, put a comma before and after clauses in- 
 troduced by such conjunctions as "and," "but," "or," 
 "if," "while," "as" (meaning "since"), "whereas," 
 "since," "because," "when," "after," "although," 
 etc., especially if a change of subject takes place: 
 
 "When he arrived at the railway station, the train had gone, 
 and his friend, who had come to bid him goodbye, had 
 departed, but left no word. As the next train was not due 
 for two hours, he decided to take a ride about the town, 
 although it offered little of interest to the sightseer. While 
 he regretted his failure to meet his friend, he did not go 
 to his house." 
 
 But do not use a comma before clauses introduced 
 by such conjunctions if the preceding clause is not
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: PUNCTUATION 59 
 
 logically complete without them; nor before "if," 
 "but," and "though" in brief and close-welded 
 phrases: 
 
 "This is especially interesting because they represent the two 
 extremes and because they present differences in their rela- 
 tions"; "This is good because true"; "I shall agree to this 
 only if you accept my conditions"; "I would not if I could, 
 and could not if I would"; "honest though poor"; "a cheap 
 but valuable book." 
 
 145. Such conjunctions, adverbs, connective particles, or 
 phrases as "now," "then," "however," "indeed," 
 "therefore," "moreover," "furthermore," "never- 
 theless," "though," "in fact," "in short," "for 
 instance," "that is," "of course," "on the contrary," 
 "on the other hand," "after all," "to be sure," 
 "for example," etc., may be followed by a comma 
 when standing at the beginning of a sentence or 
 clause to introduce an inference or an explanation, 
 and may be placed between commas when wedged 
 into the middle of a sentence or clause to mark off a 
 distinct break in the continuity of thought or struc- 
 ture, indicating a summarizing of what precedes, 
 the point of a new departure, or a modifying, restrict- 
 ive, or antithetical addition, etc. : 
 
 "Indeed, this was exactly the point of the argument"; 
 "Moreover, he did not think it feasible"; "Now, the question 
 is this: . . . ." "Nevertheless, he consented to the scheme"; 
 "In fact, rather thi reverse is true"; "This, then, is my 
 position: . . . ."; "The statement, therefore, cannot be 
 verified"; "He thought, however, that he would like to
 
 60 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 try"; "That, after all, seemed a trivial matter"; "The 
 gentleman, of course, was wrong"; "A comma may be used 
 between clauses of a compound sentence that are connected 
 by a simple con junction, though a comma is emphatically not 
 used between clauses connected by a conjunctive adverb." 
 
 But do not use a comma with such words when the 
 connection is logically close and structurally smooth 
 enough not to call for any pause in reading; with 
 "therefore," "nevertheless," etc., when directly 
 following the verb; with "indeed" when directly 
 preceding or following an adjective or another 
 adverb which it qualifies; nor ordinarily with such 
 terms as "perhaps," "also," "likewise," etc.: 
 
 "Therefore I say unto you . . . ."; "He was therefore 
 unable to be present"; "It is nevertheless true"; "He is 
 recovering very slowly indeed"; "He was perhaps thinking 
 of the future"; "He was a scholar and a sportsman too." 
 
 146. A comma is preferably omitted before "rather" in 
 such an expression as 
 
 "The time-value is to be measured in this way rather than 
 by the time-equivalent of the strata." 
 
 147. If among several adjectives preceding a noun the 
 last bears a more direct relation to the noun than the 
 others, it should not be preceded by a comma: 
 
 "the admirable political institutions of the country"; "a hand- 
 some, wealthy young man." 
 
 148. Participial clauses, especially such as contain an 
 explanation of the main clause, should usually be 
 set off by a comma : 
 
 "Being asleep, he did not hear him"; "Exhausted by a day's 
 hard work, he slept like a stone."
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: PUNCTUATION 6 1 
 
 149. Put a comma before "not" introducing an anti- 
 thetical clause or phrase: 
 
 "Men addict themselves to inferior pleasures, not because 
 they deliberately prefer them, but because they are the only 
 ones to which they have access." 
 
 But do not use commas before such words when the 
 thought is incomplete without the following words. 
 
 150. For parenthetical, adverbial, or appositional clauses 
 or phrases use commas to indicate structurally 
 disconnected, but logically integral, interpolations; 
 dashes to indicate both structurally and logically 
 disconnected insertions ; never use the two together 
 (see 175): 
 
 "Since, from the naturalistic point of view, mental states are 
 the concomitants of physiological processes . . . ."; "The 
 French, generally speaking, are a nation of artists"; "The 
 English, highly democratic as they are, nevertheless deem 
 the nobility fundamental to their political and social systems." 
 "There was a time I forget the exact date when these 
 conditions were changed." 
 
 151. Use a comma to separate two identical or closely 
 similar words, even if the sense or grammatical con- 
 struction does not require such separation (see 142) : 
 
 "Whatever is, is good"; "What he was, is not known"; 
 "The chief aim of academic striving ought not to be, to be 
 most in evidence "; "This is unique only in this, that . . . ." 
 
 152. In adjectival phrases a complementary, qualifying, 
 delimiting, or antithetical adjective added to the 
 main epithet preceding a noun should ordinarily be 
 preceded and followed by a comma:
 
 62 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 "This harsh, though at the same time perfectly logical, 
 conclusion"; "The deceased was a stern and unapproach- 
 able, yet withal sympathetic and kind-hearted, gentleman " ; 
 "Here comes in the most responsible, because it is the final, 
 office of the teacher"; "The most sensitive, if not the most 
 elusive, part of the training of children"; "The better a 
 proverb is, the more trite it usually becomes." 
 
 153. Two or more co-ordinate clauses ending in a word 
 governing or modifying another word in a following 
 clause should be separated by commas : 
 
 ". . . . a shallow body of water connected with, but well 
 protected from, the open sea"; "He was as tall as, though 
 much younger than, his brother"; "The cultivation in our- 
 selves of a sensitive feeling on the subject of veracity is one of 
 the most useful, and the enfeeblement of that feeling one of 
 the most hurtful, things"; "This road leads away from, 
 rather than toward, your destination." 
 
 154. Similarly, use a comma to separate two numbers: 
 "In 1905, 347 teachers attended the convention"; November 
 i, 1905. (See 160.) 
 
 155. A comma is employed to indicate the omission, for 
 brevity or convenience, of a word or words the 
 repetition of which is not essential to the meaning : 
 "In Illinois there are seventeen such institutions; in Ohio, 
 twenty-two; in Indiana, thirteen" ; "In Lincoln's first cabinet 
 Seward was secretary of state; Chase, of the treasury; 
 Cameron, of war; and Bates, attorney general." 
 
 Often, however, such constructions are smooth enough 
 not to call for commas (and consequent semicolons) : 
 "One puppy may resemble the father, another the mother, 
 and a third some distant ancestor."
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: PUNCTUATION 63 
 
 156. A direct quotation, maxim, or similar expression, 
 when brief, should be separated from the preceding 
 part of the sentence by a comma (see 131) : 
 
 " God said, Let there be light." 
 
 157. Use a comma before "of" in connection with resi- 
 dence or position: 
 
 Mr. and Mrs. Mclntyre, of Detroit, Mich.; President Hadley, 
 of Yale University. 
 
 Exceptions are those cases, historical and political, in 
 which the place-name practically has become a part 
 of the person's name, or is so closely connected with 
 this as to render the separation artificial or illogical: 
 
 Clement of Alexandria, Philip of Anjou, King Edward of 
 England. 
 
 158. In literary references insert a comma between con- 
 secutive numbers to represent a break in the con- 
 tinuity, a separate reference to each; an en dash, to 
 represent one continuous reference between the 
 consecutive numbers: 
 
 pp. 4, 7-8, 10; Ezra 5:7-8; IV, 123-30. 
 
 159. Put a comma after digits indicating thousands, 1 
 except in a date or in a page-reference and not 
 between the constituents of dimensions, weights, 
 and measures: 
 
 1,276, 10,419; 2200 B.C.; p. 2461; 3 feet 6 inches; 4 Ib. 
 2 oz. ; 2 hr. 4 min. 
 
 NOTE. Astrophysical Journal and Botanical Gazette do not 
 use a comma with four figures. 
 
 1 Except in German and in Spanish, where a period is used instead, as: 69.190.175 .
 
 64 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 160. Separate month and year and similar time divisions 
 by a comma: 
 
 November, 1905 ; New Year's Day, 1906. 
 
 NOTE. Astrophysical Journal and Botanical Gazette do not 
 use a comma between month and year. 
 
 161. Omit the comma, in signatures and at the beginning 
 of articles, after author's name followed by address, 
 title, or position in a separate line, or after address 
 followed by a date line, etc. (see 65). 
 
 162. The comma is always placed inside the quotation 
 marks, but following the parenthesis, if the con- 
 text requires it at all. 
 
 APOSTROPHE 
 
 163. An apostrophe is used to mark the omission of a 
 letter or letters in the contraction of a word, or of 
 figures in a number. In the case of contractions 
 containing a verb and the negative, do not use space 
 between the two components of the contraction: 
 
 it's, ne'er, 'twas, "takin' me 'at"; m'f'g; the class of '96; 
 don't, haven't. (See 123.) 
 
 164. The possessive case of nouns, common and proper, 
 is formed by the addition of an apostrophe, or 
 apostrophe and 5 (see 113) : 
 
 a man's word, horses' tails; Scott's Ivanhoe, Jones's farms, 
 Themistodes' era; for appearance' sake. 
 
 165. The plural of numerals, and of rare or artificial noun- 
 coinages, is formed by the aid of an apostrophe and 
 s; of proper nouns of more than one syllable ending 
 in a sibilant, by adding an apostrophe alone (mono-
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: PUNCTUATION 65 
 
 syllabic proper names ending in a sibilant add es; 
 others, s) (see 101) : 
 
 in the i goo's; in two's and three's, the three R's, the 
 Y.M.C.A.'s; "these I-just-do-as-I-please's"; "all the Tommy 
 Atkins' of England" (but: the Rosses and the Macdougals); 
 the Pericles' and Socrates' of literature. 
 
 QUOTATION MARKS. (See section on "Quotations," 
 74-91.) 
 
 DASHES 
 
 166. An em dash is used to denote "a sudden break, 
 stop, or transition in a sentence, or an abrupt change 
 in its construction, a long or significant pause, or 
 an unexpected or epigrammatic turn of sentiment" 
 (John Wilson) : 
 
 "Do we can we send out educated boys and girls from the 
 high school at eighteen ?" "The Platonic world of the static, 
 and the Hegelian world of process how great the contrast!" 
 " 'Process' that is the magic word of the modern period"; 
 "To be or not to be that is the question"; "Christianity 
 found in the Roman Empire a civic life which was implicated 
 by a thousand roots with pagan faith and cultus a state 
 which offered little." 
 
 167. Use dashes (rarely parentheses see 177) for par- 
 enthetical clauses which are both logically and 
 structurally independent interpolations (see 150): 
 
 "This may be said to be but, never mind, we will pass over 
 that"; "There came a time let us say, for convenience, with 
 Herodotus and Thucydides when this attention to actions 
 was conscious and deliberate"; "If it be asked and in say- 
 ing this I but epitomize my whole contention why the 
 Mohammedan religion . . . ."
 
 66 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 1 68. A clause added to lend emphasis to, or to explain or 
 expand, a word or phrase occurring in the main 
 clause, which word or phrase is then repeated, 
 should be introduced by a dash: 
 
 "To him they are more important as the sources for history 
 the history of events and ideas"; "Here we are face to face 
 with a new and difficult problem new and difficult, that is, 
 in the sense that . . . . " 
 
 169. Wherever a "namely" is implied before a paren- 
 thetical or complementary clause, a dash should 
 preferably be used (see 132) : 
 
 "These discoveries gunpowder, printing-press, compass, 
 and telescope were the weapons before which the old science 
 trembled"; "But here we are trenching upon another division 
 of our field the interpretation of New Testament books." 
 
 170. In sentences broken up into clauses, the final 
 summarizing clause should be preceded by a dash : 
 
 "Amos, with the idea that Jehovah is an upright judge 
 . . . . ; Hosea, whose Master hated injustice and falsehood 
 . . . . ; Isaiah, whose Lord would have mercy only on those 
 who relieved the widow and the fatherless these were the 
 spokesmen . . . ' 
 
 171. a) A word or phrase set in a separate line and suc- 
 ceeded by paragraphs, at the beginning of each of 
 which it is implied, should be followed by a dash : 
 
 "I recommend 
 
 " i. That we kill him. 
 
 "2. That we flay him." 
 
 6) In French and in Spanish a dash is used before 
 a speech in direct discourse instead of quotation 
 marks before and after.
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: PUNCTUATION 67 
 
 172. A dash may be used in connection with side-heads, 
 whether "run in" or paragraphed: 
 
 2. The language of the New Testament. The lexicons 
 of Grimm-Thayer, Cremer, and others .... 
 
 NOTE. The above has been taken from .... 
 
 Biblical criticism in other denominations 
 
 A most interesting article appeared in the Expository 
 Times .... 
 
 173. Use a dash in place of the word "to" connecting 
 two words or numbers (see 158) : 
 
 May- July, 1906 (en dash); May i, 1905 November i, 1906 
 (em dash); pp. 3-7 (en dash); Luke 3:6 5:2 (em dash). 
 
 But if the word "from" precedes the first word or 
 number, do not use the dash instead of "to": 
 
 From May i to July i, 1906. 
 
 In connecting consecutive numbers omit hundreds 
 from the second number i.e., use only two figures 
 unless the first number ends in two ciphers, in 
 which case repeat; if the next to the last figure in 
 the first number is a cipher, do not repeat this in the 
 second number; but in citing dates B.C. always 
 repeat the hundreds (because representing a dimi- 
 nution, not an increase) (see 158) : 
 
 1880-95, PP- 1I 3~ 1 ^', 1900-1906, pp. 102-7; 387-324 B.C. 
 
 NOTE. The Astrophysical Journal and Botanical Gazette re- 
 peat the hundreds' 1880-1895, pp. 113-116.
 
 68 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 174. Let a dash precede the reference (author, title of 
 work, or both) following a direct quotation, consisting 
 of at least one complete sentence, in footnotes or 
 cited independently in the text (see 85) : 
 
 1 "I felt an emotion of the moral sublime at beholding 
 such an instance of civic heroism." Thirty Years, I, 379. 
 The green grass is growing, 
 
 The morning wind is in it, 
 'Tis a tune worth the knowing 
 Though it change every minute. 
 
 Emerson, "To Ellen, at the South." 
 
 175. A dash should not ordinarily be used in connection 
 with any other point, except a period : 
 
 "DEAR SIR: I have the honor . . . ."; not: "DEAR SIR: 
 I have . . . ."; "This I say it with regret was not done"; 
 not: "This, I say it with regret, was . . . ." 
 
 But in a sentence where a comma would be neces- 
 sary if the parenthetical clause set off by dashes 
 did not exist, the comma may be retained before 
 the first dash: 
 
 Darwin, the promulgator of the theory, though by no 
 means its only supporter is regarded today, etc. 
 
 And when the parenthetical clause set off by dashes 
 itself requires an interrogation or exclamation 
 point, such punctuation may be retained in con- 
 nection with the second dash: 
 
 Senator Blank shall we call him statesman or politician ? 
 introduced the bill; If the ship should sink which God 
 forbid! he will be a ruined man.
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: PUNCTUATION 69 
 
 PARENTHESES 
 
 176. Place between parentheses figures or letters used to 
 mark divisions in enumerations run into the text: 
 
 "The reasons for his resignation were three: (i) advanced 
 age, (2) failing health, (3) a desire to travel." 
 
 If such divisions are paragraphed, a single paren- 
 thesis is ordinarily used in connection with a lower- 
 case (italic) letter; a period, with figures and capital 
 (roman) letters. In syllabi, and matter of a similar 
 character, the following scheme of notation and 
 indention should ordinarily be adhered to: 
 
 A. Under the head of .... 
 
 I. Under .... 
 
 1. Under .... 
 
 a) Under .... 
 
 (1) Under .... 
 
 (a) Under .... 
 
 i) Under .... 
 
 ii) Under .... 
 (ft) Under .... 
 
 (2) Under .... 
 
 b) Under .... 
 
 2. Under .... 
 
 II. Under .... 
 
 B. Under the head of .... 
 
 177. Parentheses should not ordinarily be used for paren- 
 thetical clauses (see 150 and 167) unless confusion 
 might arise from the use of less distinctive marks, or
 
 70 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 unless the content of the clause is wholly irrelevant 
 to the main argument: 
 
 "He meant I take this to be the (somewhat obscure) sense 
 of his speech that . . . ."; "The period thus inaugurated 
 (of which I shall speak at greater length in the next chapter) 
 was characterized by ...."; "The contention has been 
 made (op. cit.) that . . . ." 
 
 BRACKETS 
 
 178. Brackets are used (i) to inclose an explanation or 
 note, (2) to indicate an interpolation in a quotation, 
 (3) to rectify a mistake, (4) to supply an omission, 
 and (5) for parentheses within parentheses: 
 
 (1) ' [This was written before the publication of Spencer's 
 book. EDITOR.] 
 
 (2) "These [the free-silver Democrats] asserted that the 
 present artificial ratio can be maintained indefinitely." 
 
 (3) "As the Italian [Englishman] Dante Gabriel Ros- 
 [s]etti has said, . . . ." 
 
 (4) JohnRuskin. By Henry Carpenter. ["English Men 
 of Letters," III.] London: Black, 1900. 
 
 (5) Grote, the great historian of Greece (see his History, 
 I, 204 [second edition] ),.... 
 
 179. Such phrases as "To be continued" at the end, and 
 "Continued from . . . ." at the beginning, of 
 articles, chapters, etc., should be placed between 
 brackets, centered, and set in italics (see 73) and in 
 type reduced in size in accordance with the rule 
 governing reductions (see 86) : 
 
 [Continued from p. 320] 
 [To be concluded]
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: PUNCTUATION 71 
 
 ELLIPSES 
 
 180. Ellipses are used to indicate the omission, from a 
 quotation, of one or more words not essential to 
 the idea which it is desired to convey, and also 
 to indicate illegible words, mutilations, and other 
 lacunae in a document, manuscript, or other mate- 
 rial which is quoted. For an ellipsis at the begin- 
 ning, in the middle, or at the end of a sentence four 
 periods, separated by a space (en quad), should 
 ordinarily be used, except in very narrow measures 
 (in French three only, with no space between). 
 If the preceding line ends in a point, this should 
 not be included in the four. Where a "whole para- 
 graph, or paragraphs, or, in poetry, a complete 
 line, or lines, are omitted, insert a full line of 
 periods, separated by em- or 2-em quads, according 
 to the length of the line. But the periods should not 
 extend beyond the length of the longest type-line: 
 
 The point . . . . is that the same forces .... are still 
 
 the undercurrents of every human life We may 
 
 never unravel the methods of the physical forces; ..... 
 but .... 
 
 I think it worth giving you these details, because it is 
 a vague thing, though a perfectly true thing, to say that it 
 was by his genius that Alexander conquered the eastern 
 world. 
 
 His army, you know, was a small one. To carry a 
 
 vast number of men .... 
 
 "Aux armes! ... aux armes! ... les Prussiens!" 
 
 "Je n'ecris que ce que j'ai vu, entendu, senti ou eprouve 
 
 moi-me'me ... j'ai deja publie quelques petits ouvrages ..."
 
 72 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 181. An ellipsis should be treated as a part of the citation; 
 consequently should be inclosed in the quotation 
 marks (see 178 [3]). 
 
 HYPHENS 
 
 182. A hyphen is placed at the end of a line the remainder 
 of the last word of which is carried to the next line 
 (see section on "Divisions") and between many 
 compound words. The modern tendency is in favor 
 of writing as one two words which, when united, 
 convey but one idea: 
 
 schoolroom, workshop, headquarters. 
 
 Thus far, however, this practice is only a tendency; 
 there are many compound words which are better 
 hyphenated than consolidated. The following 
 rules are designed to cover such cases, but it must 
 be remembered that they are not to be applied 
 in all cases, and that a certain degree of judgment 
 must be exercised in their use. 
 
 183. Hyphenate two or more words (except proper names 
 forming a unity in themselves) combined into one 
 adjective preceding a noun, or into one pronoun. 
 
 so-called Croesus, well-known author, first-class investment, 
 better-trained teachers, high-school course, half-dead horse, 
 much-mooted question, joint-stock company, English-speaking 
 peoples, nineteenth-century progress, white-rat serum, up-to- 
 date machinery, four-year-old boy, house-to-house canvass, 
 go-as-you-please fashion, deceased-wife's-sister bill; the 
 feeble-minded (person) ; but : New Testament times, Old 
 English spelling, an a priori argument.
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: PUNCTUATION 73 
 
 Do not hyphenate combinations of adverb and 
 adjective where no ambiguity could result: 
 an ever increasing flood. 
 
 Where one of the components contains more than 
 
 one word, an en dash should be used in place of a 
 
 hyphen: 
 
 New York-Chicago freight traffic, Norwegian-German- 
 
 Jewish immigrant. 
 
 But do not connect by a hyphen adjectives or par- 
 ticiples with adverbs ending in "-ly"; nor such 
 combinations as the foregoing when following the 
 noun, or qualifying a predicate: 
 highly developed species; a man well known in the neighbor- 
 hood; the fly-leaf, so called; "Her gown and carriage were 
 strictly up to date." 
 
 184. Hyphenate, as a rule, nouns formed by the combina- 
 tion of two nouns standing in objective relation to 
 each other that is, one of whose components is 
 derived from a transitive verb: 
 
 mind-reader, story-teller, fool-killer, office-holder, well-wisher, 
 property-owner; hero-worship, wood-turning, clay-modeling, 
 curriculum -making. 
 
 Exceptions are common and brief compounds, un- 
 wieldy formations, or compounds with a special 
 meaning: 
 
 lawgiver, taxpayer, proofreader, bookkeeper, stockholder, 
 freehand, schoolboy, schoolgirl (but: school man, to dis- 
 tinguish from the Schoolmen of the Middle Ages) ; encyclo- 
 pedia compiler; waterproof, concussionproof.
 
 74 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 185. A present participle united (i) with a noun to forma 
 new noun with a meaning different from that which 
 would be conveyed by the two words taken separately, 
 (2) with a preposition used absolutely (i.e., not gov- 
 erning a following noun), to form a noun, may 
 properly take a hyphen : 
 
 boarding-house, dining-hall, sleeping-room, dwelling-place, 
 printing-office, walking-stick, starting-point, stepping- 
 stone, stumbling-block (but meeting place) ; lean-to. 
 
 186. As a general rule, compounds of "book," "house," 
 "mill," "room," "shop," and "work" should be 
 printed as one compact word, without a hyphen, 
 when the prefixed noun contains only one syllable, 
 should be hyphenated when it contains two, and 
 should be printed as two separate words when it 
 contains three or more: 
 
 handbook, schoolbook, notebook, textbook; pocket-book, 
 
 story-book; reference book. 
 
 boathouse, clubhouse, schoolhouse, storehouse; engine-house, 
 
 power-house; business house. 
 
 commill, handmill, sawmill, windmill; water-mill, paper-mill; 
 
 chocolate mill. 
 
 bedroom, classroom, schoolroom, storeroom; lecture-room; 
 
 recitation room; but: drawing-room (sitting-room) ; drawing 
 
 room (for lessons) . 
 
 tinshop, workshop; bucket-shop, tailor-shop; policy shop; 
 
 handwork, woodwork; metal-work; filigree work. 
 
 Exceptions are rare combinations, and such as for 
 appearance' sake would better be separated: 
 wheat mill, school work, home work, class work, book 
 work, team work, source book.
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: PUNCTUATION 75 
 
 187. Compounds of "maker," "dealer," and other words 
 denoting occupation should ordinarily be hyphen- 
 ated; likewise nouns combined in an adjectival 
 sense before a proper noun: 
 
 harness-maker, book-dealer, (see 184); a soldier-statesman, 
 the poet-artist Rossetti. (Exceptions are a few short 
 words of everyday occurrence: bookmaker, dressmaker, 
 shopgirl.) 
 
 188. Compounds of "store" should be hyphenated when 
 the prefix contains only one syllable; otherwise not: 
 
 drug-store, feed-store (but: bookstore); grocery store, dry- 
 goods store. 
 
 189. Compounds of "fellow" are hyphenated when 
 forming the first element of the compound: 
 
 fellow-man, fellow-beings; but: playfellow; "Mr. Good- 
 fellow"; politics makes strange bedfellows. 
 
 190. Compounds of "father," "mother," "brother," 
 "sister," "daughter," "parent," and "foster" should 
 be hyphenated when forming the first element of 
 the compound: 
 
 father-love (but: fatherland), mother- tongue, brother-officer, 
 sister-nation, foster-son, daughter-cells, parent-word. 
 
 191. Compounds of "great," indicating the fourth degree 
 in a direct line of descent, call for a hyphen: 
 great-grandfather, great-grandson. 
 
 1 92. Compounds of " life " and " world " require a hyphen : 
 
 life-history, life-principle (but: lifetime), world-power, world- 
 problem.
 
 76 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 193. Compounds of "skin" with words of one syllable 
 are to be printed as one word; with words of more 
 than one, as two separate words: 
 
 calfskin, sheepskin; alligator skin. 
 
 194. Compounds of "master" should be hyphenated: 
 master-builder, master-stroke (exception: masterpiece). 
 
 195. Compounds of "god," when this word forms 
 the second element of the compound, should be 
 hyphenated: 
 
 sun-god, rain-god (but: godsend, godson). 
 
 196. "Half," "quarter," etc., combined with a noun 
 should be followed by a hyphen: 
 
 half-truth, half- tone; half-year, half-title, quarter-mile; but 
 not the adverb "halfway." 
 
 197. "Semi-," "demi-," "bi-," "tri-," etc., do not ordina- 
 rily demand a hyphen, unless followed by i, w, or y: 
 
 semiannual, demigod, bipartisan, bichromate, bimetallist, 
 trimonthly, tricolor, trifoliate, semi-incandescent, bi- 
 weekly, tri-yearly. 
 
 Exceptions are long or unusual formations: 
 semi-barbarous, semi-translucent. 
 
 198. Compounds of "self," when this word forms the 
 first element of the compound, are hyphenated: 
 self-evident, self-respect. 
 
 199. Combinations with "fold" are to be printed as one 
 word if the number contains only one syllable; if it 
 contains more, as two: 
 
 twofold, tenfold; fifteen fold, a hundred fold.
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: PUNCTUATION 77 
 
 200. Adjectives formed by the suffixation of "like" to 
 a noun are usually printed as one word if the noun 
 contains only one syllable (except when ending in 
 /); if it contains more (or is a proper noun), they 
 should be hyphenated: 
 
 childlike, homelike, warlike, godlike; eel-like, bell-like; 
 woman-like, business-like; American -like (but: Christlike). 
 
 201. "Vice," "ex-," "elect," and "general," constituting 
 parts of titles, should be connected with the chief 
 noun by a hyphen: 
 
 Vice-Consul Taylor, ex-President Cleveland, the governor- 
 elect, the postmaster-general. (But do not hyphenate mili- 
 tary terms such as: surgeon general, lieutenant general.) 
 
 202 . Compounds of "by-," when this word forms the first 
 element of the compound, should be hyphenated: 
 by-product, by-laws (but: bygones). 
 
 203. The prefixes " co-," " pre-," and " re-," when followed 
 by the same vowel as that in which they terminate, 
 or by w or y, or by any letter that forms a diph- 
 thong with the last letter of the prefix, except in 
 very common words, take a hyphen; but, as a rule, 
 they do not when followed by a different vowel or 
 by a consonant, except to avoid mispronunciation : 
 
 co-operation, pre-empted, re-enter, co-worker, re-yield; 
 but: coequal, coeducation, prearranged, reinstal; cohabita- 
 tion, prehistoric, recast (but: re-use, re-read, co-author). 
 NOTE. The Botanical Gazette prints: cooperate, reenter, etc. 
 
 Exceptions are combinations with proper names, long 
 or unusual formations, and words in which the
 
 78 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 omission of the hyphen would convey a meaning 
 different from that intended (cf . 9, 19, 208) : 
 
 pre-Raphaelite, re-democratize, re-pulverization; re-cover 
 ( = cover again), re-creation, re-formation (as distinguished 
 from reformation). 
 
 204. Omit the hyphen from "today," "tomorrow," 
 "tonight," "viewpoint," "standpoint." (See 119, 
 note.) 
 
 205. The negative particles "un-," "in-," "il-," "im-," 
 and "a-" do not usually require a hyphen: 
 
 unmanly, undemocratic, inanimate, indeterminate, illimitable, 
 impersonal, asymmetrical. 
 
 Exceptions would be rare and artificial combinations. 
 The particle "non-," on the contrary, ordinarily calls 
 for a hyphen, except in the commonest words: 
 
 non-aesthetic, non-subservient, non-contagious, non-ability, 
 non-interference, non-evolutionary, non-membership, non- 
 unionist; but: nonage, nondescript, nonessential, nonplus, 
 nonsense, noncombatant. 
 
 206. " Quasi-" prefixed to a noun or an adjective requires 
 a hyphen: 
 
 quasi-corporation, quasi-historical. 
 
 207. "Over" and "under" prefixed to a word should not 
 be followed by a hyphen, except in unusual cases: 
 
 overbold, overemphasize, overweight, underfed, underestimate, 
 undersecretary; but: over-soul, under-man, over-spiritualistic. 
 
 208. The Latin prepositions "ante," "infra," "inter," 
 "intra," "post," "sub," "super," and "supra," 
 and the Greek preposition "anti" prefixed to a
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: PUNCTUATION 79 
 
 word do not ordinarily require a hyphen, unless fol- 
 lowed by the letter with which they terminate, or, 
 in the case of those prefixes ending in a vowel, 
 by -w, by -y, or by a vowel which would form a 
 diphthong in conjunction with the terminal letter: 
 
 antedate, antechamber, antediluvian, inframarginal, inter- 
 national, interstate, intercity, intramural, postscript, post- 
 graduate, postprandial, subconscious, submarine, subtitle, 
 subway, superfine, supraliminal, antidote, antiseptic (but: 
 anti-imperialistic cf. 203), intra-atomic, ante-war, intra- 
 yearly, ante-urban, anti-eclectic. 
 
 Exceptions are such formations as 
 
 ante-bellum, ante-Nicene, anti-Semitic, inter-university, post- 
 revolutionary. 
 
 209. "Extra," "pan," and "ultra" as a rule call for a 
 hyphen : 
 
 extra-hazardous, pan -Hellenic, ultra-conservative (but: 
 extraordinary, Ultramontane). 
 
 210. In fractional numbers, spelled out, connect by a 
 hyphen the numerator and the denominator, unless 
 either already contains a hyphen: 
 
 "The year is two-thirds gone"; four and five-sevenths; 
 thirty one-hundredths; but: thirty-one hundredths. 
 
 But do not hyphenate in such cases as 
 
 "One half of his fortune he bequeathed to his widow; the 
 other, to charitable institutions." 
 
 211. In the case of two or more compound words occurring 
 together, which have one of their component elements
 
 8o THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 in common, this element is frequently omitted from 
 all but the last word, and its implication should be 
 indicated by a hyphen : 
 
 in English- and Spanish-speaking countries; one-, five-, and 
 ten-cent pieces; "If the student thinks to find this character 
 where many a literary critic is searching in fifth- and tenth- 
 century Europe he must not look outside of manuscript tra- 
 dition." 
 
 NOTE. Some writers regard this hyphen as an objectionable 
 Teutonism. 
 
 212. A hyphen is used to indicate a prefix or a suffix, as a 
 particle or syllable, not complete in itself: 
 
 "The prefix a-"; "The Spanish diminutive suffixes -ito 
 and -cita. 
 
 213. A hyphen is employed to indicate the syllables of a 
 word: 
 
 di-a-gram, pho-tog-ra-phy. 
 
 214. Following is a list of words of everyday occurrence 
 which should be hyphenated, and which do not fall 
 under any of the foregoing classifications : 
 
 after-years death-rate 
 anti-trust first-fruits 
 bas-relief folk-song 
 birth-rate horse-power 
 blood-feud ice-cream 
 blood-relations loan-word 
 coat-of-arms man-of-war 
 cross-reference mid-year 
 
 object-lesson title-page 
 page-proof trade-mark 
 pay-roll wave-length 
 poor-law well-being 
 sea-level well-nigh 
 sense-perception well-wisher 
 subject-matter will-power 
 thought-process 
 
 Otherwise Webster's Dictionary is standard for : 
 
 bedrock Nonconformist trade unions 
 
 farm land Pan-German un-Christian 
 
 grown-ups sledge hammer word formation 
 
 live stock standing room workingman
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: DIVISIONS 8 1 
 
 DIVISIONS 
 
 215. Avoid all unnecessary divisions of words. Wherever 
 consistent with good spacing, carry the whole word 
 over into the next line. 
 
 216. Do not, in wide measures (20 ems or more), divide 
 on a syllable of two letters, if possible to avoid it. 
 Never carry over a syllable of two letters. Good 
 spacing, however, is paramount. Words of four 
 letters like on-ly should never be divided; words 
 of five or six like oc-cur, of-fice, let-ter rarely. 
 
 217. Never let more than two consecutive lines termi- 
 nate in a hyphen, if at all avoidable. The next to 
 the last line in a paragraph ought not to end in a 
 divided word; and the last line (the "breakline") 
 should, in measures of 15 ems and up, contain at 
 least four letters. Similarly, try to avoid a divided 
 word at the bottom of a right-hand (recto) page. 
 
 218. Do not divide proper nouns, especially names of 
 persons, unless absolutely necessary. 
 
 219. Do not separate (i.e., put in different lines) the 
 initials of a name, or such combinations as 1496 A.D., 
 6:00 P.M., 6 43. 6d. 
 
 220. Avoid the separation of a divisional mark, e.g., (a) 
 or (i), in the middle of a sentence, from the section
 
 82 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 which it precedes; i.e., do not allow such mark to 
 fall at the end of a line, but carry it over with the 
 matter to which it pertains. 
 
 221. Divide according to pronunciation (the American 
 system), not according to derivation (the English 
 system) : 
 
 democ-racy, not: demo-cracy; knowl-edge, not: know-ledge; 
 aurif-erous, not: auri-ferous; antip-odes (still better: antipo- 
 des see 224), not: anti-podes. 
 
 As far as is compatible with pronunciation and good 
 spacing, however, divide compounds on etymologi- 
 cal lines, or according to derivation and meaning: 
 
 dis-pleasure is better than displeas-ure; school-master, 
 than schoolmas-ter; never: passo-ver, une-ven, etc. 
 
 Never divide on a syllable with a silent vowel, 
 
 such as: 
 
 possi-ble, vex-ed, enti-tled, princi-ples. 
 
 222. When two consonants meet between vowels, and 
 the syllable ends on one consonant, the division 
 may properly be made between the consonants, the 
 pronunciation determining the place of division: 
 
 advan-tage, exces-sive, finan-cier, foun-da-tion, impor-tant, 
 In-dian, moun-tain, profes-sor, struc-ture. 
 
 223. Do not terminate a line in a soft c or g y or in a j. 
 Escape the division entirely, if possible; if not pos- 
 sible, divide: 
 
 pro-cess, not: proc-ess; ne-cessary, not: nec-essary; spa- 
 cing, not: spac-ing (the rule being that in present parti-
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: DIVISIONS 83 
 
 ciples the -ing should be carried over); pro-geny, not: 
 prog-eny; pre-judice, not: prej-udice. 
 
 NOTE. This rule differs from that followed by Webster and 
 other dictionaries. 
 
 224. Divide on a vowel wherever practicable. In case a 
 vowel alone forms a syllable in the middle of a word, 
 run it into the first line: 
 
 sepa-rate, not: sep-arate; particu-lar, not: partic-ular; 
 criti-cism, not: crit-icism. 
 
 Exceptions are words in -able and -ible, which should 
 
 carry the vowel over into the next line: 
 
 read-able, not: reada-ble; convert-ible, not: converti-ble. 
 
 225. In hyphenated nouns and adjectives avoid additional 
 hyphens: 
 
 object-lesson, not: object-les-son; fellow-being, not: fel- 
 low-being; poverty-stricken, not: pov-erty-stricken, much 
 less: pover-ty-stricken. 
 
 226. A coalition of two vowel-sounds into one (i.e., a 
 diphthong) should be treated as one letter. There- 
 fore do not divide: 
 
 peo-ple (either syllable makes a bad division), Cae-sar 
 (cf. 218), bu-ilding. 
 
 227. In derivatives from words ending in t, the t, in 
 divisions, should be carried into the next line with 
 the suffix if the accent has been shifted; if the deriva- 
 tive has retained the accent of the parent-word, 
 the / should be left in the first line : 
 
 objec-tive (from ob'ject); defect-ive (from defect'); but: 
 respec-tively, distinc-tive.
 
 84 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 228. The addition of a plural s, adding a new syllable 
 to words ending in an s-sound, does not create a 
 new excuse for dividing such words: 
 
 hor-ses and circumstan-ces are impossible divisions. 
 
 229. Adjectives in -ical should be divided on the i: 
 physi-cal, not phys-ical nor physic-al. 
 
 230. Do not divide nothing. 
 
 231. The following are condensed rules for dividing 
 words in the foreign languages most frequently met 
 with in proofreading. While perhaps not entirely 
 comprehensive, they will be found to cover every 
 ordinary contingency. 
 
 FRENCH 
 
 a) The fundamental principle is to divide on a 
 vowel as far as possible, avoiding consonantal end- 
 ing of syllables: 
 
 in-di-vi-si-bi-li-te, a-che-ter; ta-bleau (not: tab-leau); 
 ba-lancer (not: bal-ancer). 
 
 6) Two consonants of which the second is / or r 
 (but not the combinations rl, Ir), are both carried 
 over to the following syllable: 
 
 ta-bleau, e"-cri-vain, per-dre, qua-tre; par-ler, hur-ler. 
 
 c) There are as many syllables as there are vowels, 
 
 even if soundless: 
 
 par-lent, vic-toi-re, pro-pri-e'-tai-re, guer-re, fil-les;
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: DIVISIONS 85 
 
 but a mute e following a vowel does not form a 
 
 syllable: 
 
 e-taient, joue-rai; 
 
 and i, y, o, ou, u, when preceding other vowels, are 
 
 often sounded as consonants, and then do not form 
 
 a syllable: 
 
 bien, 6-tions, yeux, loin, fouet-ter, 6-cuel-le. 
 
 GERMAN 
 
 a) The fundamental principle is to divide on a 
 vowel as far as possible: 
 
 hii-ten, le-ben, Fa-brik. 
 
 b) If several consonants stand between vowels, 
 usually only the last is carried over: 
 
 Rit-ter, klir-ren, Klemp-ner, Ver-wand-te, Karp-fen. 
 
 c) sz, ch, sch, ph, st, th are never separated (but see 
 (/) below): 
 
 Bu-sze, Be-cher, Ha-scher (but: Haus-chen), Geo-gra-phie, 
 La-sten, Ma-thilde. 
 
 d) If ck must be divided, it is separated into k-k: 
 Deckel Dek-kel. 
 
 e) In foreign words (Fremdivorter) , combinations of 
 b, d, g, k, p, t, with I or r are carried over: 
 Pu-bli-kum, Me-trum, Hy-drant. 
 
 /) Compound words are separated first into their 
 component elements, and within each element the 
 foregoing rules apply: 
 Fursten-schlosz, Tur-an-gel, Inter-esse.
 
 86 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 ITALIAN 
 
 a) The fundamental principle is to divide on a 
 vowel as far as possible: 
 
 ta-vo-li-no, nar-ra-re. 
 
 b) s before a consonant, r following a consonant, 
 ch, gh, gli (gl), gn, qu, sc, d, fl, gl, pi are never 
 separated: 
 
 ca-sti-ghi, a-vro, mi-gli6-re, bi-so-gno, in-chi6-stro, u-scire. 
 
 c) i=y and u=w go with the following vowel; 
 ac, au, ei, eu, oi are not separated: 
 
 miei, tuoi. 
 
 SPANISH 
 
 a) The fundamental principle is to divide on a 
 vowel as far as possible: 
 
 ca-ra-co-les, re-ba-no, fle-xi-bi-li-dad. 
 
 b) br, bl, ch, cl, cr, dr, II, pr, rr, tr, and n, being 
 regarded as simple consonants, follow the fore- 
 going rule; cc and nn are divided, as in English: 
 mu-cha-cho, ba-ta-lla, bu-116, ba-rre-rio, ci-ga-rro; ac-ce-so, 
 en-no-ble-cer, in-ne-ga-ble. 
 
 c) The liquid consonants / and r, when preceded by 
 any consonant other than s, must not be separated 
 from that consonant, except in uniting parts of 
 compound words: 
 
 ha-blar, po-dria, ce-le-bra-ci-on, si-glo; but sub-lu-nar, 
 sub-ra-yar, es-la-bon. 
 
 d} Two separable consonants should be divided; 
 5 is always disjoined from a following consonant: 
 cuer-da, chas-co, pron-to; has-ta, as-pi-rar, cons-pi-rar.
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: DIVISIONS 87 
 
 GREEK 
 
 a) Single consonants, combinations of consonants 
 which can begin a word, and mutes followed by p 
 or v are placed at the beginning of a syllable: 
 
 -^o), e-yw, e-OTre-pa, ve'-Krap, d-K/x,?7, Se-oytds, /ni-xpov, Trpa- 
 y/ia-Tos, yi-yvd>-<rKw. 
 
 Other combinations of consonants are divided: 
 
 irpacr-crw, eA-7rts, v-8ov, ap-/ta-Ta. 
 
 6) Compound words are divided into their original 
 parts; subject to that the foregoing rule applies: 
 
 7rpo<r-a-y<i>, 7rap-a-yw. 
 
 LATIN 
 
 a) A Latin word has as many syllables as it has 
 vowels or diphthongs (ae, au, oe, ei, eu, ui). 
 
 b) When a single consonant occurs between two 
 vowels, divide before the consonant: 
 
 Cae-sar, me-ri-di-es. 
 
 c) In the case of two or more consonants divide 
 before the last consonant, except in the combina- 
 tions: mute (p, ph, b, t, th, d, c, ch, g)+liquid (/, r), 
 and qu or gu: 
 
 om-nis, scrip-tus, cunc-tus (but: pa-tris, e-quus, lin-gua). 
 
 d) Compound words are separated first into their 
 component elements, and within each element the 
 foregoing rules apply: 
 
 ad-est, ab-rum-po, red-e-o, trans-i-go.
 
 88 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 FOOTNOTES 
 
 232. For reference indexes, as a rule, use superior figures. 
 Only in special cases should asterisks, daggers, etc., 
 be employed (see 234); for instance, in tabular or 
 algebraic matter, where figures would be likely to 
 cause confusion. Index figures in the text should be 
 placed after the punctuation marks, without space, 
 except in German, where they are placed inside: 
 
 .... the niceties of style which were then invading Attic 
 prose, 1 and which made .... 
 
 1 In particular the avoidance of hiatus. 
 p^y+jt* 
 
 * Schenk's equation. 
 
 When figures are not used, the sequence of indexes 
 should be: 
 
 * ("asterisk" or "star"), f ("dagger"), % ("double dagger"), 
 ("section mark"), || ("parallels"), ^ ("paragraph mark"). 
 
 233. Where references to the same work follow each 
 other closely and uninterruptedly, use ibid, instead 
 of repeating the title. Thus ibid, takes the place 
 of as much of the previous reference as is repeated: 
 
 Spencer, Principles of Sociology, chap, iv., p. 128. 
 
 Ibid., p. 129. 
 
 Barnes, "Charles Stunner," Jour, of Pol. Econ., XXXV, 427. 
 
 Ibid., p. 435- 
 
 Ibid, should, however, not ordinarily be used for 
 the first footnote on a verso (left-hand) page; it is
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: FOOTNOTES 89 
 
 better usage either to repeat the title or, if the 
 reference is to the whole citation, to use loc. cit. 
 (the place cited) or op. cit. (the work cited) or 
 a.a.O. (am angezeigten Orte) in German: 
 
 'Smith, Wealth of Nations, p. 289. 
 
 3 Loc. cit. (on verso page if exactly the same place is cited), or 
 
 3 Smith, op. cit., p. 290. 
 
 However op. cit. is not used to repeat the title of a 
 journal, but it may be used to refer to an author's 
 work in a periodical and should not be used with- 
 out the author's name clearly in text or footnote. 
 
 234. Footnotes to tables, whether the tables are ruled or 
 open, should be in 6 pt, and should invariably be 
 placed at the foot of the table and not at the foot of 
 the page. For reference indexes in such cases use 
 asterisks, etc., and not superior figures (see 232). 
 
 235. If the author's name is given in the text in connec- 
 tion with a reference to, or a quotation from, his 
 work, it should not be repeated in the footnote: 
 
 .... This theory is questioned by Herbert, as follows- 
 "I cannot admit . . . ."' 
 
 1 Laws of the Ancients, 1, 153. 
 
 236. It is better to place the index figure in the text at 
 the end of the quotation (see illustration above). 
 
 237. Ordinarily, omit "Vol.," "chap.," and "p." in paren- 
 
 thetical or footnote references to particular pas- 
 sages. Use Roman numerals (capitals) for Volume,
 
 90 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 Book, Part, Division, except in reference to ancient 
 classical works, when lower-case roman numerals 
 should be used; Roman numerals (lower-case) for 
 chapter and pages of introductory matter (Preface, 
 etc.) ; and Arabic numerals for number (Heft) and 
 text pages. Only when confusion would be liable 
 to arise, use " Vol.," "p.," etc., in connection with the 
 numerals; but where the reference is to a page, un- 
 accompanied by further details, the abbreviation 
 "p." or "pp." must of course be used. In text 
 matter, not parenthetical, spell out chapter, verse, 
 page, line, note, figure, etc. In classical references 
 use no comma between author's name and the title 
 of his work, and no comma following the title, unless 
 "Vol.," "p.," or some kindred symbol is used. In 
 all references to divisions of classical or ancient 
 works use periods in place of commas, reserving the 
 comma to indicate a succession (of pages, etc.) : 
 
 1 Miller, French Rev. (ad ed.; London: Abrahams, 1888), 
 II, Part IV, iii. 
 
 * S. I. Curtiss, "The Place of Sacrifice among Primitive 
 Semites," Biblical World, XXI (1903), 248 ff. 
 
 JP. 63; pp. 27-36. 
 
 * Cicero De officiis i. 133, 140. 
 *De div. per somn. i, p. 4630. 
 
 'Fraser, The Golden Bough*, I, 27 [superior figure within 
 punctuation indicating number of the edition]. 
 
 The same practice prescribed for classical references 
 is frequently desired by authors with respect to 
 English references, and may with equal propriety 
 be followed:
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: FOOTNOTES 91 
 
 1 W. W. Greg Pastoral Poetry and Pastoral Drama (London 
 1906) 114. 
 
 238. The date of publication in a reference to a periodical 
 should be put in parentheses immediately following 
 the volume number: 
 
 1 Barnes, "Lester Frank Ward," Amer. Jour, of Social., XXV 
 (1919), 89. 
 
 If the citation is to month, year, and page only, the 
 date may appear in its natural order with commas: 
 
 3 "Problems of Reconstruction," Journal of Political Economy, 
 May, 1919, p. 89. 
 
 239. In work set on the linotype machine, footnotes should 
 be renumbered consecutively through each article, 
 in a journal, or through each chapter, in a book, 
 to save resetting in case of change (see "Hints to 
 Authors and Editors," note under "Footnotes," 
 p. 122). 
 
 NOTE. Exceptions to these rules are footnotes in the Botani- 
 cal Gazette and the Astrophysical Journal, which have adopted 
 the following styles: 
 
 Botanical Gazette 
 
 1 LIVINGSTON, B. E., (i) On the nature of the stimulus which 
 causes the change in form of polymorphic green algae. BOT. 
 GAZ. 30:289-317. 1900. 
 
 3 , (2) The heredity of sex. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. 
 
 40:187-218. 1903. 
 
 Astrophysical Journal 
 
 1 " Revision of Wolf's Sun-Spot Relative Numbers," Monthly 
 Weather Review, 30, 171, 1902. 
 
 3 Astrophysical Journal, 10, 333, 1899. 
 
 Botanical Gazette numbers its footnotes consecutively through- 
 out an article; all the other journals of the University of Chicago 
 Press number their footnotes from i up on each page, except 
 in special cases.
 
 92 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 INDEXING 
 
 240. In indexes of proper names and other similar 
 alphabetical lists the following rules should be 
 observed : 
 
 a) Names beginning with M', Me, Mac, or St., 
 Ste., whether the following letter is capitalized or 
 not, should be listed as if the prefix were spelled 
 Mac, Saint, Sainte, thus making it unnecessary 
 for one who consults the index to look in several 
 places to make sure of rinding the name sought: 
 
 Machiavelli St. Louis 
 
 M'Intyre, Henry Sainte Beuve 
 
 Mclntyre, James Salt Lake City 
 
 Maclntyre, Thomas 
 Mack, Joseph 
 
 &) Compound names should be listed under the 
 first part of the name. List the other parts of 
 the names in their respective alphabetical positions 
 and give a cross-reference to the first: 
 
 Campbell-Bannerman, Sir Henry 
 
 Stratton-Porter, Gene 
 
 Watts-Dunton, Theodore 
 
 Porter, Stratton, Gene. See Stratton-Porter 
 
 On the other hand, in the case of hyphenated 
 names gratuitously adopted, as in the case of 
 married women adding the maiden name to the 
 married name, the name preceding the hyphen 
 may be disregarded, and listing should be under
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: INDEXING 93 
 
 the letter of the true name, with a cross-reference 
 under the name preceding the hyphen. 
 c) Names with prefixes should be listed under the 
 part following the prefix, except (i) in English 
 (see b above); (ii) in French when the prefix 
 consists of or contains the article; (iii) in Italian 
 and Spanish when the prefix consists simply of the 
 article; (iv) in Dutch, the "Van," "Ten," etc., being 
 always capitalized (see 3, note); (v) when the 
 prefix and the name are written as one word. 
 Naturalized names with prefixes should be treated 
 according to the rules for the language adopted. 
 
 Hoffman, von; Lima, de; Ponte e Horto, da; Santos 
 
 Pereira Jardin, dos. 
 
 English: A Becket; De Quincey; De Morgan; D 'Israeli; 
 
 MacDonald; Van Buren. 
 
 French: DuMoncel; La Rochefoucauld ; LeSage; DuPin; 
 
 Du Bocage; but: Rosny, de; Bouille, de; Allard, de. 
 
 Italian and Spanish: La Lumia; La Farina; Lo Gatto; 
 
 but: Farina, da; Rio, del; Torre, della. 
 
 Prefix compounded with the name: Vanderkinde, Zurlauben, 
 
 Dechambre, Vanderhoeck, Delacroix. 
 
 In the case of the exceptions above noted the 
 first letter of the prefix governs the alphabetical 
 position of the name. 
 
 d} Names spelled with the umlaut a, o, ii should 
 be listed as if the umlaut were spelled out ae,oe, ue: 
 
 Miiller, A. 
 Mufola, C. 
 Muller, B.
 
 94 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 e) Names having two parts, or names of firms, 
 connected by "and," "&," "y" (Spanish), "et" 
 (French), "und" (German), or "e" (Italian), 
 should be listed according to the first letter of the 
 name preceding the connective: Smith & Evans 
 (under "S"); Gomez y Pineda (under "G"); 
 Loubet et Meunier (under "L"); Duncker und 
 Humblot (under "D"); Sandrone e Vallardi 
 (under "S"). , 
 
 /) On the subject of cross-references see 62. 
 g) In indexing general terms the alphabetical ar- 
 rangement of subdivisions is much more useful 
 than the numerical order of page numbers; but in 
 so arranging such material only the first principal 
 word should be taken, i.e., adjective, noun, verb, 
 adverb, not the article, conjunction, or preposition: 
 
 Numbers: beginning a sentence, 73; in connected groups, how 
 treated, 73; consecutive treatment of, 113, 119; round, treat 
 ment of, 73; use of dash in consecutive, 119. 
 
 ti) Indexes are usually set in 6 or 8 pt. double 
 column, allowing i pica between columns. Entries 
 are separated by extra leads. Matter is usually 
 set flush and hang i em with solid runovers.
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: TABULAR WORK 95 
 
 TABULAR WORK 
 
 241. In n-pt. and zo-pt. matter open (unruled) tables 
 should ordinarily be set in 9 pt. leaded; ruled, in 
 8 pt. solid. In 9-pt. matter both open and ruled 
 tables should be set in 8 pt. solid. In 8-pt. matter 
 open tables should be set in 6 pt. leaded; ruled, in 
 6 pt. solid. In 6-pt. matter both open and ruled 
 tables should be set in 6 pt. solid. For columns 
 representing totals, averages, percentages, and 
 generalizations italic and black-face figures may 
 be used if desired to set off the various classes of 
 results. (See Table III, p. 100.) 
 
 242. Captions for the columns of open tables and box- 
 heads for ruled tables should ordinarily be set in 
 6 pt. Box-heads of open tables should be 6-pt. caps 
 and lower case unless subheads are used, in which 
 case caps and small caps are used for the upper 
 head (see Table III, p. 100). In ruled tables with 
 box-heads of several stories the upper story pri- 
 mary heads should be set in caps and small caps, 
 except where the second story consists of figures 
 only (see Table I, p. 98) ; the lower secondary in 
 caps and lower case. Wherever small caps are 
 used in box-heads, the heading for the "stub" (i.e., 
 first column) should, as a rule, also be set in caps 
 and small caps.
 
 96 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 243. In ruled tables there should be at least two leads' 
 space between the horizontal rules and the matter 
 inclosed, and, if practicable, at least the equivalent 
 of an en quad, of the type in which the body of 
 the table is set, between the perpendicular rules and 
 the matter inclosed. 
 
 244. In open tables either periods, one em apart and 
 aligned, or leaders, may be used between the col- 
 umns (see 248). In ruled tables, in the "stub," 
 leaders should usually be employed, if there is room, 
 except in case the stub runs over and a brace is 
 necessary. (A leader is a piece of type, having dots 
 ["period leader"] or short lines ["hyphen leader"] 
 upon its face, used in tables, indexes, etc., to 
 lead the eye across a space to the right word or 
 number.) An en leader is used instead of a 
 decimal point in tables. 
 
 245. In ruled columns of figures, to express a blank use 
 leaders across the full width of the column. Cen- 
 ter the figures in the column; if they cannot be put 
 in the exact center, and there is an unequal number 
 of digits in the groups, leave more space on the left 
 than on the right. All decimals and dollar signs 
 or other concrete values should be aligned. 
 
 246. When there is reading-matter in the columns of a 
 ruled table, it should be centered, if possible; if any 
 line runs over, use hanging indention, and align all 
 on the left.
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: TABULAR WORK 97 
 
 247. Double rules should be used at the top of all tables, 
 but perpendicularly, as a usual thing, only when a 
 table is doubled up on itself and the stub is re- 
 peated. (See Table IV, p. 100.) In continued 
 broadside tables, where the heading is not repeated 
 use a single rule only. Repeat heading on each 
 even page. 
 
 248. Tables of two columns only should be set open; 
 of three or more, ruled, except in such a case as 
 the table on page 99. All continuations of tables 
 should be of the same dimensions, even if blank 
 columns are necessary, and tables with identical 
 headings should stand parallel. 
 
 249. "Table I," etc., in headlines of tables should ordi- 
 narily be set in caps of the type in which the body of 
 the table is set and should not exceed the width of 
 the table; the following (descriptive) line, if any, 
 should be set in caps and small caps of the same 
 type. A single descriptive headline, not pre- 
 ceded by the number of the table, should be set 
 in caps of the type in which the table is set. A 
 footnote to the table should be set in 6 pt. with a 
 paragraph indention, and should not exceed the 
 width of the table. But when 6-pt. and 8-pt. ruled 
 tables are both used in the same work, use 8-pt. 
 headings over all tables (see 234). When tables 
 containing footnotes run over several pages, it is 
 necessary to repeat the footnotes on each even page.
 
 98 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 250. Specimen tables for illustration: 
 
 TABLE I 
 DISTRIBUTION OF STARS IN EIGHT CLUSTERS 
 
 Plate (Exp.) 
 
 Ring 
 
 Sectors 
 
 Mean 
 
 15 
 
 4S 
 
 165 
 
 195 
 
 N.G.C. 5024, MESSIER 53 
 
 
 fo*.. 
 
 
 2/1/1 
 
 
 
 ?25 
 
 
 I 
 
 385 
 
 ^84 
 
 362 
 
 376 
 
 S7O 
 
 102 (ISO"").. 
 
 II 
 
 200 
 
 182 
 
 189 
 
 200 
 
 196 
 
 
 III. . . . 
 
 100 
 
 92 
 
 94 
 
 106 
 
 97 
 
 
 IV 
 
 44 
 
 28 
 
 34 
 
 42 
 
 38 
 
 N.G.C. 5272, MESSIER 3 
 
 
 fo*.. 
 
 
 4CQ 
 
 
 
 466 
 
 
 I 
 
 48 
 
 S6 
 
 4.2 
 
 60 
 
 C4 
 
 64 (5 m ) 
 
 II 
 
 20 
 
 14 
 
 16 
 
 I? 
 
 18 
 
 
 III. . . . 
 
 8 
 
 10 
 
 12 
 
 6 
 
 8 
 
 
 [IV 
 
 3 
 
 10 
 
 6 
 
 6 
 
 6 
 
 
 (o 
 
 
 669 
 
 
 
 680 
 
 
 I 
 
 168 
 
 IC2 
 
 137 
 
 
 177 
 
 6s(iS m )--- 
 
 II 
 
 70 
 
 68 
 
 69 
 
 54 
 
 75 
 
 
 III. . . . 
 
 26 
 
 22 
 
 29 
 
 20 
 
 30 
 
 
 [IV 
 
 6 
 
 14 
 
 16 
 
 10 
 
 15 
 
 * Radius of central area .05. 
 
 SPACES BETWEEN NINE-UNIT LEADERS 
 (For Eight Point) 
 
 Nine-unit leaders with one en between 
 
 With one em between 
 
 With one and one-half ems between 
 
 With two ems between .
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: TABULAR WORK 
 
 99 
 
 (For Nine Point) 
 Leaders with one en between 
 
 With one em between .... 
 
 
 
 
 With one and one-half ems between 
 
 With two ems between . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 THICKNESS 
 
 TOTAL 
 
 THICKNESS 
 
 No. 
 
 Feet 
 
 Inches 
 
 Feet Inches 
 
 8. One layer of gray limestone . . . 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 2 9 
 
 7. Layer similar to one above. . . . 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 6 9 
 
 6. Massive light-gray layer. No 
 
 
 
 
 fossils noted 
 
 2 
 
 o 
 
 4 7 
 
 5. Shale parting 
 
 o 
 
 I 
 
 " . / 
 
 I 7 
 
 4. Grayish limestone 
 
 
 o 
 
 I 
 
 i 6 
 
 3. Bluish shales 
 
 2 
 
 y 
 
 2 
 
 o o 
 
 2. Limestone, hard and fossiliferous 
 
 5 
 
 \J 
 
 4 
 
 y 
 
 8 6 
 
 i. Gravish to bluish shales. . 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 2 
 
 TABLE II Continued 
 
 Method 
 
 a 
 
 No. Stars 
 
 I. From variable stars 
 
 o" 00008 
 
 2 
 
 II. From Kapteyn's luminosity-curves: 
 
 C.I. 0.39 to O.2O 
 
 .000005 
 
 i? 
 
 " <-0 10 
 
 .000007 
 
 C2 
 
 " (Pv. mag. < 15. 30).... 
 " o. 10 to o.oi 
 
 .000009 
 .00003 
 
 23 
 
 
 All colors 
 
 .00005 
 
 49 c 
 
 III. From Russell's data for absolute mag- 
 nitude: 
 C.I. < o.io 
 
 .00005 
 
 C2 
 
 All colors 
 
 oToooio 
 
 495 
 
 
 
 
 Provisionally adopted mean 
 
 oToooo3 
 
 
 

 
 ioo THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 TABLE III 
 
 DISTRICT 
 
 MEMBERS OF 
 FAMILY GROUPS 
 
 LODGERS 
 
 TOTAL 
 
 Number 
 
 Percentage 
 
 Number 
 
 Percentage 
 
 Stockyards . . . 
 Jewish 
 
 6,348 
 8i3 
 1,183 
 12,657 
 2,249 
 
 73 
 79 
 95 
 96 
 
 73 
 
 2,383 
 220 
 
 27 
 21 
 
 8,731 
 1,033 
 
 Bohemian .... 
 Polish 
 
 574 
 835 
 
 4 
 27 
 
 13,231 
 3,094 
 
 Italian 
 
 
 TABLE IV 
 
 
 Brine* 
 
 Sea-Waterf 
 
 
 Brine* 
 
 Sea-W ater 
 
 K. . 
 
 1 . 37 
 
 I. II 
 
 HCO 3 . . 
 
 O. 2O 
 
 
 Na 
 
 24.00 
 
 20. ?o 
 
 Cl 
 
 ee.Qe 
 
 ec . 20 
 
 Ca 
 
 2 O2 
 
 i . 20 
 
 Br . 
 
 O O4 
 
 O. IQ 
 
 Mg.. 
 
 O. ?'? 
 
 -I.TI 
 
 I 
 
 Nil 
 
 
 Fe 
 
 
 
 Si 
 
 o.o? 
 
 
 Al 
 SO 4 
 
 O.OI 
 
 4.88 
 
 7.60 
 
 Percentage 
 of salin- 
 
 
 
 CO, 
 
 Nil 
 
 O.2I 
 
 ity . . 
 
 7.20 
 
 3.3O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 * From Salt Creek, Salt Point Peninsula, Lake Winnipegosis. Professor 
 M. A. Parker, analyst. 
 
 t Mean of 77 analyses by W. Dittmar. 
 
 SECOND YEAR 
 
 Electives 
 (Two to be taken) 
 
 Latin 
 
 Modern History .... 
 
 German 
 
 French 
 
 Cooking or Sewing 
 Music and Drawing . 
 Public Speaking .... 
 Stenography 
 
 Periods 
 
 5 
 
 5 
 
 5 
 
 5 
 IO 
 
 3 
 10
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: TABULAR WORK 
 
 101 
 
 TABLE V 
 
 MEAN ANOMALIES 
 
 MEAN ANOMALIES 
 
 CHARACTER OF STATIONS 
 
 With Regard to Sign 
 
 Without Regard to Sign 
 
 Hayford; 
 Depth, 
 113.7 km. 
 
 Bouguer 
 
 Hayford; 
 Depth, 
 113.7 km. 
 
 Bouguer 
 
 
 0.009 
 .001 
 
 .001 
 .003 
 + .001 
 
 .002 
 0.003 
 
 +0.017 
 + -004 
 
 .028 
 .107 
 .no 
 
 .036 
 -0.037 
 
 0.018 
 .021 
 
 .019 
 .020 
 .017 
 .019 
 
 O.O2O 
 
 O.O2I 
 
 .025 
 033 
 .108 
 .in 
 
 .049 
 0.050 
 
 
 Stations in interior, not in 
 mountanous regions 
 Stations in mountainous 
 regions, below sea-level. 
 Stations in mountainous 
 regions, above sea- level. 
 All stations (except the two 
 Seattle stations) 
 
 All stations 
 
 
 SYSTEMATIC VARIATION FROM HOMOGENEITY 
 IN AX' 
 
 Region 
 
 Group 
 
 AA 
 
 AA' 
 
 AA' Group cs, d 
 minus 
 AA' Group a, 6 
 
 4200-4300 
 5000-5100 
 
 (C5, <*..-. 
 
 IM 
 
 /C5, <*...- 
 la. . 
 
 159 
 .163 
 
 .165 
 .178 
 
 .165! 
 
 .164; 
 
 i73\ 
 .i8oj 
 
 +O.OOI 
 .007 
 
 
 (d.. 
 
 .ICC 
 
 .168! 
 
 
 
 \a.. 
 
 . 1 70 
 
 i 
 
 .172 1 
 
 .004 
 
 
 [d.. 
 
 .164. 
 
 i75\ 
 
 
 5200-5300 
 
 {a.. 
 
 .I7S 
 
 /3 > 
 .177] 
 
 .OO2 
 
 
 Id.. 
 
 .177 
 
 .187! 
 
 
 5300-5400 
 
 {a.. 
 
 . 104 
 
 .io6j 
 
 - .OOQ 
 
 
 tt.. 
 
 . I(K 
 
 . 2I2l 
 
 
 
 if 
 
 .212 
 
 .2l6f 
 
 0.004 
 
 
 
 

 
 102 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 TABLE VI 
 
 THE DISTRIBUTION OF EACH GROUP IN ENGLISH IN 
 GRADES 6-2 TO 12-2 INCLUSIVE 
 
 GRADES 
 
 CLASS INTERVALS 
 
 6-2 
 
 7-2 
 
 8-2 
 
 9-2 
 
 10-2 
 
 II-2 
 
 Junior High-School Group 
 
 o? loo . 
 
 42 
 
 6 
 
 65 
 54 
 
 i 
 
 4 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 33 
 17 
 72 
 
 54 
 3 
 
 38 
 54 
 54 
 44 
 
 5 
 
 i 
 
 23 
 40 
 62 
 52 
 23 
 
 I 
 
 19 
 24 
 
 53 
 
 7i 
 13 
 
 5 
 9 
 
 i 
 
 IS 
 23 
 
 53 
 
 78 
 18 
 9 
 
 2 
 
 QO- 04.00. . 
 
 8s 80.00. . 
 
 80 84.00. . 
 
 7C 70.00. . 
 
 7O 74 . 00 . . 
 
 6< 60.00. . 
 
 2 
 
 I 
 
 60 64. oo. . 
 
 
 
 OS IOO 
 
 
 
 
 Non- Junior High-School Group 
 
 29 
 6 
 80 
 58 
 
 5 
 5 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 IO 
 
 77 
 66 
 
 3 
 
 43 
 9 
 9i 
 Si 
 
 i 
 
 4 
 
 19 
 
 32 
 
 67 
 
 59 
 16 
 6 
 
 2 
 
 19 
 
 22 
 
 44 
 83 
 18 
 
 5 
 5 
 
 19 
 13 
 
 47 
 84 
 19 
 8 
 8 
 
 OO 04 . 00 . 
 
 8< 80.00. . 
 
 80 84. OQ . . 
 
 7C 7Q.OO. . 
 
 7O- 74 . 00 . . 
 
 6"> 60.00. . 
 
 7 
 
 60 64 oo . . 
 
 
 
 
 
 

 
 TECHNICAL TERMS
 
 EXPLANATION OF TECHNICAL TERMS 
 
 THE POINT SYSTEM 
 
 251. The point is the underlying unit of all typographical 
 measures. 
 
 252. The standard of measurement is the pica. A pica 
 is twelve points (one-sixth of an inch). 
 
 This line is set in 12 pt. (pica). 
 This line is set in n pt. (small pica). 
 This line is set in 10 pt. (long primer). 
 This line is set in 9 pt. (bourgeois). 
 This line is set in 8 pt. (brevier). 
 This line is set in 7 pt. (minion). 
 This line is set in 6 pt. (nonpareil). 
 This line is set in 5 pt. (pearl) . 
 
 The sizes larger or smaller than these are seldom 
 used in book composition. 
 
 STYLES OF TYPE 
 
 253. Ordinary type is called roman. To "roman-quote" 
 is to put in roman type between quotation marks. 
 
 This line is set in roman. 
 
 254. Type with a sloping face is called italic or italics. 
 Italic is indicated in manuscripts by a straight line 
 under the word or words (see p. 133)- 
 
 This line is set in italics. 
 
 105
 
 106 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 255. Type with a heavy black face is called bold face. 
 Bold face is indicated by a wavy line (see p. 133). 
 This line is set in bold face. 
 
 256. The body of a type is called the shank; the upper 
 surface, bearing the character, the face; the part 
 of the face projecting beyond the shank, the kern; 
 the part of the shank projecting beyond the face, 
 the shoulder. 
 
 257. A font, or complete assortment of a given size, of 
 type includes large capitals ("caps"), small capitals 
 ("small caps"), and lower-case letters (so called from 
 being placed in the lower half of the printer's case). 
 Caps are indicated by three straight lines; small 
 caps, by two (see p. 133). 
 
 THESE ARE CAPS OF 9-PT. ROMAN. 
 
 THESE ARE SMALL CAPS OF Q-PT. ROMAN. 
 
 These are lower case of Q-pt. roman. 
 
 SPACING 
 
 258. The technical names for spaces and the methods of 
 spacing depend on whether the "foundry" type (i.e., 
 type set by hand) or machine-set type is in question. 
 There are several makes of typesetting machines on 
 the market, but of these the monotype (see 293) and 
 the linotype (see 294) are in commonest use. 
 
 259. The monotype and linotype machines have come 
 into such universal use that a few words regarding 
 their respective systems of spacing are proper:
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: TECHNICAL TERMS 107 
 MONOTYPE 
 
 In monotype composition the unit system instead 
 of the pica system of measurement is used. There 
 are 18 units in a quad, which, unlike the em quad 
 of the foundry type for hand composition, is not a 
 perfect square at the end. The standard space 
 (see 261) is a 6-unit space =3-em space; a 5-unit 
 space =4-em space; a 4-unit space = a little less 
 than a 5-em space, and is the smallest space in use 
 on the monotype machine. These are cast from 
 matrices, and represent "fixed" spaces, i.e., un- 
 varying in width. On the other hand, in the pro- 
 cess of composition on the keyboard, the swelling, 
 or justifying, space is used to fill out a line. When 
 it is evident that another word or syllable cannot 
 be set in a line, the keys indicating the proper space 
 are struck by the operator, and all spaces in the 
 line are spread equally to fill out the line, resulting 
 in spaces which do not necessarily contain a specific 
 number of units (see 293). 
 
 LINOTYPE 
 
 260. On the linotype machine the pica system of meas- 
 urement is used. There are three "fixed" spaces 
 (see 261) : the em quad, the en quad, and the thin 
 space, which is equal to a 4-em space. To spread 
 the spaces, a space band is used; this band can 
 spread a space to any size between a 3-em space 
 and a space a trifle larger than an en quad. If a
 
 108 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 space smaller than a thin space is required, it must 
 be put in by hand (see 294). 
 
 FOUNDRY TYPE (AND GENERAL) 
 
 261. An em, em quad, or simply quad (= quadrat) is a 
 block of type the top of which forms a perfect 
 square. A i2-pt. quad is thus a piece of metal 
 one-sixth of an inch square at the ends. The term 
 em is also used of the size of such a square in any 
 given size of type as a unit of measurement. 
 "Indent 8 pt. 2 ems" thus means that the line should 
 be indented 16 points. An em quad is used between 
 complete sentences (see 262). An em dash is a 
 dash the width of an em. 
 
 Two- and three-em quads are multiples of the above, 
 cast in one block of type metal. Two- and three-em 
 dashes are dashes the width of 2- and 3-em quads 
 respectively. 
 
 An en quad is half the size of an em quad in width. 
 Thus an 8-pt. en quad is 4 points wide (thick) and 
 8 points long (deep). An en dash is a dash the 
 width of an en quad. 
 
 A three-em space is one-third of an em hi thickness. 
 This is also called a thick space, and is the standard 
 space used to separate words. 
 A four-em space is one-fourth of an em; a five-em 
 space is one-fifth of an em. Four- and 5 -em spaces 
 are also called middle and thin spaces. 
 A hair-space is any space thinner than a 5-em.
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: TECHNICAL TERMS 109 
 
 This line is spaced with em quads. 
 
 This line is spaced with en quads. 
 
 This line is spaced with 3 -em spaces. 
 
 This line is spaced with 4-em spaces. 
 
 This line is spaced with 5-em spaces. 
 
 The letters in this word are hair-spaced: America. 
 
 This is a 3 -em dash: 
 
 This is a 2 -em dash: - 
 This is an em dash: 
 This is an en dash: - 
 
 An em dash is often used in indexes and bibliog- 
 raphies before the first word (without space) of 
 subentries to save repeating. 
 A 2-em dash is used to follow a date indicating 
 
 time still continuing, as: 1876 . 
 
 A 2-em dash is used without space after a word 
 of which the ending is to be supplied. 
 A 3-em dash is used (with space on each side) to 
 denote a whole word omitted or to be supplied. 
 A 3-em dash is also used in bibliographies to indi- 
 cate the same author as above. 
 
 262. Space evenly. A standard line should have a 3-em 
 space between all words not separated by other 
 punctuation points than commas, and after commas; 
 an en quad after semicolons, and colons followed by 
 a lower-case letter; two 3-em spaces after colons 
 followed by a capital; an em quad after periods, 
 and exclamation and interrogation points, conclud- 
 ing a sentence.
 
 no THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 263. If necessary to reduce spacing in a line, begin with 
 commas, and letters of slanting form i.e., with a 
 large "shoulder" on the side adjoining the space; if 
 necessary to increase, begin with overlapping let- 
 ters i.e., with "kerns" protruding on the side 
 adjoining the space straight-up-and-down letters, 
 and points other than periods and commas (in this 
 order). 
 
 264. In a well-spaced line, with a 3-em space between 
 a majority of the words, there should not be more 
 than an en quad between the rest; this proportion 
 should be maintained in increasing or reducing. To 
 justify a line is to adjust it, making it even or true, 
 by proper spacing. 
 
 265. Do not follow an exceptionally thin-spaced line with 
 an exceptionally wide-spaced one, or vice versa, if 
 at all avoidable. 
 
 266. Never hair-space, or em-quad, a line to avoid a 
 run-over. 
 
 267. Do not space out the last line of a paragraph that 
 allows of an indention of an em or more at the end. 
 
 268. Short words, like "a," "an," etc., should have the 
 same space on each side. 
 
 269. Use a thin space after , f, and similar signs; before 
 "f.," "ff.," and the metric symbols: 
 
 " 14. Be it further ordained . . . ."; pp. ioff.; i6cm.
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: TECHNICAL TERMS III 
 
 270. In American and English sums of money no space 
 is used between the symbols, $ and (pounds), 
 5. (shillings) and d. (pence), and the numerals: 
 $2.75; 10 35. 2d.; 10 C. 
 
 271. After Arabic and Roman numerals at the beginning 
 of lines, denoting subsections, there should be an 
 en quad. After Arabic and Roman numerals at 
 the beginning of center-heads there should be an 
 em quad. Small-cap headings should have an en 
 quad between the words; cap-and-small-cap and 
 cap headings, two 3-em spaces. 
 
 272. Scripture references should be spaced thus (use 
 9-unit colon): 
 
 II Cor. 1:16-20; 2:5 3:12. 
 
 273. a) Between letters forming products, and before 
 superior figures or letters indicating powers, and 
 inferior figures or letters, ordinarily no space should 
 be used: 
 
 n x * = 2m 2 (v 2 z 2 zvwyz -\-2W*y*). 
 
 b) In capitalized headings use aligning figures. 
 INDENTATION (PRINTER'S TERM: INDENTION) 
 
 274. In linotype composition in measures of less than 
 10 picas' width, indent all sizes i em. In measures 
 of from 10 to 20, indent u pt., i em; 10 pt., i|; 
 9 pt., i^; 8 pt., i^; 6 pt., 2. In measures of from 
 20 to 30, indent n pt., i^ ems; 10 pt., i^; 9 pt, if; 
 8 pt., 2; 6 pt., 2^. This is for plain paragraphs.
 
 H2 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 In monotype composition indentions should be 
 such that all paragraph indentions align irrespec- 
 tive of the size of the type. The following inden- 
 tions are a good standard for measures of 19 to 
 30 picas: n pt. indented i^ ems or i em 9 units; 
 10 pt. indented if ems or i em 12 units; 9 pt. 
 indented if ems or i em 15 units; 8 pt. indented 
 2 ems; 6 pt. indented 2 ems or 2 ems 9 units. 
 Narrower measures should be indented proportion- 
 ately less; wider, proportionately more. 
 In hanging indentions, in measures of less than 10 
 picas, indent all sizes i em; from 10 to 20, n pt., 
 10 pt., 9 pt., and 8 pt., i ems; 6 pt., 2 ems; from 
 20 to 30, ii pt., io-pt., 9 pt., and 8 pt, 2 ems; 
 6 pt., 3 ems. 
 
 275. In poetry center the longest line and let the inden- 
 tion be governed by that; unless the longest line 
 is of disproportionate length, in which case an 
 average of the long lines should be struck, the idea 
 being to give the whole a centered appearance. 
 Where quotations from different poems, following 
 each other in close succession, vary but slightly in 
 length of verse lines, it is better to indent all alike. 
 Indent according to rhymes and length of lines. In 
 blank verse, where the lines are approximately of 
 the same length, they should be aligned. If con- 
 secutive lines rhyme, they should likewise, as a rule, 
 be aligned. If the rhymes alternate, or follow at
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: TECHNICAL TERMS 113 
 
 certain intervals, indent the rhyming lines alike; that 
 is, if, e.g., lines i and 3, and 2 and 4, rhyme, set the 
 former flush in the measure previously determined by 
 the longest line, and indent the latter (usually one 
 em) ; follow this scheme in any similar arrangement. 
 If any line is disproportionately short that is, con- 
 tains a smaller number of feet indent it more: 
 
 And blessed are the homy hands of toil ! 
 The busy world shoves angrily aside 
 The man who stands with arms akimbo set, 
 Until occasion tells him what to do. 
 
 I laugh at the lore and the pride of man, 
 At the sophist schools and the learned clan; 
 For what are they all, in their high conceit, 
 When man in the bush with God may meet ? 
 
 So nigh is grandeur to our dust, 
 
 So near is God to man, 
 When Duty whispers low, "Thou must," 
 
 The youth replies, "I can." 
 
 Not lightly fall 
 
 Beyond recall 
 The written scrolls a breath can float; 
 
 The crowning fact, 
 
 The kingliest act 
 Of Freedom is the freeman's vote! 
 
 276. In ordinary reading-matter "plain paragraphs" 
 are always preferable. Where it is desired to bring 
 into relief the opening word or words of a paragraph, 
 or the number introducing such paragraph, or where 
 a center-head makes more than three lines, " hanging 
 indention" is often employed (see 284).
 
 H4 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 LEADS 
 
 277. A lead is a strip of metal used to separate lines of 
 type. The ordinary (standard) lead is 2 points 
 thick. Matter with leads between the lines is 
 called leaded; without, solid. 
 
 This book, for the most part, is set leaded. This paragraph, 
 for illustration, and the Index are set solid. Nearly all books 
 are leaded. 
 
 278. A slug is a strip of metal, thicker than a lead, used 
 in the make-up of printed matter into pages, to be 
 inserted after headlines, etc. The two standard 
 sizes are 6 and 12 points (a nonpareil and a pica) 
 thick, respectively. 
 
 HEADS OR HEADINGS 
 
 279. A center-head is a headline placed at equal distances 
 from both margins of the page or column. Center- 
 heads are usually set in caps or in small caps, and 
 are not followed by a period. This is a center- 
 head: 
 
 SEC. VH. THE PRINCIPLES OF SOCIOLOGY 
 
 When such center-head makes more than one line, 
 either the (inverted) "pyramid" form (for two or 
 three lines) or "hanging indention" (for more than 
 three lines) is employed : 
 
 ART EDUCATION FOR THE AMERICAN PEOPLE, AS SHOWN 
 
 AT THE LOUISIANA PURCHASE EXPOSITION, m THE 
 
 NORMAL SCHOOLS, AND IN ART SCHOOLS
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: TECHNICAL TERMS 115 
 
 ON CERTAIN IMPLICATIONS OF POSSIBLE CHANGES IN THE 
 FORM AND DIMENSIONS OF THE SUN, AND SOME 
 SUGGESTIONS TOWARD EXPLAINING CERTAIN PHE- 
 NOMENA OF VARIABLE STARS 
 
 280. A side-head is a headline placed at the side of the 
 page or column. It may either be set in a separate 
 line, in which case it is usually set flush that is, in 
 alignment with the margin of the type-page; or 
 run in that is, run together in a continuous line 
 with the paragraph to which it belongs. The latter 
 is the more common form. Side-heads are most 
 frequently set in italics, only the first word and 
 proper names being capitalized; sometimes in caps 
 and small caps or in bold face (see 172) : 
 
 Side-head 
 
 A side-head is a headline .... 
 Side-head. A side-head is .... 
 SIDE -HEAD. A side-head is .... 
 
 Side-head 
 
 A side-head is .... 
 
 281. A cut-in head is a head placed in a box cut into 
 the side of the type-page, usually set in different 
 type, and as a rule placed under the first two lines 
 of the paragraph: 
 
 In making inquiry, therefore, into the value of fraternity 
 
 life among the children, it is necessary to test it entirely in 
 
 accordance with its power to contribute to the 
 
 r u P welfare of the school as a social whole. The 
 
 school, being a social organization, has a right 
 
 to demand that every individual contribute the best that is 
 
 in him to the good of all. In making this contribution, it
 
 Ii6 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 282. A box-head is a head for a column in a ruled table 
 
 (see 250). 
 
 283. A running-head is a headline placed at the top of 
 each page of a book, etc., usually giving the main 
 title of the work on the left-hand (verso) page, and 
 the title of the chapter, or other subdivision, on 
 the right-hand (recto} page. It should be cen- 
 tered on the page regardless of page number. A 
 good working rule for running-heads is to set them 
 in roman or italic capitals two sizes (points) 
 smaller than the type of the text. 
 
 PARAGRAPHS 
 
 284. Two kinds of paragraphs are distinguished plain 
 and hanging. A plain (or regular) paragraph has 
 the first line indented, and the others set flush. A 
 hanging paragraph ("hanging indention") has the 
 first line set flush, and the others indented : 
 
 Human Nature and the Social Order. By CHARLES HORTON 
 
 COOLEY. New York: Scribner, 1902. Pp. viii+404. 
 
 In terms of his own thesis Dr. Cooley has transformed 
 
 the social materials of his times into a personal product; 
 
 his mind has reorganized and reproduced the suggested, etc. 
 
 PROOFS 
 
 285. A galley-proof is a printed impression of the type 
 contained in a long, shallow receptacle of metal, 
 known as a galley, into which the compositor, the 
 operator, or the casting-machine places the material 
 as it is set, line by line.
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: TECHNICAL TERMS 117 
 
 286. A page-proof is an impression of the type material 
 made up into page-form. 
 
 287. A plate-proof or foundry -proof is a proof taken of the 
 type-page immediately before an electrotype cast is 
 made of it. This proof has a black border around 
 the pages, made by ink from the metal frame used 
 to hold the type in place while the cast is being 
 made. Most publications nowadays are printed 
 from such plates, and not directly from the type. 
 
 288. A foul proof is a galley-proof containing author's 
 corrections. 
 
 289. A revise is a new proof of type corrected from a 
 marked proof. 
 
 MAKE-UP 
 
 290. The arranging into page-form of type-lines and 
 illustrations is called the make-up. 
 
 291. A folio is a page-number. Even numbers are placed 
 on the verso; odd, on the recto. A drop-folio is a 
 page-number placed at the bottom of a page. 
 
 292. A half-title or bastard title is the abbreviated title of 
 a book placed on a separate page preceding the full 
 title-page, or the title of a part, chapter, etc., preced- 
 ing such part or chapter on a separate page in the 
 body of the book.
 
 n8 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 TYPESETTING MACHINES 
 
 293. The monotype named Lanston after the patentee 
 is a composing-machine on which, by touching a key- 
 board, perforations are made in strips of paper, which 
 then are transferred to a second machine, where the 
 matrices to which the perforations correspond are 
 brought in contact with molten type metal, the 
 characters being cast separately and arranged auto- 
 matically on a galley in justified lines (see 259). 
 
 294. The linotype named Mergenthaler after its in- 
 ventor is a composing-machine on which, by 
 touching a keyboard, the matrices from which the 
 characters are cast arrange themselves automati- 
 cally in lines in a receptacle, which then is brought 
 in contact, on the same machine, with molten type 
 metal, through a mechanical device which liberates 
 and arranges in order on a galley the stereotyped 
 strips, called "slugs," each consisting of a line of 
 type (see 260).
 
 APPENDIX
 
 HINTS TO AUTHORS AND EDITORS 
 PREPARATION OF MANUSCRIPTS 
 
 Manuscripts should be either typewritten or in a 
 perfectly clear handwriting. The former is preferable. 
 
 The sheets should be of uniform size; 9"Xn" is a 
 desirable size. 
 
 Only one side of the paper should be used. 
 
 Never roll manuscripts; place them flat in a box or 
 an envelope. 
 
 The sheets should not be fastened together except by 
 pins or clips, which can easily be removed. 
 
 When one piece of a page is to be fastened to another, 
 use mucilage, not pins. Pins often become unfastened 
 and the slips lost or misplaced. 
 
 Liberal margins should be left at the top and left- 
 hand side of the sheets. This space will be needed by 
 the reader or printer for directions. 
 
 The pages should be numbered consecutively. 
 Inserted and omitted pages should be clearly indicated. 
 Thus, sheets to be inserted after p. 4 should be marked 
 "4A," "46," etc.; sheets omitted between p. 4 and p. 8 
 should be indicated by numbering p. 4, "4-7." 
 
 Additions to original pages should be placed after the 
 sheets to which they belong, and should be marked 
 "Insert A," "Insert B," etc. The places where they are
 
 122 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 to be inserted should be indicated by writing, "Here 
 insert A," etc., on the margin of the original pages. 
 
 PARAGRAPHS 
 
 Paragraphs should be plainly indicated, either by 
 indenting the first line or by a ^f mark. 
 
 FOOTNOTES 
 
 Footnotes should be clearly designated, either by 
 separating them from the text by running a line across 
 the page, or by using ink of different color. Some writers 
 make a perpendicular fold in the paper, using two- 
 thirds of the space for the text and one-third for the 
 notes. 
 
 The word in the text carrying the note should be followed 
 by a superior figure corresponding to that preceding the 
 note. 
 
 Footnotes should never be run into the text in manu- 
 scripts, whether in parentheses or otherwise. 
 
 NOTE. It is important to remember that in matter set on the 
 linotype machine the slightest change necessitates the resetting of the 
 whole line. Since it is impossible to foresee how the notes will happen 
 to come out in the make-up, it is impracticable to number them from i 
 up on each page. The best way is to number them consecutively through- 
 out an article or by chapters in a book ; bearing in mind, however, the 
 very essential point that the change, by omission or addition, of one single 
 number involves the resetting of the whole first line of each succeeding note 
 to the end of the series, as well as the line in the text bearing the reference 
 to the note. 
 
 This difficulty is not met with in matter set on the monotype machine 
 or by hand, where the change of a number amounts simply to substituting 
 one figure for another.
 
 HINTS TO AUTHORS AND EDITORS 123 
 
 PROPER NAMES, ETC. 
 
 Proper names, foreign words, and figures should, in 
 handwritten manuscript, be written with the utmost care 
 and distinctness. 
 
 TITLE-PAGES, ETC. 
 
 Copy for title-pages, prefaces, tables of contents, etc., 
 should be submitted with the manuscript. Copy for 
 indexes should be compiled from the special set of page- 
 proofs furnished for this purpose and promptly delivered 
 to the printers. Unnecessary delay is often caused by 
 postponing these details till the last minute. 
 
 READING OF PROOFS 
 
 Read and return your proofs promptly. 
 
 In marking proof-sheets use the standard proofreaders' 
 marks (see p. 133). Do not adopt a system of your own, 
 which, however plain it may seem to you, might appear 
 less so to the compositor. 
 
 Be careful to answer all queries in the proofs. Delays 
 and errors often result from not attending to them. 
 
 Remember that changes in the type cost money. The 
 omission or addition of a word in the middle of a para- 
 graph may necessitate resetting the whole of this from 
 that point on; and if such alteration is made in the page- 
 proof, it may further involve repaging the entire article 
 or chapter. Make your manuscript as perfect as possible 
 before delivering it to the printer. Any necessary altera- 
 tions should be made in the galley-proof, as each succeeding
 
 124 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 stage will add to the cost. Corrections in plates should 
 be studiously avoided. Not only are they expensive, but 
 they are likely to injure the plates. 
 
 The original manuscript should in each instance be 
 returned with the galley-proof, in order that the proof- 
 reader may refer to it, should any question arise; and 
 each successive set of proofs returned should be accom- 
 panied by the previous marked set. This will assist in 
 calculating the cost of alterations properly chargeable 
 to you.
 
 HINTS TO PROOFREADERS 125 
 
 HINTS TO PROOFREADERS 
 
 Read everything as if you yourself were the author. 
 
 Be particularly careful about proper names and figures 
 and verify all dates. If the copy is not perfectly clear, 
 or if you have reason to doubt its correctness, look it up, 
 or query it to the author. 
 
 In asking questions of authors or editors make your 
 point clear. A simple query is not enough to draw 
 attention to the particular point you have in mind. 
 Queries in the manuscript should be transferred to the 
 proof, or attention should be directed in the proof to the 
 queries made by the copy-reader in the manuscript. 
 
 Be discreet about your queries. Do not stultify your- 
 self and discredit the office by asking foolish questions 
 on the proof. The author will be thankful for any 
 sensible suggestion you may make, but will resent trivial 
 criticisms. 
 
 Make a study of the "personal equation" in the case 
 of those individuals (editors and others) with whom you 
 as a proofreader will constantly have to deal. One person 
 may expect of you as a matter of course what another 
 might regard as an unwarranted interference. 
 
 Never hesitate to correct anything that is palpably 
 wrong, however positively the copy may assert the con 
 trary. Remember that the blame for the error will 
 eventually be laid at your door, and justly so.
 
 126 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 Do not follow copy blindly, unreasoningly. Follow 
 copy only when, and as far as, it is correct. 
 
 Do not ask authors or editors to decide questions of 
 style. The Manual of Style is primarily meant for you. 
 Learn its rules so that you may correct any violation of 
 them you may find, without querying to the author. 
 
 Do not fall into the fallacy that the author's or editor's 
 O.K. relieves you of all or any part of your responsibility. 
 Authors and editors depend on the proofreader to see to 
 it that the typographical requirements have been met, 
 and that the adopted style has been adhered to, and 
 affix their signatures only on that supposition. 
 
 Do not shield yourself behind your copyholder. The 
 copyholder is there to assist you, not to tell you how to 
 do things. If you think you have cause to doubt her 
 version of a matter, investigate for yourself. 
 
 Do not suggest to the copyholder the reading of a word 
 or phrase which she has difficulty in making out from the 
 manuscript. If she cannot decipher the manuscript, 
 remember that you are the arbiter, and not the compositor. 
 
 Do not read to the copyholder except in special cases 
 in order to rest her after long, close work, and then pro- 
 ceed slowly and very distinctly. The copyholder's eye 
 and ear are not yet trained to follow copy with insertions 
 and special editing as fast as you can read printed matter. 
 
 Do not permit yourself to be stampeded. Cultivate 
 speed, but remember that accuracy is even more impor- 
 tant. If the necessary time is not given you, take it 
 within reasonable limits in order to do things right.
 
 HINTS TO PROOFREADERS 127 
 
 The credit accruing to you from doing things absolutely 
 right is likely to outlast the displeasure at your lack of 
 dispatch. 
 
 In unavoidable cases of "rush," where conditions and 
 orders are imperative, protect yourself by letting it be 
 understood that you have done your best in the time 
 allotted you, but that you must disclaim any further 
 responsibility. 
 
 After completing the reading, sign all galley-proofs 
 and page-proofs in the upper right-hand corner with 
 your own initial above that of the copyholder and re- 
 viser. In case copyholding and revising are done by two 
 different people the copyholder's initial should follow the 
 reader's in smaller size above a line and the reviser's 
 initial appear below. This will save time in tracing 
 proofs and insure the giving of credit where it belongs. 
 
 The number of proofs wanted should be marked on 
 first readings before they are sent to the corrector. Look 
 for any additional instructions on the job ticket or the 
 composition ticket and on the copy or author's proofs. 
 
 All proofs ready to be corrected are to be returned to 
 the desk. When galley-proofs are ready to go out to the 
 author, the copyholder should give the copy to the file 
 clerk in perfect order, with proofs neatly arranged in the 
 required number of sets, pinned together at the top. 
 
 When you are reading page-proofs, the pages are to be 
 revised by checking with author's alterations first. Next 
 make copy for contents (unless the journal editor is in the 
 habit of furnishing it) and return to be set. so that cover
 
 128 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 and contents may be ready to go out with the page- 
 proofs. 
 
 When you are reading galley-proof, the first thing to 
 be read is the guide-line with size of type, width of 
 measure, job number, and galley number. 
 
 Mark the author's name and composition number at 
 the beginning of each article, so that the compositor will 
 be able to charge alterations correctly. Keep the last 
 journal or sample beside you when reading the pages and 
 verify style in every case if you are not perfectly sure 
 of it. As fast as an article or a chapter is read, return 
 it to the desk so that corrections may be made in time to 
 be ready to go out as soon after you have finished the 
 whole as possible. 
 
 Read the running-heads and folios of each article or 
 chapter as a separate operation after you have finished 
 reading pages. Sign make-up record, as on pages, in the 
 upper right-hand corner; enter date and hour of sending 
 out proof in the lower right-hand corner of page-slip. 
 Record number of pages and plates in each article or 
 chapter and total number of pages in the finished product, 
 including preliminaries. Be careful to see that the fin- 
 ished book or journal will contain even forms of 16, 12, 
 or 8 pages; if it does not, the question should be raised. 
 Number and indicate all half-titles, blank pages, inserts, 
 etc., and carry all necessary queries on every set of 
 proofs. 
 
 When pages are ready to go out, place them neatly 
 in sets, pinned together at the top, and return them to
 
 HINTS TO PROOFREADERS 129 
 
 the file clerk with all galley-proofs, and additional copy, 
 if any, in order of make-up, and neatly pinned together. 
 See that material is complete from cover to cover, includ- 
 ing volume title and contents when such pages are due. 
 Return all second proofs to file clerk's desk to file and 
 leave page-slip on the hook, completed and dated.
 
 130 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 HINTS TO COPYHOLDERS 
 
 Cultivate a low, soft, clear reading voice. Only your 
 own proofreader has to hear you. 
 
 Remember that, from the proofreader's point of view, 
 the small words are as essential as the big ones. Get 
 them all in and get them in right. 
 
 Enunciate your plural s's distinctly. Try to perfect 
 your enunciation so that you can read an entire galley 
 without error. 
 
 Regulate and equalize your speed. Do not race at a 
 breakneck pace through typewritten copy, while you thread 
 your path fumblingly through the mazes of manuscript. 
 
 Do not keep guessing at a word. Look at it closely, 
 consider the context, and do not speak it until you have 
 made it out or at least made the very best guess of which 
 you are capable. 
 
 Give your reader a chance to make his corrections. 
 Slow up the moment he puts his pencil to the paper. This 
 will save your going over the same ground twice. Repeat 
 cheerfully if the proofreader has not understood. 
 
 Evolve your own system of signals. Do not, for 
 instance, waste time by saying "in italics" for every word 
 or letter so treated. Instead, raise your voice, or tap 
 the table with your pencil once for each word, or both. 
 Such a code need not be intelligible to others than your- 
 self and your reader.
 
 HINTS TO COPYHOLDERS 131 
 
 Read to your proofreader every instruction, editorial 
 mark, and stet-mark carefully. Learn the job number 
 and read it for every galley. 
 
 Consult the job ticket for the number of proofs wanted 
 and the name and address of the person to whom they 
 are to be sent, before having proofs corrected, so that the 
 number wanted may be marked for the printer. 
 
 Be careful in transferring marks. A mark in the wrong 
 place means two errors uncorrected in place of one cor- 
 rected. Each set of proofs must carry every mark. 
 
 In sending out proofs see that everything is there. 
 Arrange the copy and proof-sheets neatly and consecu- 
 tively. 
 
 Copy all queries and make-up instructions on the 
 galley-proof and indicate the insertion of tables, figures, 
 charts, etc., where they are first mentioned. 
 
 The manuscript should accompany the galley-proof; 
 the foul proof (author's marked galley-proof) should 
 accompany the page-proof. In case no galley-proof has 
 been sent the manuscript should accompany the page- 
 proof. 
 
 Indicate in the lower left-hand corner the contents of 
 all the envelopes you address. 
 
 Fasten your pins in the center at the top, not diago- 
 nally in the left-hand corner, thus covering up the direc- 
 tions, etc., often written there. 
 
 Return every evening to the file or the bookcase any 
 volume that may have been taken out for reference dur- 
 ing the day; return all proofs ready for filing at least
 
 132 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 once a day, so that files may be always as complete as 
 possible. 
 
 Remember that you are the housekeeper of the proof- 
 room, and take pride in its neat and orderly appearance. 
 Perfect your system so that everything can be located 
 at a moment's notice. The more of that kind of work 
 you do without being asked, and the better you do it, 
 the more you will be appreciated.
 
 PROOFREADER'S MARKS 
 
 d> Dele, or delete: take# out. 
 
 9 Letter reversed turn. 
 
 # Put insjrace. 
 
 C 
 
 CJo^e up no space. 
 
 VA Bad v spacing^space v lnore /s evenly. 
 
 ***\ Wrojtfg font: character of wrong size or 
 
 style. 
 ** Transp@e. 
 
 ^ake a new paragraph. 
 D ^ndent; or, put in an em-quad space. 
 C C Carry to the left. 
 
 3 Cjirry to the right. 
 
 X Ipiperfect type correct. 
 
 vb Space showsloetween words push down. 
 
 *S Straighte 11 crooked line. 
 
 HStraighten aligTjJnent. 
 Restore orjetain, words crossed out. 
 Print (5!e*, rT, etc.) as a ligature. 
 Words are omitted from, or in^opy. 
 Query to author: Is this correct? 
 Put in capitals. 
 
 *** Put in^SMALL CAPITAfcfr. 
 
 $** Put in LOWER CASE. 
 
 ****** Put in -fwwdf* type. 
 
 Put in 44alie type. 
 Put in bold face type. 
 
 <w>^\ * 
 
 133
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 137 
 
 MODERN 
 
 FIVE POINT NO. SIXTY-SEVEN 
 
 [Solid] 
 
 the fall of Carthage and of Corinth, tkey must have 
 
 [Leaded] 
 
 with his small army, against the adult Rome of the third century, fresh from her Samnite conquests, 
 show what would have been the successes of Alexander, with his giant genius and armaments, against 
 the younger and feebler republic. And if the realization of the conqueror's dreams was hindered by 
 his early death, most of the early Diadochi had each for many hard-fought years aspired to be his sola 
 successor, hoping to complete his work and regenerate the distracted world by the potent influence of 
 Hellenistic culture. 
 
 A world-empire, including all the lands and nations about the Mediterranean Sea, reaching to 
 THE FROZEN NORTH AND THE TORRID SOUTH AS ITS NATURAL LIMITS, EXCHANGING THR 
 VIKHIX ORES or SPAIN FOB THE LONG-SOUGHT SPICES OF ABABT THE BLEST, WAS THEBEFORE 1234567890 
 But while those that had conceived it and striven for it consciously had 1234567830 
 
 FIVE POINT NO. FIVE HUNDRED AND TWENTY-SEVEN 
 [Solid] 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and of Corinth, 
 they must have felt that they had reached one of the great turning-points in the world's 
 history. There was no longer any doubt that all the civilized nations hitherto at vari- 
 ance, or at war, distracted by reason of contrasts in population, in government, in 
 language, in traditions, would now be directed by the will of one people, by the 
 influence of one system of law, by the predominance of a common language. 
 
 It was not the first time that this grand prospect had been held forth to the 
 world. When Alexander was yet a young man, returning from his conquests in the 
 Far East, men must have anticipated, as very near, an empire not unlike that of 
 Rome; for the conquest of the West would have been no difficult matter to Alexander, 
 
 [Leaded] 
 
 with all the resources of Asia under his hand. The successes of Pyrrhus, with his 
 small army against the adult Rome of the third century, fresh from her Samnite con- 
 quests, show what would have been the successes of Alexander, with his giant genius 
 and armaments, against the younger and feebler republic. And if the realization of 
 the conqueror's dreams was hindered by his early death, most of the early Diadochi 
 had each for many hard-fought years aspired to be his sole successor, hoping to com- 
 plete his work and regenerate the distracted world by the potent influence of 
 Hellenistic culture. 
 
 A world-empire, including all the lands and nations about the Mediterranean 
 Sea, reaching to the frozen North and the torrid South as its natural limits, 
 exchanging the virgin ores of Spain for the long-sought spices of Araby the Blest, was 
 THEREFORE NO VERY WILD IMAGINATION. BUT WHILE THOSE THAT 
 
 HAD CONCEIVED IT AND 8TEIVEN FOB IT CONSCIOUSLY HAD FAILED 1234567890 
 
 who could have imagined that it should drop almost suddenly, unexpect 12S4SS7890 
 O,Oaa&ee6oup
 
 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 MODERN 
 
 SIX POINT MODERN NO. ONE 
 
 [Solid] 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and of Corinth, they must 
 have felt that they had reached one of the great turning-points in the world's history. There 
 was no longer any doubt that all the civilized nations hitherto at variance, or at war, dis- 
 tracted by reason of contrasts in population, in government, in language, in traditions, 
 would now be directed by th will of one people, by the influence of one system of law, by 
 the predominance of a common language. 
 
 It was not the first time that this grand prospect had been held forth to the world. 
 When Alexander was yet a young man, returning from his conquests in the Far East, men 
 must have anticipated, as very near, an empire not unlike that of Rome; for the conquest of 
 
 [Leaded] 
 
 the West would have been no difficult matter to Alexander, with all the resources of Asia 
 under his hand. The successes of Pyrrhus, with his small army, against the adult Rome 
 OF THE THIRD CENTURY, FRESH FROM HER SAMNITE CONQUESTS, SHOW 
 
 WHAT WOULD HAVE BEEN THE SUCCESSES OF ALEXANDER, WITH HIS GIANT GENIUS AND 
 
 armaments, against the younger and feebler republic. And if the realization of the conqueror t 
 
 (no figures with this italic) a at seceJIXE aou $*ttHH>' 
 
 12345673 {>0 1234567890$ +x- = 
 ;_^ ~,_~-^ Six set braces to match this feet. 
 
 SIX POINT NO. FIFTY-SEVEN 
 
 [Solid] 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and of 
 Corinth, they must have felt that they had reached one of the great turning- 
 points in the world's history. There was no longer any doubt that all the 
 civilized nations hitherto at variance, or at war, distracted by reason of con- 
 trasts in population, ia government, in language, in traditions, would now bo 
 directed by the will of one people, by the influence of one system of law, by 
 the predominance of a common language. 
 
 It was not the first time that this grand prospect had been held forth to 
 the world. When Alexander was yet a young man, returning from his con- 
 quests in the Far East, men must have anticipated, as very near, an empire 
 
 [Leaded] 
 
 not unlike that of Rome ; for the conquest of the West would have been no 
 difficult matter to Alexander, with all the resources of Asia under his hand. 
 The successes of Pyrrhus, with his small army, against the adult Rome of the 
 third century, fresh from her Samnite conquests, show what would have been 
 the successes of Alexander, with his giant genius and armaments, against the 
 younger and feebler republic. And if the realization of the conqueror's dreams 
 WAS HINDERED BY HIS EARLY DEATH, MOST OF THE EARLY 
 
 DlADOCHI HAD EACH FOB MANY HARD-FOUGHT YEARS 1234567890 
 
 aspired to be his sole successor, hoping to complete his work 1234567890 
 
 AEIOO Afif6tf AElotr AEioCr Afilott Afilotr AgS HH$SST 
 
 iEIOu Afil 6tf AElot AEloC AEIOC AE16C AgnS aeiou a616u ae!6n afiiOu aflloua61&a 
 AEIOO AM6V ASlbtr At6& AWV AMOV f^ffM Thhs&tt 
 Qeiou deiou beibii Q,eWQ. OSlott deiou d c ft B 8 P p <>. $ J 3 ft cdhh kfi s S t'u'?
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 139 
 
 MODERN 
 
 SEVEN POINT NO. FIFTY-SEVEN 
 
 [Solid] 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and 
 of Corinth, they must have felt that they had reached one of the great 
 turning-points in the world's history. There was no longer any doubt 
 that all the civilized nations hitherto at variance, or at war, distracted by 
 reason of contrasts in population, in government, in language, in tradi- 
 tions, would now be directed by the will of one people, by the influence 
 of one system of law, by the predominance of a common language. 
 
 It was not the first time that this grand prospect had been held forth 
 to the world. When Alexander was yet a young man, returning from hia 
 conquests in the Far East, men must have anticipated, as very near, an 
 empire not unlike that of Rome; for the conquest of the West would 
 have been no difficult matter to Alexander, with all the resources of Asia 
 under his hand. The successes of Pyrrhus, with his small army, against 
 the adult Rome of the third century, fresh from her Samnite conquests, 
 show what would have been the successes of Alexander, with his giant 
 genius and armaments, against the younger and feebler republic. And 
 if the realization of the conqueror's dreams was hindered by his early 
 
 [Leaded] 
 
 death, most of the early Diadochi had each for many hard-fought years 
 aspired to be his sole successor, hoping to complete his work and regen- 
 erate the distracted world by the potent influence of Hellenistic culture. 
 
 A world-empire, including all the lands and nations about the Medi- 
 terranean Sea, reaching to the frozen North and the torrid South as its 
 natural limits, exchanging the virgin ores of Spain for the long-sought 
 spices of Araby the Blest, was therefore no very wild imagination. But 
 while those that had conceived it and striven for it consciously had failed, 
 who could have imagined that it should drop almost suddenly, unexpect- 
 edly, by the force, not of genius, but of circumstances, into the hands of 
 a people who attained it, not by the direction of an Alexander, but by 
 such national qualities as had gained for Sparta precedence and respect, 
 coupled with aggressive wars under the guise of securing ever-widening 
 frontiers, such as those which mark the rapid strides of Philip's Mace- 
 donia? 
 
 Any political thinker who witnessed this mighty outcome of half a 
 CENTURY MIGHT INDEED FEEL UNEASY AT THE RESULT, 
 
 IP HE WERE NOT, LIKE MOST OF THE STOICS, AN OPTIMIST 1234567890 
 
 or a fatalist. There was, no doubt, the manifest gain 1234567890 
 f&itrfS AfilOtf 64166 fteiofl A&16V A&16V &&U>ti, &&.&H AC 
 AElOtT lElOtJ aelbu aelou A&ldtf AEIOU atldti, deiou &c& 
 AElOft AfilOtJ aeloa SSI&a A310& AE10V aei&ti deiou dffl
 
 140 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 MODERN 
 
 EIGHT POINT NO. FIFTY-SEVEN 
 
 [Solid] 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Car- 
 thage and of Corinth, they must have felt that they had reached 
 one of the great turning-points in the world's history. There was 
 no longer any doubt that all the civilized nations hitherto at vari- 
 ance, or at war, distracted by reason of contrasts in population, in 
 government, in language, in traditions, would now be directed by 
 the will of one people, by the influence of one system of law, by 
 the predominance of a common language. 
 
 It was not the first time that this grand prospect had been 
 held forth to the world. When Alexander was yet a young man, 
 returning from his conquests in the Far East, men must have 
 anticipated, as very near, an empire not unlike that of Rome; for 
 the conquest of the West would have been no difficult matter to 
 Alexander, with all the resources of Asia under his hand. The 
 successes of Pyrrhus, with his small army, against the adult Rome 
 
 [Leaded] 
 
 of the third century, fresh from her Samnite conquests, show what 
 would have been the successes of Alexander, with his giant genius 
 and armaments, against the younger and feebler republic. And 
 if the realization of the conqueror's dreams was hindered by his 
 early death, most of the early Diadochi had each for many hard- 
 fought years aspired to be his sole successor, hoping to complete 
 his work and regenerate the distracted world by the potent influ- 
 ence of Hellenistic culture. 
 
 A world-empire, including all the lands and nations about the 
 Mediterranean Sea, reaching to the frozen North and the torrid 
 South as its natural limits, exchanging the virgin ores of Spain 
 for the long-sought spices of Araby the Blest, was therefore no 
 very wild imagination. But while those that had conceived it 
 and striven for it consciously had failed, who could have imagined 
 THAT IT SHOULD DROP ALMOST SUDDENLY, UNEX- 
 PECTEDLY, BY THE FORCE, NOT OF GENIUS, BUT OF 1234567890 
 
 circumstances, into the hands of a people who 1234567890 
 
 AEIOU AFJ6tf AEl6tr 116 A0uj3 AgNce^o^p 
 
 AEU AEf66 AEioir AEOC AEIOU Aiou 80 aeiou e"iou aeibu a6i6u 
 aelou &c.eno aelou deidu aeldii dSlon deidtt acn
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 141 
 
 MODERN 
 
 NINE POINT NO. FIFTY-SEVEN 
 
 [Solid] 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of 
 Carthage and of Corinth, they must have felt that they had 
 reached one of the great turning-points in the world's history. 
 There was no longer any doubt that all the civilized nations 
 hitherto at variance, or at war, distracted by reason of con- 
 trasts in population, in government, in language, in traditions, 
 would now be directed by the will of one people, by the influ- 
 ence of one system of law, by the predominance of a common 
 language. 
 
 It was not the first time that this grand prospect had been 
 held forth to the world. When Alexander was yet a young 
 man, returning from his conquests in the Far East, men must 
 have anticipated, as very near, an empire not unlike that of 
 
 [Leaded] 
 
 Rome; for the conquest of the West would have been no diffi- 
 cult matter to Alexander, with all the resources of Asia under 
 his hand. The successes of Pyrrhus, with his small army, 
 against the adult Rome of the third century, fresh from her 
 Samnite conquests, show what would have been the successes 
 of Alexander, with his giant genius and armaments, against 
 the younger and feebler republic. And if the realization of 
 the conqueror's dreams was hindered by his early death, most 
 OF THE EARLY DIADOCHI HAD EACH FOR MANY 
 
 HARD-FOUGHT YEARS ASPIRED TO BE HIS SOLE 1234567890 
 
 successor, hoping to complete his work 1234567890 
 AEIOU AEI6U AElot AE16U AElOU AMOu AgN 
 
 AElOU AEfOD AEl6e AEI60 AEloC AEIOtJ ACHHKffT 
 
 aeiou a<f6u aei6u aeiou aeiou aeiou achhknt 
 AEIOU AEf6u AEldU AEfdC AEIOU AEIOU If 8 
 
 aeiou d6i6u aelbii aeiou aeWil aeiou acn 
 CHH|KSSSTZZaaccdgiino6Q^s8suuuuyyzz 
 H ff S T ' a e 'e h fr i i f s s t'u z D 8 d 1>\>p 033
 
 142 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 MODERN 
 
 ELEVEN POINT NO. SIXTY-FIVE 
 
 [Solid] 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall 
 of Carthage and of Corinth, they must have felt that 
 they had reached one of the great turning-points in the 
 world's history. There was no longer any doubt that all 
 the civilized nations hitherto at variance, or at war, dis- 
 tracted by reason of contrasts in population, in govern- 
 ment, in language, in traditions, would now be directed 
 
 [Leaded] 
 
 by the will of one people, by the influence of one sys- 
 tem of law, by the predominance of a common language. 
 It was not the first time that this grand prospect had 
 been held forth to the world. When Alexander was yet 
 a young man, returning from his conquests in the Far 
 East, men must have anticipated, as very near, an empire 
 NOT UNLIKE THAT OF ROME; FOR THE CON- 
 
 QUEST OF THE WEST WOULD HAVE BEEN 1234567890 
 
 no difficult matter to Alexander, with 1234567890 
 
 AEIOU Atil6tJ AM6U ifilOO AElOtf lEIOtJ 
 
 AEIOU AEiou XMou AEIOU AEiiOO AEIOU AQHHKNSST 
 aeiou 6e"16ti ae!6u &ei6u aeioti a6I6u achbknsst 
 
 AEIOU AfilOV Afilbtr A&16V ABIOUAEIOV 
 
 delou d6i6ti deidu diQti d&'ioii deiou a Q n 
 
 hhistu ? 
 
 D8 Dp 00 553* dp
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 143 
 
 OLD STYLE 
 
 FIVE POINT NO. EIGHT 
 
 [Solid] 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and of Corinth, they must have fell 
 that they had reached one of the great turning-points in the world's history. There was no longer anj 
 doubt that all the civilized nations hitherto at variance, or at war, distracted by reason of contrasts in 
 population, in government, in language, in traditions, would now be directed by the will of one people, 
 by the influence of one system of law, by the predominance of a common language. 
 
 It was not the first time that this grand prospect had been held forth to the world. When Alex- 
 ander was yet a young man, returning from his conquests in the Far Fast, men must have anticipated, 
 as very near, an empire not unlike that of Rome ; for the conquest of the West would have been no dif- 
 ficult matter to Alexander, with all the resources of Asia under his hand. The successes of Pyrrhus, 
 
 [Leaded] 
 
 with his small army, against the adult Rome of the third century, fresh from her Samnite conquests, 
 show what would have been the successes of Alexander, with his giant genius and armaments, againsl 
 the younger and feebler republic. And if the realizations of the conqueror's dreams was hindered by 
 his early death, most of the early Diadochi had each for many hard-fought years aspired to be his sole 
 successor, hoping to complete his work and regenerate the distracted world by the potent influence oi 
 Hellenistic culture. 
 
 A world-empire, including all the lands and nations about the Mediterranean Sea, reaching to the 
 frozen North and the torrid South as its natural limits, exchanging the virgin ores of Spain for the 
 LONG-SOUGHT SPICES OF ARABY THE BLEST, WAS THEREFORE NO VERY WILD 
 IMAGINATION. BUT WHILE THOSE WHO HAD CONCEIVED IT AND STRIVEN FOR 1234567890 
 it consciously had failed, who could have imagined that it should drop almost sudden! fjjjjfyigo 
 
 TWELVE POINT NO. EIGHT 
 [SMd] 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw 
 the fall of Carthage and of Corinth, they must 
 have felt that they had reached one of the great 
 turning-points in the world's history. There 
 was no longer any doubt that all the civilized 
 NATIONS HITHERTO AT VARIANCE, 
 
 [Leaded] 
 OR AT WAR, DISTRACTED BY REASON 1234567890 
 
 of contrasts in population, in govern 123456'] 890 
 
 AEioti Ai60 6 A g S 
 
 AEIOU AEl6tr Etr E ACN ae'iou aelou aeu af6u acn 
 A FT fill Aftffity APtl C ft 
 
 ytiy_;yLxty siJ-^j.\j{j JTLJ^U ./- y. ^v 
 
 aeiou d&iou aeu dtidti en
 
 144 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 OLD STYLE 
 
 FODBTEEN POINT NO. EIGHT 
 
 [Solid] 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius 
 saw the fall of Carthage and of Corinth, 
 they must have felt that they had reached 
 one of the great turning-points in the 
 world's history. There was no longer any 
 doubt that all the civilized nations hitherto 
 at variance, or at war, distracted by reason 
 of contrasts in population, in government, 
 in language, in traditions, would now be 
 
 [Leaded] 
 
 directed by the will of one people, by the 
 influence of one system of law, by the pre- 
 dominance of a common language. 
 
 It was not the first time that this grand 
 prospect had been held forth to the world. 
 WHEN ALEXANDER WAS YET A 
 
 YOUNG MAN RETURN- I 234567890 
 
 ing from his conquests 1234567890 
 AEIOU AfelOU A6U 6 A N 
 
 AEiOu Aiou AEU A c, N 
 aeioii aei6u aeu aefdii aon age 
 
 . . A \. 
 
 O O A u dod aeu e~u a n
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 145 
 
 OLD STYLE 
 
 EIGHTEEN POINT NO. EIGHT 
 [Solid] 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Poly- 
 bius saw the fall of Carthage and of 
 Corinth, they must have felt that they 
 had reached one of the great turning- 
 points in the world's history. There 
 was no longer any doubt that all the 
 
 [Leaded] 
 
 civilized nations hitherto at variance, 
 or at war, distracted by reason of con- 
 trasts in population, in government, 
 in language, in traditions, would now 
 be directed by the will of one people, 
 by the influence of one system of law. 
 IT WAS NOT THE FIRST 
 
 TIME THAT THIS 1234567890 
 
 grand prospect 1234.567890 
 AEOC A6C feO A ff
 
 146 
 
 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 MONOTYPE 
 
 SIX POINT NO. THIRTY-ONE 
 
 [Solid] 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and of Corinth, 
 they must have felt that they had reached one of the turning-points in the world's his- 
 tory. There was no longer any doubt that all the civilized nations hitherto at variance, 
 or at war, distracted by reason of contrasts in population, in government, in language, 
 in traditions, would now be directed by the will of one people, by the influence of one 
 system of law, by the predominance of a common language. 
 
 It was not the first time that this grand prospect had been held forth to the world. 
 When Alexander was yet a young man, returning from his conquests in the Far East, 
 men must have anticipated, as very near, an empire not unlike that of Rome; for the 
 conquest of the West would have been no difficult matter to Alexander, with all the 
 resources of Asia under his hand. The successes of Pyrrhus, with his small army , against 
 the adult Rome of the third century, fresh from her Samnite conquests, show what would 
 have been the successes of Alexander, with his giant genius and armaments, against the 
 younger and feebler republic. And if the realization of the conqueror's dreams was 
 hindered by his early death, most of the early Diadochi had each for many hard-fought 
 years aspired to be his sole successor, hoping to complete his work and regenerate the 
 distracted world by the potent influence of Hellenistic culture. 
 
 [Leaded] 
 
 A world-empire, including all the lands and nations about the Mediterranean 
 Sea, reaching to the frozen North and the torrid South as its natural limits, exchanging 
 the virgin ores of Spain for the long-sought spices of Araby the Blest, was therefore no very 
 wild imagination. But while those that had conceived it and striven for it consciously 
 had failed, who could have imagined that it should drop almost suddenly, unexpectedly, 
 by the force, not of genius, but of circumstances, into the hands of a people who attained 
 it, not by the direction of an Alexander, but by such national qualities as had gained 
 for Sparta precedence and respect, coupled with aggressive wars under the guise of secur- 
 ing ever-widening frontiers, such as those which mark the rapid strides of Philip's Mace- 
 donia? 
 
 Any political thinker who witnessed this mighty outcome of half a century might 
 indeed feel uneasy at the result, if he were not, like most of the Stoics, an optimist or 
 a fatalist. There was, no doubt, the manifest gain of a great peace throughout the 
 world, of the real settlement of disputes by the arbitration of an umpire with power to 
 enforce his will; there was the consequent development of wide commerce with its 
 diffusion, not only of wealth, but of enlightenment. These material gains were indis- 
 putable, even though a dangerous monopoly was being established, not merely through 
 the enormous advantages inseparable from Roman influence, but by the jealous de- 
 struction of all those commercial centers which might have rivaled Rome by reason 
 of favored situation or old traditions of trade. 
 
 But far more serious was the patent fact, that neither the Roman people nor their 
 HENCE IT RESULTED THAT THE COMMON PEOPLE DEGENERATED 
 
 RAPIDLY INTO A VULGAR MOB, PURSUING SOLELY ITS MATERIAL I 234567890 
 
 pleasures, and the dominant classes, when vast opportunities of wealth 1234567890 
 XE!OU A16u Afctou AEf6u AEIOU X6I60 C. N f 
 aeioU aeldu ael&u aeiou aeiou aeiou c ft c N 
 aeioU diioa deidu dttou deidu MM f n
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 147 
 
 MONOTYPE 
 
 SEVEN POINT NO. THIRTY-ONE 
 
 [Solid] 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and of 
 Corinth, they must have felt that they had reached one of the turning-points 
 in the world's history. There was no longer any doubt that all the civilized 
 nations hitherto at variance, or at war, distracted by reason of contrasts in 
 population, in government, in language, in traditions, would now be directed 
 by the will of one people, by the influence of one system of law, by the pre- 
 dominance of a common language. 
 
 It was not the first time that this grand prospect had been held forth to 
 the world. When Alexander was yet a young man, returning from his con- 
 quests in the Far East, men must have anticipated, as very near, an empire 
 not unlike that of Rome; for the conquest of the West would have been no 
 difficult matter to Alexander, with all the resources of Asia under his hand. 
 The successes of Pyrrhus, with his small army, against the adult Rome of the 
 third century, fresh from her Samnite conquests, show what would have been 
 the successes of Alexander, with his giant genius and armaments, against the 
 younger and feebler republic. And if the realization of the conqueror's dreams 
 was hindered by his early death, most of the early Diadochi had each for many 
 
 [Leaded] 
 
 hard-fought years aspired to be his sole successor, hoping to complete his work 
 and regenerate the distracted world by the potent influence of Hellenistic 
 culture. 
 
 A world-empire, including all the lands and nations about the Mediter- 
 ranean Sea, reaching to the frozen North and the torrid South as its natural 
 limits, exchanging the virgin ores of Spain for the long-sought spices of Araby 
 the Blest, was therefore no very wild imagination. But while those that had con- 
 ceived it and striven for it consciously had failed, who could have imagined 
 that it should drop almost suddenly, unexpectedly, by the force, not of genius, 
 but of circumstances, into the hands of a people who attained it, not by the 
 direction of an Alexander, but by such national qualities as had gained for 
 Sparta precedence and respect, coupled with aggressive wars under the guise of 
 securing ever-widening frontiers, such as those which mark the rapid strides of 
 Philip's Macedonia ? 
 
 Any political thinker who witnessed this mighty outcome of half a century 
 might indeed feel uneasy at the result, if he were not, like most of the Stoics, 
 AN OPTIMIST OR A FATALIST. THERE WAS, NO DOUBT, THE 
 
 MANIFEST GAIN OF A GREAT PEACE THROUGHOUT THE WORLD, 1234567890 
 
 of the real settlement of disputes by the arbitration of an umpire 1234567800 
 
 aeloii aeiou aeiou aei6u aeiou aeT6u c n 6 
 aeiou deiou deiou deiou aeiou aeiou q n 5 &
 
 148 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 MONOTYPE 
 
 EIGHT POINT NO. THIRTY-ONE 
 
 [Solid] 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage 
 and of Corinth, they must have felt that they had reached one of the 
 great turning-points in the world's history. There was no longer any 
 doubt that all the civilized nations hitherto at variance, or at war, dis- 
 tracted by reason of contrasts in population, in government, in language, 
 in traditions, would now be directed by the will of one people, by the 
 influence of one system of .law, by the predominance of a common 
 language. 
 
 It was not the first time that this grand prospect had been held forth 
 to the world. When Alexander was yet a young man, returning from 
 his conquests in the Far East, men must have anticipated, as very near, 
 an empire not unlike that of Rome; for the conquest of the West would 
 have been no difficult matter to Alexander, with all the resources of 
 Asia under his hand. The successes of Pyrrhus, with his small army, 
 against the adult Rome of the third century, fresh from her Samnite 
 conquests, show what would have been the successes of Alexander, 
 with his giant genius and armaments, against the younger and feebler 
 republic. And if the realization of the conqueror's dreams was hindered 
 by his early death, most of the early Diadochi had each for many hard- 
 fought years aspired to be his sole successor, hoping to complete his 
 work and regenerate the distracted world by the potent influence of 
 Hellenistic culture. 
 
 [Leaded] 
 
 A world-empire, including all the lands and nations about the 
 Mediterranean Sea, reaching to the frozen North and the torrid South 
 as its natural limits, exchanging the virgin ores of Spain for the long- 
 sought spices of Araby the Blest, was therefore no very wild imagination. 
 But while those that had conceived it and striven for it consciously had 
 failed, who could have imagined that it should drop almost suddenly, 
 unexpectedly, by the force, not of genius, but of circumstances, into the 
 ANY POLITICAL THINKER WHO WITNESSED THIS 
 
 MIGHTY OUTCOME OF HALF A CENTURY MIGHT 1234567890 
 
 indeed feel uneasy at the result, if he were not, like m 1234567890 
 
 AEIOU AEfoU AEI&U AftoU AEIOU AE*OU C N C 
 
 aeloii aei6u aeiou def6u aeiou ae"I6u g n 
 
 aeiou deiou aeiou deiou aeiou a&du $ n 
 
 TDK H&H $$$T ddhfth H dhst ksttSS 4hms
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 149 
 
 MONOTYPE 
 
 NINE POINT NO. THIRTY-ONE 
 [Solid] 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage 
 and of Cornith, they must have felt that they had reached one 
 of the great turning-points in the world's history. There was no 
 longer any doubt that all the civilized nations hitherto at variance, 
 or at war, distracted by reason of contrasts in population, in 
 government, in language, in traditions, would now be directed 
 by the will of one people, by the influence of one system of law, 
 by the predominance of a common language. 
 
 It was not the first time that this grand prospect had been 
 held forth to the world. When Alexander was yet a young man, 
 returning from his conquests in the Far East, men must have 
 anticipated, as very near, an empire not unlike that of Rome; 
 for the conquest of the West would have been no difficult matter 
 to Alexander, with all the resources of Asia under his hand. 
 
 [Leaded] 
 
 The successes of Pyrrhus, with his small army, against the adult 
 Rome of the third century, fresh from her Samnite conquests, 
 show what would have been the successes of Alexander, with his 
 giant genius and armaments, against the younger and feebler 
 republic. And if the realization of the conqueror's dreams was 
 hindered by his early death, most of the early Diadochi had each 
 for many hard-fought years aspired to be his sole successor, 
 hoping to complete his work and regenerate the distracted world 
 by the potent influence of Hellenistic culture. 
 
 A world-empire, including all the lands and nations about the 
 DROP ALMOST SUDDENLY, UNEXPECTEDLY, BY THE 
 
 FORCE, NOT OF GENIUS, BUT OF CIRCUMSTANCES, 1234567890 
 
 into the hands of a people who attained it, not by i 2 j 4 5 6 7 8 g o 
 
 AEIOU AEIOU AEIOU AEIOU AEIOU AEIOU C N C 
 
 aeiou aeiou aeiou aeiou aeiou aeiou c n 
 ae'ioii detail aeiou aeiou aeioii aSldii f n Q 
 A HST dst HST dhsti
 
 150 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 MONOTYPE 
 
 TEN POINT NO. THIRTY-ONE 
 
 (Solid} 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of 
 Carthage and of Corinth, they must have felt that they had 
 reached one of the great turning-points in the world's his- 
 tory. There was no longer any doubt that all the civilized 
 nations hitherto at variance, or at war, distracted by reason 
 of contrasts in population, in government, in language, in 
 traditions, would now be directed by the will of one people, 
 by the influence of one system of law, by the predominance 
 of a common language. 
 
 [Leaded] 
 
 It was not the first time that this grand prospect had been 
 held forth to the world. When Alexander was yet a young 
 man, returning from his conquests in the Far East, men must 
 have anticipated, as very near, an empire not unlike that of 
 Rome; for the conquest of the West would have been no diffi- 
 cult matter to Alexander, with all the resources of Asia under 
 his hand. The successes of Pyrrhus, with his small army, 
 against the adult Rome of the third century, fresh from her 
 Samnite conquests, show what would have been the successes 
 of Alexander, with his giant genius and armaments, against 
 the younger and feebler republic. And if the realization of 
 the conqueror's dreams was hindered by his early death, most 
 A WORLD-EMPIRE, INCLUDING ALL THE LANDS 
 
 AND NATIONS ABOUT THE MEDITER- 1234567890 
 
 ranean Sea, reaching to the frozen North 1234567890 
 
 AEIOU AEldft AEIOU AEIOU AEIOU AEIOIJ N 
 
 aeioii aeiou aeiou aeiou aeiou aelou f a n 6 
 ae'idii deioti aeldu deidu aeiou aeldti Q $ a n o 
 D HH SST K dhhfykttt
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 151 
 
 MONOTYPE 
 
 ELEVEN POINT NO. THIRTY-ONE 
 
 [Solid] 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of 
 Carthage and of Corinth, they must have felt that they 
 had reached one of the great turning-points in the world's 
 history. There was no longer any doubt that all the 
 civilized nations hitherto at variance, or at war, distracted 
 by reason of contrasts in population, in government, in 
 language, in traditions, would now be directed by the 
 will of one people, by the influence of one system of law, 
 by the predominance of a common language. 
 
 [Leaded] 
 
 It was not the first time that this grand prospect had 
 been held forth to the world. When Alexander was yet 
 a young man, returning from his conquests in the Far 
 East, men must have anticipated, as very near, an empire 
 not unlike that of Rome; for the conquest of the West 
 would have been no difficult matter to Alexander, with 
 all the resources of Asia under his hand. The successes of 
 Pyrrhus, with his small army, against the adult Rome 
 of the third century, fresh from her Samnite conquests, 
 show what would have been the successes of Alexander 
 ASPIRED TO BE HIS SOLE SUCCESSOR, HOPING 
 
 TO COMPLETE HIS WORK AND REGEN- 1234567890 
 
 erate the distracted world by the potent 1234567890 
 
 AEIOU AEIOtr AEIOU AEIOTJ AEIOU AEIOU CN HST A 
 
 aeioii aeiou aeiou aeiou aeiou. aeiou 5 n dhst 
 aeiou aeiou aeiou aeiou aeiou aewu f f 
 HST A dhst
 
 152 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 MONOTYPE 
 
 TWELVE POINT NO. THIRTY-ONE 
 
 [Solid] 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the 
 fall of Carthage and of Corinth, they must have felt 
 that they had reached one of the great turning- 
 points in the world's history. There was no longer 
 any doubt that all the civilized nations hitherto at 
 variance, or at war, distracted by reason of contrasts 
 in population, in government, in language, in tradi- 
 tions, would now be directed by the will of one 
 people, by the influence of one system of law, by the 
 predominance of a common language. 
 
 [Leaded] 
 
 It was not the first time that this grand prospect 
 had been held forth to the world. When Alexander 
 was yet a young man, returning from his conquests 
 in the Far East, men must have anticipated, as very 
 near, an empire not unlike that of Rome; for the 
 conquest of the West would have been no difficult 
 matter to Alexander, with all the resources of Asia 
 under his hand. The successes of Pyrrhus, with 
 YOUNGER AND FEEBLER REPUBLIC. AND 
 
 IF THE REALIZATION OF THE 1234567890 
 
 conqueror's dreams was hin- 1234567890 
 
 AEIOU AEIOU" AEIOU AEIOU AElOU AEIOU C N f 
 
 aeioii aeiou aeiou aeiou. aeiou aeiou g fi f $ 
 aeiou aeiou aewu aeiou aeiou aeiou dknhhhsst
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 153 
 
 MONOTYPE 
 
 SIX POINT NO. FIVE 
 
 [Solid] 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and of 
 Corinth, they must have felt that they had reached one of the great turning- 
 points in the world's history. There was no longer any doubt that all 
 the civilized nations hitherto at variance, or at war, distracted by reason 
 of contrasts in population, in government, in language, in traditions, 
 would now be directed by the will of one people, by the influence of one 
 system of law, by the predominance of a common language. 
 
 It was not the first time that this grand prospect had been held 
 forth to the world. When Alexander was yet a young man, returning 
 from his conquests in the Far East, men must have anticipated, as very 
 near, an empire not unlike that of Rome; for the conquest of the West 
 would have been no difficult matter to Alexander, with all the resources 
 of Asia under his hand. The successes of Pyrrhus, with his small army, 
 against the adult Rome of the third century, fresh from her Samnite 
 conquests, show what would have been the successes of Alexander, with 
 his giant genius and armaments, against the younger and feebler republic. 
 And if the realization of the conqueror's dreams was hindered by his early 
 death, most of the early Diadocni had each for many hard-fought years 
 aspired to be his sole successor, hoping to complete his work and regenerate 
 the distracted world by the potent influence of Hellenistic culture. 
 
 [Leaded] 
 
 A world-empire, including all the lands and nations about the Medi- 
 terranean Sea, reaching to the frozen North and the torrid South as its 
 natural limits, exchanging the virgin ores of Spain for the long-sought 
 spices of Araby the Blest, was therefore no very wild imagination. But 
 while those that had conceived it and striven for it consciously had failed, 
 who could have imagined that it should drop almost suddenly, unexpectedly, 
 by the force, not of genius, but of circumstances, into the hands of a 
 people who attained it, not by the direction of an Alexander, but by such 
 national qualities as had gained for Sparta precedence and respect, coupled 
 with aggressive wars under the guise of securing ever-widening frontiers, 
 such as those which mark the rapid strides of Philip's Macedonia ? 
 
 Any political thinker who witnessed this mighty outcome of hah" a 
 century might indeed feel uneasy at the result, if he were not, like most 
 of the Stoics, an optimist or a fatalist. There was, no doubt, the manifest 
 gain of a great peace throughout the world, of the real settlement of 
 disputes by the arbitration of an umpire with power to enforce his will; 
 there was the consequent development of wide commerce, with its diffusion, 
 not only of wealth, but of enlightenment. These material gains were 
 indisputable, even though a dangerous monopoly was being established, 
 NOT MERELY THROUGH ENORMOUS ADVANTAGES INSEPARA- 
 BLE FROM ROMAN INFLUENCE, BUT BY THE JEALOUS 1234567890 
 destruction of all those commercial centers which 1X3^567890 
 
 aeiou aeiofl aeioQ aeiofl aeiou a6I6fl c an u a 
 
 aeiou Aeldit aeiou deioii deiou ddou f d d
 
 154 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 MONOTYPE 
 
 SEVEN POINT NO. EIGHT 
 
 [Solid] 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage 
 and of Corinth, they must have felt that they had reached one of the 
 great turning-points in the world's history. There was no longer any 
 doubt that all the civilized nations hitherto at variance, or at war, dis- 
 tracted by reason of contrasts in population, in government, in language, 
 in traditions, would now be directed by the will of one people, by the 
 influence of one system of law, by the predominance of a common 
 language. 
 
 It was not the first time that this grand prospect had been held forth 
 to the world. When Alexander was yet a young man, returning from 
 his conquests in the Far East, men must have anticipated, as very near, 
 an empire not unlike that of Rome; for the conquest of the West would 
 have been no difficult matter to Alexander, with all the resources of 
 Asia under his hand. The successes of Pyrrhus, with his small army, 
 against the adult Rome of the third century, fresh from her Samnite 
 conquests, show what would have been the successes of Alexander, 
 with his giant genius and armaments, against the younger and feebler 
 republic. And if the realization of the conqueror's dreams was hindered 
 by his early death, most of the early Diadochi had each for many hard- 
 fought years aspired to be his sole successor, hoping to complete his 
 
 [Leaded] 
 
 work and regenerate the distracted world by the potent influence of 
 Hellenistic culture. 
 
 A world-empire, including all the lands and nations about the 
 Mediterranean Sea, reaching to the frozen North and the torrid South 
 as its natural limits, exchanging the virgin ores of Spain for the long- 
 sought spices of Araby the Blest, was therefore no very wild imagination. 
 But while those that had conceived it and striven for it consciously had 
 failed, who could have imagined that it should drop almost suddenly, 
 unexpectedly, by the force, not of genius, but of circumstances, into the 
 hands of a people who attained it, not by the direction of an Alexander, 
 but by such national qualities as had gained for Sparta precedence and 
 respect, coupled with aggressive wars under the guise of securing ever- 
 widening frontiers, such as those which mark the rapid strides of Philip's 
 Macedonia ? 
 OF THE STOICS. AN OPTIMIST OR A FATALIST. THERE 
 
 WAS, NO DOUBT, THE MANIFEST GAIN OF A GREAT 1234567890 
 
 peace throughout the world, of the real settlement of 123^561890 
 
 ae!5Q aeK6& a&iou aeldfr aei6u aeioii c a n 6 
 aeiou dttdu detdti aeldii deldu aeioii c a fl d
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 155 
 
 MONOTYPE 
 
 EIGHT POINT NO. EIGHT 
 
 [Solid] 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage 
 and of Corinth, they must have felt that they had reached one of 
 the great turning-points in the world's history. There was no 
 longer any doubt that all the civilized nations hitherto at variance, 
 or at war, distracted by reason of contrasts in population, in govern- 
 ment, in language, in tradition, would now be directed by the will 
 of one people, by the influence of one system of law, by the pre- 
 dominance of a common language. 
 
 It was not the first time that this grand prospect had been held 
 forth to the world. When Alexander was yet a young man, return- 
 ing from his conquests in the Far East, men must have anticipated, 
 as very near, an empire not unlike that of Rome; for the conquest 
 of the West would have been no difficult matter to Alexander, with 
 all the resources of Asia under his hand. The successes of Pyrrhus, 
 with his small army, against the adult Rome of the third century, 
 fresh from her Samnite conquests, show what would have been the 
 successes of Alexander, with his giant genius and armaments, against 
 the younger and feebler republic. And if the realization of the 
 
 [Leaded] 
 
 conqueror's dreams was hindered by his early death, most of the 
 early Diadochi had each for many hard-fought years aspired to be 
 his sole successor, hoping to complete his work and regenerate the 
 distracted world by the potent influence of Hellenistic culture. 
 
 A world-empire, including all the lands and nations about the 
 Mediterranean Sea, reaching to the frozen North and the torrid 
 South as its natural limits, exchanging the virgin ores of Spain for 
 the long-sought spices of Araby the Blest, was therefore no very 
 wild imagination. But while those that had conceived it and striven 
 for it consciously had failed, who could have imagined that it 
 IT, NOT BY THE DIRECTION OF AN ALEXANDER, BUT 
 
 BY SUCH NATIONAL QUALITIES AS HAD GAINED 1234567890 
 
 for Sparta precedence and respect, coupled with 1234567890 
 
 aelou aeiou ae!6u ae"i6ti aelou c. a n 6 
 aewil detail aeldu deidu aelou c. a n o 
 aeiQ.ura&eIEHKHSdhkstsh6S&
 
 156 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 MONOTYPE 
 
 NINE POINT NO. EIGHT 
 [Solid] 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Car- 
 thage and of Corinth, they must have felt that they had reached 
 one of the great turning-points in the world's history. There 
 was no longer any doubt that all the civilized nations hitherto 
 at variance, or at war, distracted by reason of contrasts in 
 population, in government, in language, in tradition, would 
 now be directed by the will of one people, by the influence of 
 one system of law, by the predominance of a common language. 
 
 It was not the first time that this grand prospect had been 
 held forth to the world. When Alexander was yet a young 
 man, returning from his conquests in the Far East, men must 
 have anticipated, as very near, an empire not unlike that of 
 Rome; for the conquest of the West would have been no 
 difficult matter to Alexander, with all the resources of Asia 
 
 [Leaded] 
 
 under his hand. The successes of Pyrrhus, with his small army, 
 against the adult Rome of the third century, fresh from her 
 Samnite conquests, show what would have been the successes 
 of Alexander, with his giant genius and armaments, against the 
 younger and feebler republic. And if the realization of the 
 conqueror's dreams was hindered by his early death, most of 
 the early Diadochi had each for many hard-fought years aspired 
 to be his whole successor, hoping to complete his work and 
 regenerate the distracted world by the potent influence of 
 Hellenistic culture. 
 
 A world-empire, including all the lands and nations about 
 the Mediterranean Sea, reaching to the frozen North and the 
 OF AN ALEXANDER, BUT BY SUCH NATIONAL QUAL- 
 
 ITIES AS HAD GAINED FOR SPARTA PRECE- 1234567890 
 
 dence and respect, coupled with aggressive 1 234567890 
 
 aeiou aei6u a616u de^u aelou aelSti c. a n 6 a 
 aelou aeioti aei&ii deiou aelou aelou $ an o
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 157 
 
 MONOTYPE 
 
 ELEVEN POINT NO. EIGHT 
 
 [Solid] 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of 
 Carthage and of Corinth, they must have felt that they 
 had reached one of the great turning-points in the world's 
 history. There was no longer any doubt that all the 
 civilized nations hitherto at variance, or at war, dis- 
 tracted by reason of contrasts in population, in govern- 
 ment, in language, in traditions, would now be directed 
 by the will of one people, by the influence of one system 
 of law, by the predominance of a common language. 
 
 It was not the first time that this grand prospect had 
 been held forth to the world. When Alexander was yet 
 a young man, returning from his conquests in the Far 
 
 [Leaded] 
 
 East, men must have anticipated, as very near, an empire 
 not unlike that of Rome; for the conquest of the West 
 would have been no difficult matter to Alexander, with 
 all the resources of Asia under his hand. The successes 
 of Pyrrhus, with his small army, against the adult Rome 
 of the third century, fresh from her Samnite conquests, 
 show what would have been the successes of Alexander, 
 with his giant genius and armaments, against the younger 
 and feebler republic. And if the realization of the con- 
 QUEROR'S DREAMS WAS HINDERED BY HIS 
 
 EARLY DEATH, MOST OF THE EARLY 1234567890 
 
 Diadochi had each for many hard- 1234567890 
 
 ae'iou aeiou aeiou deioii aeiou aeiSu a 6 a 9 n 
 aeiou aeiou aeiou aeiou aeiou aeiou Q z a and
 
 MONOTYPE 
 
 SIX POINT GUSHING NO. TWENTY-FIVE 
 
 [Solid] 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and of Corinth, 
 they must have felt that they had reached one of the great turning-points in the 
 world's history. There was no longer any doubt that all the civilized nations 
 hitherto at variance, or at war, distracted by reason of contrasts in population, in 
 government, in language, in traditions, would now be directed by the will of one 
 people, by the influence of one system of law, by the predominance of a common 
 language. 
 
 It was not the first time that this grand prospect had been held forth to the 
 world. When Alexander was yet a young man, returning from his conquests in 
 the Far East, men must have anticipated, as very near, an empire not unlike that 
 of Rome; for the conquest of the West would have been no difficult matter to 
 Alexander, with all the resources of Asia under his hand. The successes of Pyrrhus, 
 with his small army, against the adult Rome of the third century, fresh from her Sam- 
 nite conquests, show what would have been the successes of Alexander, with his 
 giant genius and armaments, against the younger and feebler republic. And if 
 the realization of the conqueror's dreams was hindered by his early death, most of 
 
 [Leaded] 
 
 the early Diadochi had each for many hard-fought years aspired to be his sole 
 successor, hoping to complete his work and regenerate the distracted world by the 
 potent influence of Hellenistic culture. 
 
 A world-empire, including all the lands and nations about the Mediterranean 
 Sea, reaching to the frozen North and the torrid South as its natural limits, ex- 
 changing the virgin ores of Spain for the long-sought spices of Araby the Blest, was 
 therefore no very wild imagination. But while those that had conceived it and 
 striven for it consciously had failed, who could have imagined that it should drop 
 almost suddenly, unexpectedly, by the force, not of genius, but of circumstances, 
 into the hands of a people who attained it, not by the direction of an Alexander, 
 but by such national qualities as had gained for Sparta precedence and respect, 
 coupled with aggressive wars under the guise of securing ever-widening frontiers, 
 such as those which mark the rapid strides of Philip's Macedonia? 
 
 Any political thinker who witnessed this mighty outcome of half a century 
 might indeed feel uneasy at the result, if he were not, like most of the Stoics, an 
 optimist or a fatalist. There was, no doubt, the manifest gain of a great peace 
 throughout the world, of the real settlement of disputes by the arbitration of an 
 umpire with power to enforce his will; there was the consequent development of 
 wide commerce with its diffusion, not only of wealth, but of enlightenment. These 
 material gains were indisputable, even though a dangerous monopoly was being 
 established, not merely through the enormous advantages inseparable from 
 Roman influence, but by the jealous destruction of all those commercial centers 
 which might have rivaled Rome by reason of favored situation or old traditions 
 of trade. 
 
 BUT FAR MORE SERIOUS WAS THE PATENT FACT, THAT NEI 
 
 1234567890 
 
 aeioii aeiou aeiou aeiou aeiou c
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 
 
 159 
 
 MONOTYPE 
 
 SEVEN POINT GUSHING NO. TWENTY-FIVE 
 [Solid] 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks Kke Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and 
 of Corinth, they must have felt that they had reached one of the great 
 turning-points in the world's history. There was no longer any doubt 
 that all the civilized nations hitherto at variance, or at war, distracted by 
 reason of contrasts in population, in government, in language, in traditions, 
 would now be directed by the will of one people, by the influence of one 
 system of law, by the predominance of a common language. 
 
 It was not the first time that this grand prospect had been held forth 
 to the world. When Alexander was yet a young man, returning from 
 his conquests in the Far East, men must have anticipated, as very near, 
 an empire not unlike that of Rome; for the conquest of the West would 
 have been no difficult matter to Alexander, with all the resources of Asia 
 under his hand. The successes of Pyrrhus, with his small army, against 
 the adult Rome of the third century, fresh from her Samnite conquests, 
 show what would have been the successes of Alexander, with his giant 
 genius and armaments, against the younger and feebler republic. And 
 if the realization of the conqueror's dreams was hindered by his early 
 
 [Leaded] 
 
 death, most of the early Diadochi had each for many hard-fought years 
 aspired to be his sole successor, hoping to complete his work and regen- 
 erate the distracted world by the potent influence of Hellenistic culture. 
 
 A world-empire, including all the lands and nations about the Medi- 
 terranean Sea, reaching to the frozen North and the torrid South as its 
 natural limits, exchanging the virgin ores of Spain for the long-sought 
 spices of Araby the Blest, was therefore no very wild imagination. 
 But while those that had conceived it and striven for it consciously had 
 failed, who could have imagined that it should drop almost suddenly, 
 unexpectedly, by the force, not of genius, but of circumstances, into the 
 hands of a people who attained it, not by the direction of an Alexander, 
 but by such national qualities as had gained for Sparta precedence and 
 respect, coupled with aggressive wars under the guise of securing ever- 
 widening frontiers, such as those which mark the rapid strides of Philip's 
 Macedonia? 
 
 Any political thinker who witnessed this mighty outcome of half a 
 century might indeed feel uneasy at the result, if he were not, like most 
 of the Stoics, an optimist or a fatalist. There was, no doubt, the manifest 
 gain of a great peace throughout the world, of the real settlement of 
 disputes by the arbitration of an umpire with power 1234567890 
 TO ENFORCE HIS WILL; THERE WAS THE CONSEQUENT DE- 
 
 aeioii aeiou aeidu aeidu aeiou aelou c
 
 160 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 MONOTYPE 
 
 EIGHT POINT GUSHING NO. TWENTY-FIVE 
 
 [Solid] 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage 
 and of Corinth, they must have felt that they had reached one of the 
 great turning-points in the world's history. There was no longer any 
 doubt that all the civilized nations hitherto at variance, or at war, dis- 
 tracted by reason of contrasts in population, in government, hi 
 language, in traditions, would now be directed by the will of one 
 people, by the influence of one system of law, by the predominance 
 of a common language. 
 
 It was not the first time that this grand prospect had been held 
 forth to the world. When Alexander was yet a young man, return- 
 ing from his conquests in the Far East, men must have anticipated, as 
 very near, an empire not unlike that of Rome; for the conquest 
 of the West would have been no difficult matter to Alexander, with 
 all the resources of Asia under his hand. The successes of Pyrrhus, 
 with his small army, against the adult Rome of the third century, 
 fresh from her Samnite conquests, show what would have been the 
 successes of Alexander, with his giant genius and armaments, against 
 the younger and feebler republic. And if the realization of the 
 
 [Leaded] 
 
 conqueror's dreams was hindered by his early death, most of the 
 early Diadochi had each for many hard-fought years aspired to be his 
 sole successor, hoping to complete his work and regenerate the 
 distracted world by the potent influence of Hellenistic culture. 
 
 A world-empire, including all the lands and nations about the 
 Mediterranean Sea, reaching to the frozen North and the torrid 
 South as its natural limits, exchanging the virgin ores of Spain for the 
 long-sought spices of Araby the Blest, was therefore no very wild 
 imagination. But while those that had conceived it and striven for 
 it consciously had failed, who could have imagined that it should 
 drop almost suddenly, unexpectedly, by the force, not of genius, but 
 of circumstances, into the hands of a people who attained it, not by 
 the direction of an Alexander, but by such national qualities as had 
 gained for Sparta precedence and respect, coupled with aggressive 
 wars under the guise of securing ever- 1234567890 
 
 OF WEALTH, BUT OF ENLIGHTENMENT. THESE MATERIAL 
 
 a'eibii aeiou aeidu aeidu aeiou aeiou c
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 161 
 
 MONOTYPE 
 
 NINE POINT GUSHING NO. TWENTY-FIVE 
 
 [Solid] 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of 
 Carthage and of Corinth, they must have felt that they had 
 reached one of the great turning-points in the world's history. 
 There was no longer any doubt that all the civilized nations 
 hitherto at variance, or at war, distracted by reason of con- 
 trasts in population, in government, in language, in tradi- 
 tions, would now be directed by the will of one people, by 
 the influence of one system of law, by the predominance of 
 a common language. 
 
 It was not the first time that this grand prospect had been 
 held forth to the world. When Alexander was yet a young 
 man, returning from his conquests in the Far East, men must 
 have anticipated, as very near, an empire not unlike that of 
 Rome; for the conquest of the West would have been no 
 difficult matter to Alexander, with all the resources of Asia 
 under his hand. The successes of Pyrrhus, with his small 
 
 [Leaded] 
 
 army, against the adult Rome of the third century, fresh 
 from her Samnite conquests, show what would have been 
 the successes of Alexander, with his giant genius and arma- 
 ments, against the younger and feebler republic. And if 
 the realization of the conqueror's dreams was hindered 
 by his early death, most of the early Diadochi had each for 
 many hard-fought years aspired to be his sole successor, 
 hoping to complete his work and regenerate the distracted 
 world by the potent influence of Hellenistic culture. 
 
 A world-empire, including all the lands and nations 
 about the Mediterranean Sea, reaching to the frozen North 
 and the torrid South as its natural limits, 1234567890 
 EXCHANGING THE VIRGIN ORES OF SPAIN FOR THE 
 
 aeiou aeiou aeiou aeiou aeiou aeiou c
 
 162 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 MONOTYPE 
 
 TEN POINT GUSHING NO. TWENTY-FIVE 
 
 [Solid] 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of 
 Carthage and of Corinth, they must have felt that they had 
 reached one of the great turning-points in the world's history. 
 There was no longer any doubt that all the civilized nations 
 hitherto at variance, or at war, distracted by reason of con- 
 trasts in population, in government, in language, in tradi- 
 tions, would now be directed by the will of one people, by 
 the influence of one system of law, by the predominance of 
 a common language. 
 
 It was not the first time that this grand prospect had been 
 held forth to the world. When Alexander was yet a young 
 man, returning from his conquests in the Far East, men must 
 have anticipated, as very near, an empire not unlike that of 
 Rome; for the conquest of the West would have been no 
 difficult matter to Alexander, with all the resources of Asia 
 under his hand. The successes of Pyrrhus, with his small 
 
 [Leaded] 
 
 army, against the adult Rome of the third century, fresh 
 from her Samnite conquests, show what would have been 
 the successes of Alexander, with his giant genius and arma- 
 ments, against the younger and feebler republic. And if 
 the realization of the conqueror's dreams was hindered 
 by his early death, most of the early Diadochi had each for 
 many hard-fought years aspired to be his sole successor, 
 hoping to complete his work and regenerate the distracted 
 world by the potent influence of Hellenistic culture. 
 
 A world-empire, including all the 1234567890 
 LANDS AND NATIONS ABOUT THE MEDITER- 
 
 aeiou aeiou aeiou aeiou aeiou aeiou c
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 163 
 
 MONOTYPE 
 
 ELEVEN POINT GUSHING NO. TWENTY-FIVE 
 
 [Solid] 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the 
 fall of Carthage and of Corinth, they must have felt 
 that they had reached one of the great turning-points 
 in the world's history. There was no longer any 
 doubt that all the civilized nations hitherto at vari- 
 ance, or at war, distracted by reason of contrasts 
 in population, in government, in language, in tradi- 
 tions, would now be directed by the will of one people, 
 by the influence of one system of law, by the predom- 
 inance of a common language. 
 
 It was not the first time that this grand prospect had 
 been held forth to the world. When Alexander was 
 
 [Leaded] 
 
 yet a young man, returning from his conquests in the 
 Far East, men must have anticipated, as very near, 
 an empire not unlike that of Rome; for the conquest 
 of the West would have been no difficult matter to 
 Alexander, with all the resources of Asia under his 
 hand. The successes of Pyrrhus, with his small 
 army, against the adult Rome of the third century, 
 fresh from her Samnite conquests, show what would 
 have been the successes of Alexander, with his giant 
 genius and armaments, against the younger and 
 feebler republic. And if the realization of the con- 
 queror's dreams was hindered by 1234567890 
 ALL THE LAND AND NATIONS ABOUT THE 
 
 aeib'ii aeiou aeiou aeiou aeiou aeiou c.
 
 1 64 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 MONOTYPE 
 
 TWELVE POINT GUSHING NO. TWENTY-FIVE (ll PT. FACE) 
 
 [Solid] 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the 
 fall of Carthage and of Corinth, they must have 
 felt that they had reached one of the great turning- 
 points in the world's history. There was no longer 
 any doubt that all the civilized nations hitherto at 
 variance, or at war, distracted by reason of con- 
 trasts in population, in government, in language, in 
 traditions, would now be directed by the will of 
 one people, by the influence of one system of law, 
 by the predominance of a common language. 
 
 It was not the first time that this grand prospect 
 had been held forth to the world. When Alexander 
 was yet a young man, returning from his conquests 
 in the Far East, men must have anticipated, as 
 
 [Leaded] 
 
 very near, an empire not unlike that of Rome, for 
 the conquest of the West would have been no dif- 
 ficult matter to Alexander, with all the resources of 
 Asia under his hand. The successes of Pyrrhus, 
 with his small army, against the adult Rome of the 
 third century, fresh from her Samnite conquests, 
 show what would have been the successes of Alex- 
 ander, with his giant genius and armaments, 
 AGAINST THE YOUNGER AND FEEB jE(E 
 1234567890 1234567890 AAA E 66 U C N C 
 aeioii aeiou aeiou aeiou aeiou aeiou cfiyy aeoe 
 (12 pt. face) faieiu sh
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 165 
 
 MONOTYPE 
 
 TEN POINT SCOTCH ROMAN NO. THIRTY-SIX 
 
 WHEN THOUGHTFUL GREEKS LIKE POLYBIUS S 
 1234567890 
 
 TWELVE POINT CASLON NO. THREE HUNDRED AND THIRTY-SEVEN 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the 
 fall of Carthage and of Corinth, they must have felt 
 that they had reached one of the great turning- 
 1234567890 & $ 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall 
 1234567890 JE (E <z oe &$ 
 
 U \ / A " V \ / A / A u _ \ / A 
 
 aaaaaa eeeeee ill oooooo 
 adadaaa eee 'iii 
 aaaoensths tsrh 
 
 EIGHT POINT ITALIC NO. TWENTY-FIVE K 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage 
 and of Corinth, they must have felt that they had reached one of 
 the great turning-points in the world's history. There was no lon- 
 $ 1234567890 JE <E x 02 & 
 
 TEN POINT ITALIC NO. TWENTY-FIVE K 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of 
 Carthage and of Corinth, they must have felt that they had 
 
 $ 1234567890 JE (E a? 02 & 
 Ten Point also cast on Eleven-Point Body 
 
 TWELVE POINT ITALIC NO. TWENTY-FIVE K 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the 
 fall of Carthage and of Corinth, they must have 
 $ 1234567890 M (E a? 02 &
 
 1 66 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 CASLON OLD STYLE 
 
 EIGHT POINT 
 [Solid] 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and of 
 Corinth, they must have felt that they had reached one of the great turning-points 
 in the world's history. There was no longer any doubt that all the civilized 
 nations hitherto at variance, or at war, distracted by reason of contrasts in popula- 
 tion, in government, in language, in traditions, would now be directed by the will 
 of one people, by the influence of one system of law, by the predominance of a 
 common language. 
 
 It was not the first time that this grand prospect had been held forth to the 
 world. When Alexander was yet a young man, returning from his conquests in 
 the Far East, men must have anticipated, as very near, an empire not unlike that 
 of Rome; for the conquest of the West would have been no difficult matter to 
 Alexander, with all the resources of Asia under his hand. The successes of 
 Pyrrhus, with his small army, against the adult Rome of the third century, fresh 
 from her Samnite conquests, show what would have been the successes of Alex- 
 ander, with his giant genius and armaments, against the younger and feebler repub- 
 
 [Leaded] 
 
 lie. And i f the realization of the conqueror's dreams was hindered by his early 
 death, most of the early Diadochi had each for many hard-fought years aspired to 
 be his sole successor, hoping to complete his work and regenerate the distracted 
 world by the potent influence of Hellenistic culture 
 
 A world-empire, including all the lands and nations about the Mediterranean 
 Sea, reaching to the frozen North and the torrid South as its natural limits, 
 exchanging the virgin ores of Spain for the long-sought spices of Araby the Blest, 
 was therefore no very wild imagination. But while those that had conceived it and 
 striven for it consciously had failed, who could have imagined that it should drop 
 almost suddenly, unexpectedly, by the force, not of genius, but of circumstances, 
 into the hands of a people who attained it, not by the direction of an Alexander, 
 but by such national qualities as had gained for Sparta precedence and respect, 
 coupled with aggressive wars under the guise of securing ever-widening frontiers, 
 such as those which mark the rapid strides of Philip's Macedonia? 
 
 Any political thinker who witnessed this mighty outcome of half a century 
 might indeed feel uneasy at the result, if he were not, like most of the Stoics, 
 an optimist or a fatalist. There was, no doubt, the manifest gain of a great 
 PEACE THROUGHOUT THE WORLD, OF THE REAL SETTLE- 
 MENT OF DISPUTES BY THE ARBITRATION OF AN 1234567890 
 
 umpire with power to enforce his <will; there 1234567890
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 167 
 
 CASLON OLD STYLE 
 
 TEN POINT 
 [Solid] 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage 
 ;nd of Corinth, they must have felt that they had reached one of the 
 great turning-points in the world's history. There was no longer 
 any doubt that all the civilized nations hitherto at variance, or at 
 war, distracted by reason of contrasts in population, in government, 
 in language, in traditions, would now be directed by the will of 
 one people, by the influence of one system of law, by the pre- 
 dominance of a common language. 
 
 It was not the first time that this grand prospect had been held 
 forth to the world. When Alexander was yet a young man, return- 
 ing from his conquests in the Far East, men must have anticipated, 
 as very near, an empire not unlike that of Rome; for the conquest 
 of the West would have been no difficult matter to Alexander, 
 with all the resources of Asia under his hand. The successes of 
 
 [Leaded] 
 
 Pyrrhus, with his small army, against the adult Rome of the third 
 century, fresh from her Samnite conquests, show what would have 
 been the successes of Alexander, with his giant genius and arma- 
 ments, against the younger and feebler republic. And if the reali- 
 zation of the conqueror's dreams was hindered by his early death, 
 most of the early Diadochi had each for many hard-fought years as- 
 pired to be his sole successor, hoping to complete his work and 
 regenerate the distracted world by the potent influence of Hellenistic 
 culture. 
 
 A world- empire, including all the lands and nations about the 
 Mediterranean Sea, reaching to the frozen North and the torrid 
 South as its natural limits, exchanging the virgin ores of Spain for 
 THE LONG-SOUGHT SPICES OF ARABY THE BLEST, 
 
 WAS THEREFORE NO WILD IMAGINATION. I 234567890 
 
 But while those that had conceived it 1234567890
 
 1 68 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 CASLON OLD STYLE 
 
 TWELVE POINT 
 [Solid] 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the 
 fall of Carthage and of Corinth, they must have felt 
 that they had reached one of the great turning-points 
 in the world's history. There was no longer any 
 doubt that all the civilized nations hitherto at vari- 
 ance, or at war, distracted by reason of contrasts in 
 population, in government, in language, in traditions, 
 would now be directed by the will of one people, 
 by the influence of one system of law, by the pre- 
 dominance of a common language. 
 
 [Leaded] 
 
 It was not the first time that this grand prospect 
 had been held forth to the world. When Alexander 
 was yet a young man, returning from his conquests 
 in the Far East, men must have anticipated, as very 
 near, an empire not unlike that of Rome; for the 
 conquest of the West would have been no difficult 
 matter to Alexander, with all the resources of Asia 
 under his hand. The successes of Pyrrhus, with 
 his small army, against the adult Rome of the third 
 century, fresh from her Samnite conquests, show 
 what would have been the successes of Alexander, 
 WITH HIS GIANT GENIUS AND ARMA- 
 MENTS, AGAINST THE YOUNGER 1234567890 
 
 and feebler republic. And if 1234.567890
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 169 
 
 CASLON OLD STYLE 
 
 FOURTEEN POINT 
 
 [Solid] 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw 
 the fall of Carthage and of Corinth, they must 
 have felt that they had reached one of the great 
 turning-points in the world's history. There 
 was no longer any doubt that all the civilized 
 nations hitherto at variance, or at war, dis- 
 tracted by reason of contrasts in population, in 
 government, in language, in traditions, would 
 
 [Leaded] 
 
 now be directed by the will of one people, by 
 the influence of one system of law, by the pre- 
 dominance of a common language. 
 
 It was not the first time that this grand 
 prospect had been held forth to the world. 
 When Alexander was yet a young man, return- 
 ing from his conquests in the Far East, men 
 must have anticipated, as very near, an empire 
 not unlike that of Rome; for the conquest of 
 the West would have been no difficult matter 
 TO ALEXANDER, WITH ALL THE 
 
 RESOURCES OF AsiA I 234567890 
 
 under his hand. This 1234567890
 
 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 SCOTCH ROMAN 
 
 [Solid] 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and of 
 Corinth, they must have felt that they had reached one of the great turning- 
 points in the world's history. There was no longer any doubt that all the civil- 
 ized nations hitherto at variance, or at war, distracted by reason of contrasts 
 in population, in government, in language, in traditions, would now be directed 
 by the will of one people, by the influence of one system of law, by the predomi- 
 nance of a common language. 
 
 It was not the first time that this grand prospect had been held forth to 
 the world. When Alexander was yet a young man, returning from his con- 
 quests in the Far East, men must have anticipated, as very near, an empire not 
 unlike that of Rome ; for the conquests of the West would have been no diffi- 
 cult matter to Alexander, with all the resources of Asia under his hand. The 
 successes of Pyrrhus, with his small army, against the adult Rome of the third 
 century, fresh from her Samnite conquests, show what would have been the 
 successes of Alexander, with his giant genius and armaments, against the 
 younger and feebler republic. And if the realization of the conqueror's dreams 
 was hindered by his early death, most of the early Diadochi had each for many 
 hard-fought years aspired to be his sole successor, hoping to complete his work 
 and regenerate the distracted world by the potent influence of Hellenistic 
 culture. 
 
 A world-empire, including all the lands and nations about the Mediter- 
 ranean Sea, reaching to the frozen North and the torrid South as its natural 
 limits, exchanging the virgin ores of Spain for the long-sought spices of Araby 
 the Blest, was therefore no very wild imagination. But while those that had 
 conceived it and striven for it consciously had failed, who could have imagined 
 that it should drop almost suddenly, unexpectedly, by the force, not of genius, 
 
 [Leaded] 
 
 but of circumstances, into the hands of a people who attained it, not by the 
 direction of an Alexander, but by such national qualities as had gained for 
 Sparta precedence and respect, coupled with aggressive wars under the guise 
 of securing ever-widening frontiers, such as those which mark the rapid strides 
 of Philip's Macedonia? 
 
 Any political thinker who witnessed this mighty outcome of half a century 
 might indeed feel uneasy at the result, if he were not, like most of the Stoics, 
 an optimist or a fatalist. There was, no doubt, the manifest gain of a great 
 peace throughout the world, of the real settlement of disputes by the arbitra- 
 tion of an umpire with power to enforce his will; there was the consequent 
 development of wide commerce, with its diffusion not only of wealth, but of 
 enlightenment. These material gains were indisputable, even though a danger- 
 ous monopoly was being established, not merely through the enormous advan- 
 tages inseparable from Roman influence, but by the jealous destruction of all 
 those commercial centers which might have rivaled Rome by reason of favored 
 situation or old traditions of trade. 
 
 But far more serious was the patent fact, that neither the Roman people 
 NOR THEIR RULERS HAD RECEIVED ANY EDUCATION TO FIT THEM 
 
 FOR AN IMPERIAL POLICY, MATERIAL PLEASURES, AND THE 1284567890 
 
 dominant classes, when vast opportunities of wealth 1SS3U567890
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 171 
 
 SCOTCH ROMAN 
 
 EIGHT POINT 
 
 [Solid] 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage 
 and of Corinth, they must have felt that they had reached one of the 
 great turning-points in the world's history. There was no longer 
 any doubt that all the civilized nations hitherto at variance, or at war, 
 distracted by reason of contrasts in population, in government, in 
 language, in traditions, would now be directed by the will of one 
 people, by the influence of one system of law, by the predominance 
 of a common language. 
 
 It was not the first time that this grand prospect had been held 
 forth to the world. When Alexander was yet a young man, return- 
 ing from his conquests in the Far East, men must have anticipated, 
 as very near, an empire not unlike that of Rome; for the conquest of 
 the West would have been no difficult matter to Alexander, with all 
 the resources of Asia under his hand. The successes of Pyrrhus, with 
 his small army, against the adult Rome of the third century, fresh 
 from her Samnite conquests, show what would have been the suc- 
 cesses of Alexander, with his giant genius and armaments, against 
 the younger and feebler republic. 
 
 [Leaded] 
 
 A world-empire, including all the lands and nations about the 
 Mediterranean Sea, reaching to the frozen North and the torrid 
 South as its natural limits, exchanging the virgin ores of Spain for 
 the long-sought spices of Araby the Blest, was therefore no very 
 wild imagination. But while those that had conceived it and striven 
 for it consciously had failed, who could have imagined that it should 
 drop almost suddenly, unexpectedly, by the force, not of genius, but 
 of circumstances, into the hands of a people who attained it, not by 
 the direction of an Alexander, but by such national qualities as had 
 gained for Sparta precedence and respect, coupled with aggressive 
 wars under the guise of securing ever-widening frontiers, such as 
 those which mark the rapid strides of Philip's Macedonia? 
 
 Any political thinker who witnessed this mighty outcome of half 
 a century might indeed feel uneasy at the result, if he were not, like 
 HENCE IT RESULTED THAT THE COMMON PEOPLE 
 
 DEGENERATED RAPIDLY IXTO A VULGAR MOB 1234567890 
 
 pursuing solely its material pleasures, and the 1234567890
 
 172 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 SCOTCH ROMAN 
 
 TEN POINT 
 
 [Solid] 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of 
 Carthage and of Corinth, they must have felt that they had 
 reached one of the great turning-points in the world's his- 
 tory. There was no longer any doubt that all the civilized 
 nations hitherto at variance, or at war, distracted by reason 
 of contrasts in population, in government, in language, in 
 traditions, would now be directed by the will of one people, 
 by the influence of one system of law, by the predominance 
 of a common language. 
 
 It was not the first time that this grand prospect had 
 been held forth to the world. When Alexander was yet a 
 young man, returning from his conquests in the Far East, 
 men must have anticipated, as very near, an empire not 
 unlike that of Rome; for the conquest of the West would 
 
 [Leaded] 
 
 have been no difficult matter to Alexander, with all the 
 resources of Asia under his hand. The successes of Pyrrhus, 
 with his small army, against the adult Rome of the third 
 century, fresh from her Samnite conquests, show what would 
 have been the successes of Alexander, with his giant genius 
 and armaments, against the younger and feebler republic. 
 And if the realization of the conqueror's dreams was hindered 
 by his early death, most of the early Diadochi had each for 
 many hard-fought years aspired to be his sole successor, 
 hoping to complete his work and regenerate the distracted 
 world by the potent influence of Hellenistic culture. 
 
 A world-empire including all the lands and nations about 
 MEDITERRANEAN SEA, REACHING THE FROZEN 
 NORTH AND THE TORRID SOUTH AS 1234567890 
 
 natural limits, exchanging the virgin l^SJf.561890
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE i?3 
 
 SCOTCH ROMAN 
 
 ELEVEN POINT 
 
 [Solid] 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of 
 Carthage and of Corinth, they must have felt that they 
 had reached one of the great turning-points in the world's 
 history. There was no longer any doubt that all the 
 civilized nations hitherto at variance, or at war, dis- 
 tracted by reason of contrasts in population, in govern- 
 ment, in language, in traditions, would now be directed 
 by the will of one people, by the influence of one system 
 of law, by the predominance of a common language. 
 
 It was not the first time that this grand prospect had 
 been held forth to the world. When Alexander was yet 
 a young man, returning from his conquests in the Far 
 
 [Leaded] 
 
 East, men must have anticipated, as very near, an empire 
 not unlike that of Rome ; for the conquest of the West 
 would have been no difficult matter to Alexander, with 
 all the resources of Asia under his hand. The successes 
 of Pyrrhus, with his small army, against the adult Rome 
 of the third century, fresh from her Samnite conquests, 
 show what would have been the successes of Alexander, 
 with his giant genius and armaments, against the younger 
 and feebler republic. And if the realization of the con- 
 queror's dreams was hindered by his early death, most of 
 the early Diadochi had each for many hard-fought years 
 ASPIRED TO BE HIS SOLE SUCCESSOR, HOP- 
 ING TO COMPLETE HIS WORK AND 1234567890 
 
 regenerate the distracted world by 123J^567890
 
 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 SCOTCH ROMAN 
 
 TWELVE POINT 
 
 [Solid] 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw 
 the fall of Carthage and of Corinth, they must 
 have felt that they had reached one of the great 
 turning-points in the world's history. There 
 was no longer any doubt that all the civilized 
 nations hitherto at variance, or at war, dis- 
 tracted by reason of contrasts in population, in 
 government, in language, in traditions, would 
 now be directed by the will of one people, by the 
 influence of one system of law, by the predomi- 
 nance of a common language. 
 
 It was not the first time that this grand pros- 
 pect had been held forth to the world. When 
 
 [Leaded] 
 
 Alexander was yet a young man, returning from 
 his conquests in the Far East, men must have 
 anticipated, as very near, an empire not unlike 
 that of Rome; for the conquest of the West 
 would have been no difficult matter to Alex- 
 ander, with all the resources of Asia under 
 his hand. The successes of Pyrrhus, with his 
 small army, against the adult Rome of the third 
 century, fresh from her Samnite conquests, show 
 THE YOUNGER AND FEEBLER RE- 
 PUBLIC. AND IF THE REALIZA- 1234567890 
 
 tion of the conqueror's dreams 1234567890
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 175 
 
 SCOTCH ROMAN 
 
 FOURTEEN POINT 
 [Solid] 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polyb- 
 ius saw the fall of Carthage and of Cor- 
 inth, they must have felt that they had 
 reached one of the great turning-points 
 in the world's history. There was no 
 longer any doubt that all the civilized 
 nations hitherto at variance, or at war, 
 distracted by reason of contrasts in pop- 
 ulation, in government, in language, in 
 traditions, would now be directed by the 
 will of one people, by the influence of 
 
 [Leaded] 
 
 one system of law, by the predominance 
 of a common language. 
 
 It was not the first time that this 
 grand prospect had been held forth to 
 the world. When Alexander was yet a 
 young man, returning from his con- 
 quest in the Far East, men must have 
 anticipated, as very near, an empire not 
 MATTER TO ALEXANDER, WIT 
 1234567890 all the resour 1234567890
 
 i 7 6 
 
 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 BOOKMAN OLD STYLE 
 
 [Solid] 
 
 'When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and of 
 Corinth, they must have felt that they had reached one of the great turning- 
 points in the world's history. There was no longer any doubt that all the 
 civilized nations hitherto at variance, or at war, distracted by reason of con- 
 trasts in population, in government, in language, in traditions, would now be 
 directed by the will of one people, by the influence of one system of law, by 
 the predominance of a common language. 
 
 It was not the first time that this grand prospect had been held forth 
 to the world. When Alexander was yet a young man, returning from his 
 conquests in the Far East, men must have anticipated, as very near, an empire 
 not unlike that of Rome; for the conquests of the 'West would have been no 
 difficult matter to Alexander, with all the resources of Asia under his hand. 
 The successes of Pyrrhus, with his small army, against the adult Rome of the 
 third century, fresh from her Samnite conquests, show what would have been 
 the successes of Alexander, with his giant genius and armaments, against the 
 younger and feebler republic. And if the realization of the conqueror's dreams 
 was hindered by his early death, most of the early Diadochi had each for 
 many hard-fought years aspired to be his sole successor, hoping to complete 
 his work and regenerate the distracted world by the potent influence of 
 Hellenistic culture. 
 
 A world-empire, including all the lands and nations about the Mediter- 
 ranean Sea, reaching to the frozen North and the torrid South as its natural 
 limits, exchanging the virgin ores of Spain for the long-sought spices of Araby 
 the Blest, was therefore no very wild imagination. But while those that had 
 conceived it and striven for it consciously had failed, who could have imagined 
 that it should drop almost suddenly, unexpectedly, by the force, not of genius, 
 
 [Leaded] 
 
 but of circumstances, into the hands of a people who attained it, not by the 
 direction of an Alexander, but by such national qualities as had gained for 
 Sparta precedence and respect, coupled with aggressive wars under the guise 
 of securing ever-widening frontiers, such as those which mark the rapid 
 strides of Philip's Macedonia ? 
 
 Any political thinker who witnessed this mighty outcome of half a century 
 might indeed feel uneasy at the result, if he were not, like most of the Stoics t 
 an optimist or a fatalist. There was, no doubt, the manifest gain of a great 
 peace throughout the world, of the real settlement of disputes by the arbitra- 
 tion of an umpire with power to enforce his will ; there was the consequent 
 development of wide commerce, with its diffusion, not only of wealth, but of 
 enlightenment. These material gains were indisputable, even though a dan- 
 gerous monopoly was being established, not merely through the enormous 
 advantages inseparable from Roman influence, but by the jealous destruction 
 of all those commercial centers which might have rivaled Rome by reason of 
 favored situation or old traditions of trade. 
 
 But far more serious was the patent fact, that neither the Roman people 
 nor their rulers had received any education to fit them for an imperial policy, 
 MATERIAL PLEASURES, AND THE DOMINANT CLASSES, WHEN VAST 
 <A eTVl RJ y r &; tf 1234567890
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 177 
 
 BOOKMAN OLD STYLE 
 
 EIGHT POINT 
 
 [Solid] 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage 
 and of Corinth, they must have felt that they had reached one of the 
 great turning-points in the world's history. There was no longer 
 any doubt that all the civilized nations, hitherto at variance, or at 
 war, distracted by reason of contrasts in population, in government, 
 in language, in traditions, would now be directed by the will of one 
 people, by the influence of one system of law, by the predominance 
 of a common language. 
 
 It was not the first time that this prospect had been held forth to 
 the world. When Alexander was yet a young man, returning from 
 his conquests in the Far East, men must have anticipated, as very 
 near, an empire not unlike that of Rome; for the conquest of the 
 West would have been no difficult matter to Alexander, with all the 
 resources of Asia under his hand. The successes of Pyrrhus, with 
 his small army, against the adult Rome of the third century, fresh 
 from her Samnite conquests, show what would have been the suc- 
 cesses of Alexander, with his giant genius and armaments, against 
 the younger and feebler republic. And if the realization of the con- 
 queror's dreams was hindered by his early death, most of the early 
 Diadochi had each for many hard-fought years aspired to be his sole 
 
 [Leaded] 
 
 successor, hoping to complete his work and regenerate the distracted 
 world by the potent influence of Hellenistic culture. 
 
 A world-empire, including all the lands and nations about the 
 Mediterranean Sea, reaching to the frozen North and the torrid South 
 as its natural limits, exchanging the virgin ores of Spain for the long- 
 sought spices of Araby the Blest, was therefore no very wild imagi- 
 nation. But while those that had conceived it and striven for it 
 consciously had failed, who could have imagined that it should drop 
 almost suddenly, unexpectedly, by the force, not of genins, but of 
 circumstances, into the hands of a people who attained it, not by the 
 directions of an Alexander, but by such national qualities as had 
 gained for Sparta precedence and respect, coupled with aggressive 
 wars under the guise of securing ever-widening frontiers, such as 
 those which mark the rapid strides of Philip's Macedonia? 
 THE MANIFEST GAIN OF A GREAT PEACE THROUGHO 
 cA oM Rj r y tJfe tf 1234567890
 
 178 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 BOOKMAN OLD STYLE 
 
 TEN POINT 
 
 [Solid] 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall 
 of Carthage and of Corinth, they must have felt that 
 they had reached one of the great turning-points in the 
 world's history. There was no longer any doubt that 
 all the civilized nations hitherto at variance, or at war, 
 distracted by reason of contrasts in population, in gov- 
 ernment, in language, in traditions, would now be di- 
 rected by the will of one people, by the influence of one 
 system of law, by the predominance of a common lan- 
 guage. 
 
 It was not the first time that this grand prospect had 
 been held forth to the world. When Alexander was yet 
 a young man, returning from his conquests in the Far 
 East, men must have anticipated, as very near, an 
 empire not unlike that of Rome; for the conquest of the 
 West would have been no difficult matter to Alexander, 
 
 [Leaded] 
 
 with all the resources of Asia under his hand. The 
 successes of Pyrrhus, with his small army, against the 
 adult Rome of the third century, fresh from her Samnite 
 conquests, show what would have been the successes 
 of Alexander, with his giant genius and armaments, 
 against the younger and feebler republic. And if the 
 realization of the conqueror's dreams was hindered by 
 his early death, most of the early Diadochi had each 
 for many hard-fought years aspired to be his sole suc- 
 cessor, hoping to complete his work and regenerate the 
 distracted world by the potent influence of Hellenistic 
 NORTH AND THE TORRID SOUTH AS ITS NAT- 
 o r r 1& & 1234567890
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 
 
 179 
 
 BOOKMAN OLD STYLE 
 
 TWELVE POINT 
 
 [Solid] 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw 
 the fall of Carthage and of Corinth, they must 
 have felt that they had reached one of the great 
 turning-points in the world's history. There 
 was no longer any doubt that all the civilized 
 nations hitherto at variance, or at war, dis- 
 tracted by reason of contrasts in population, in 
 government, in language, -in traditions, would 
 now be directed by the will of one people, by 
 the influence of one system of law, by the pre- 
 dominance of a common language. 
 
 It was not the first time that this grand 
 prospect had been held forth to the world. 
 
 [Leaded] 
 
 "When Alexander was yet a young man, return- 
 ing from his conquests in the Far East, men 
 must have anticipated, as very near, an empire 
 not unlike that of Rome; for the conquest of the 
 West would have been no difficult matter to 
 Alexander, with all the resources of Asia under 
 his hand. The successes of Pyrrhus, with his 
 small army, against the adult Rome of the third 
 century, fresh from her Samnite conquests, show 
 AGAINST THE YOUNGER AND FEEB 
 cTVl Rj> r y* ^e tf 1234567890
 
 i8o THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 PORSON GREEK 
 
 SIX POINT 
 
 Ta.Se Si pot irdvriat, <fj, Kpoicre, Aef oy ir<o airoj3e'/3i)Kc ra <K rov iv AeA^cus \prj. 
 OTijpi'ov <roi yap iij Aeyerai iravv ye TC0epa7reva p dat 6 'AiroAAau 1 Kai <7( irdvTo. tKtivtf 
 vti.96fi.tvov irpaTTiv. 'EBouAopuji' aV, & KGpe, OVTUS x ell/ ' > '^ 1 ' ^< iravra TavafTi'a 
 v0i> ({ ap\rj? TrpaTTui' irpo<nrivi\Br\v Tto 'ATrdAAwi'i. Ilai? 8; e0Tj 6 KOpo; 8ii5a<r<te 
 iracv yap iropaiofa. Aeyeis. 'On n-piroi' ftev, e^>j, a/ueA^aa?, ipiarav rov 6ebv tl TI iSto- 
 (tT)v, a.irtitti.pia/J.riv avrov el Svvaaro aAr)9ciieu'. 
 
 EIGHT POINT 
 
 Tdoe 5^ ^toi irdvrws, ?077, Kpoi<re, X^ov TTWS diro/3t(3i)KC rd ^K roO ^v 
 
 Ka.1 trc irdvra tKelvy irei66/jivov irpdrreiv. ''Epov\6fj.riv &v, & K0/>e, 
 fw vvv Si vdvra r&vavria 
 
 TEN POINT (ON NINE- OR TEN-POINT BODY) 
 
 TaSe 8 fJMt TravTtos, e^rj, Kpoiae, A.eov TTWS aTroySe^xc TO, ex 
 TOV ev AcX^>ots Xpya'T-rjpiov croi yap S^ Xeycrai 7ra^ yc re&pa- 
 6 'ATToAAwi/ KCU o-e Travra cKctvu 7ret^o/u,i/ov vparruv- 
 d/iTjv av, a) Krpe, OVTO>S X CIV ' ^^ ^* iraj/ra rdvavrta c C 
 
 ELEVEN POINT 
 
 TaSe 8e fiot Travrays, <j>rj, Kpotcre, \eov TTW? a 
 ra etc rov ev Ae\^>ot? %pr)0'rrjpiov' crol yap Brj \eyerat rrdvv 
 ye reOeparceva'daL 6 'ATro'XXwi' Kai <re rrdvra eiceivcp i c <7 
 
 TWELVE POINT 
 
 TaSe 8e jtiot Travrw?, 6^)17, Kpoicre, \eov TTW? d-Tro- 
 jSefirfKe TO, e/c TOV ei/ AeX^>ots -^prjcrTTjpiov crol yap 
 or) Xeyerat Trai/v ye reOepairevo-OaL 6 'ATroXXwv /cat 
 MONOTYPE 
 
 ELEVEN POINT MONOTYPE 
 
 TASe Se juot Travrcos, ^>T;, Kpottre, Xe^oj/ TTCOS a.iro@(3r]K6 
 TO. IK rov iv AeX<ots xP r ) a " J "np' l - ov ' <roi yap 8rj Xeycrat Travv 
 ye redepairevffdai, 6 'AroXXcoi' Kai ere Trd^ra eKelvu Trei.d6fj.evov
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 181 
 
 ANTIQUE GREEK 
 
 EIGHT POINT 
 
 TdSe 8e p.oi irdvrws, ({>r], Kpotcre, Xlov TTUS d-n-opepT|K rd 6K rov 
 cv AcX<|>ois XP T 1 " TT 1P^ OV ' " ' 1 "Y*P STJ Xe*ytTai irdw -ye TcOcpatrcvcrOai 6 
 *Air6XXv Ka <rt iravra KeCvw iri66|j.{vov irpd-rmv. 'Epov\6[jLT)v av, w 
 Kvpc, OVTWS Xiv vvv 8 irdvTa rdvavrCa cvOvs 4^ *PX''l s irpdrraiv irpoar- 
 U 'A-rroXXuvi. IIws S J c(|>i) 6 Kvpos 8(Sa<rK* irdw -yap 
 
 ELEVEN POINT 
 
 TdSe 8e |ioi iravros, <J>ii, Kpoiae, Xcj-ov TTWS dirope 
 rd K TOV ev AeX4>o Is XP 1 ! " 7 " 1 !?^ 011 ' "^ "Y-P ^ 
 irdvi) -ye TeBcpaTrcvorOai 6 ' AirdXXwv KCU <r irdvra Ktvco 
 iri06|JLVov irpaTTiv. 'Epov\6|XT|v av, S Kvpc, OUTCDS 
 
 INSCRIPTION GREEK 
 
 QPAMMATEY^ANTAKAITHC<t>IAO^EBA^TOY 
 HEBREW 
 
 nnb :D"n$fli uistJia^ pns bsten IIDTO nnpb :nrn ^ 
 TihjT n^b DDT-I osn y^TC"! : n^Ttti n?ji i?bb' ngny o^n 
 
 NINE POINT 
 
 nb'E Trr-p rtabis *buj 
 
 T I" 
 
 ctia nnpb jnra ^^^ rh 
 
 j- '-** rr ' ft' I T 
 
 owsb nnb :
 
 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 NESTORIAN SYRIAC 
 
 NINE POINT 
 
 _ 
 
 I - 1 * ' I'f-^J-v. n j-llc] "" ^ i " i- 
 _ *- 
 
 ^I^^ g] ^VslV^O .O3t-^ '1 " I . 1^ V^V'-i . 
 
 . ^ X. ' \ ^ 
 
 .]")) ^ \ 
 
 P. 
 -; ( V"<a j Ti * 
 
 ARABIC 
 
 NINE POINT 
 
 -- 
 
 r 
 
 wo ^ JutftJI UoU JL4-cio xal 
 
 ETHIOPIC 
 
 NINE POINT 
 
 07-C : 
 
 ^ft : 
 
 t : ft"7.f t : nlA : Xmft-drkC : -00-^1 : XA : 
 
 ft : hC 
 : X1H : 
 
 C : iD-Xf : W : rt-OX ; h<n> ;
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 183 
 
 MISCELLANEOUS SIGNS 
 
 SIX POINT 
 
 X-* <* + -& 
 
 EIGHT POINT 
 
 :::-H-<AD^v'#' ? ' 
 
 NINE POINT 
 
 :: -: Z Z* - / / || | X 
 
 ELEVEN POINT 
 
 rrb n> q / 
 
 SEVEN POINT 
 FIVE POINT = + -1- X " ' " # TWELVE POINT 
 
 = + - 
 
 / 
 
 Jj 
 
 CANCELED LETTERS AND FIGURES 
 
 EIGHT POINT
 
 1 84 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 MONOTYPE MISCELLANEOUS SIGNS 
 
 Six Point 
 + -X + -< ?!? /'*ttH%iJIJIJ 
 
 o e e e s N 
 
 Seven Point 
 + - X + - * > 
 
 Eight Point 
 
 Z^AA||DO^^<> = ^^/' 
 + _ x .. = o, ? , , < .c /% * tt | t 
 
 Nine Point 
 Z*^*A*A*||OO^ <*>* = ^^=/-^*^*~ <*> 
 
 + -x- = 0/ ?.'f|/%*t1:1fHitfHi 
 tP)<> 41? 1 ?? 1 ! 1 
 
 * 8 point on Q point. 
 
 Ten Point 
 
 Eleven Point 
 
 + ._ x ^ = 0/ ?^' C3 |/*t1:1l%HitfH^ 
 
 3./" dhmsmgM <^ ^ 
 
 Twelve Point 
 
 +-x = -- / 0/ *tt1 ilUiflJH
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 
 
 185 
 
 MONOTYPE SUPERIOR AND INFERIOR 
 
 LETTERS AND FIGURES 
 
 OLD STYLE 
 
 Six Point 
 
 Seven Point 
 
 1134567890 , 34 
 
 Eight Point 
 
 abed ef ghi j k 1 m no p q r e t u T w x y I 1234 
 1234567890 
 
 Nine Point 
 
 abode fghi j k 1 m n o p q r 8 tu vwxyi 1234567890 
 
 1334567890 
 
 Ten Point 
 
 abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvw ab c d e f ghi j k I mn o p q f i t u ,w 
 
 xyz abcdefghijklmnopqrs 
 
 tvvwxyz 123456-890 
 
 Eleven Point 
 abcdefghijklmnopqrstuv 
 
 w x y 1234567890 
 
 MODERN 
 
 SUPERIOR 
 
 Six Point 
 
 1234S8-8JO 
 
 Seven Point 
 Eight Point 
 
 12345678,0 
 
 Nine Point 
 
 1234567890 
 
 Eleven Point 
 1*34567890 
 
 123466 7S90 
 
 1234567890 
 
 Ten Point 
 
 SUPERIOR 
 1234567890 +-X-i- = -(] 
 
 INFERIOR 
 abcdefghijklmnopqrs 
 
 * V * 123486789( 
 
 =<> ;: " 
 
 t u v w
 
 1 86 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 CASLON OLD STYLE 
 
 EIGHTEEN POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like 1234 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE 
 
 TWENTY-TWO POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks 5678 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT 
 
 TWENTY-FOUR POINT 
 
 THIRTY POINT 
 
 THIRTY-SIX POINT 
 
 When thoug 7890 
 THE FIRST TIM
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 187 
 
 CASLON OLD STYLE 
 
 FORTY-EIGHT POINT 
 
 When th 1234 
 THEFIRST 
 
 CASLON OLD STYLE ITALIC 
 
 EIGHTEEN POINT 
 
 If^hen thoughtful Greeks like Pol 1 234. 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE 
 
 TWENTY-TWO POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like 5678 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT 
 
 TWENTY-FOUR POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks 9012 
 THE FIRST TIME THA 
 
 THIRTY POINT
 
 1 88 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 NO. 8 OLD STYLE 
 
 TWENTY-TWO POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Gre 1234 
 THE FIRST TIME TH 
 
 TWENTY-FOUR POINT 
 
 When thoughtful 5678 
 THE FIRST TIME 
 
 THIRTY-TWO POINT 
 
 When thoug 9012 
 THE FIRST TIM 
 
 FORTY-FOUR POINT 
 
 When th 345 
 THE FIRST
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 189 
 
 NO. 8 OLD STYLE ITALIC 
 
 TWENTY-TWO POINT 
 
 TWENTY-FOUR POINT 
 
 THIRTY-TWO POINT 
 
 thou go 1 2 
 FIRST T 
 
 FORTY-FOUR POINT 
 
 When 
 THE FIRST 
 
 ELZEVIR ITALIC 
 
 TEN POINT 
 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE ^ T) IM 5^ ^ 12345
 
 1 90 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 CONDENSED OLD STYLE 
 
 EIGHT POINT 
 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD 12345 
 
 NINE POINT 
 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT H 67890 
 
 TEN POINT 
 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROS 12345 
 
 TWELVE POINT 
 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE G 67890 
 
 SIXTEEN POINT 
 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE G 1234 
 
 EIGHTEEN POINT 
 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT T 5678 
 
 TWENTY POINT 
 
 THE FIRST TIME T 9012 
 
 TWENTY-TWO POINT 
 
 THE FIRST TIME T 3456 
 
 TWENTY-FOUR POINT 
 
 THE FIRST TIM 7890 
 
 TWENTY-EIGHT POINT 
 
 THE FIRST TI 1234
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 191 
 
 CONDENSED OLD STYLE 
 
 THIRTY-TWO POINT 
 
 THE FIRST 5678 
 
 THIRTY-SIX POINT 
 
 THE FIRS 9012 
 
 FORTY POINT 
 
 THE FIR 3456 
 
 EXTENDED OLD STYLE 
 
 TWENTY-FOUR POINT 
 
 When thought 123 
 THE FIRST TIME 
 
 THIRTY-TWO POINT 
 
 When tho 45 
 THE FIRST I
 
 1 92 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 EXTENDED OLD STYLE 
 
 FORTY-EIGHT POINT 
 
 THE FIR 
 
 FRENCH OLD STYLE 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and of Corinth 12345 
 WHEN THOUGHTFUL GREEKS LIKE POLYBIUS SAW THE FALL OF CARTHAGE AND 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD FORTH 
 
 SEVEN POINT 
 
 WHEN THOUGHTFUL GREEKS LIKE POLYBIUS SAW THE FALL 67890 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD 
 
 EIGHT POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Garth 12345 
 WHEN THOUGHTFUL GREEKS LIKE POLYBIUS SAW THE FALL 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD B 
 
 TEN POINT 
 
 WHEN THOUGHTFUL GREEKS LIKE POLYBIUS SAW 67890 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT 
 
 TWELVE POINT 
 
 WHEN THOUGHTFUL GREEKS LIKE POLY 12345- 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PRO
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 193 
 
 FRENCH OLD STYLE 
 
 FOURTEEN POINT 
 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GR 67890 
 
 SIXTEEN POINT 
 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE 1234 
 
 TWENTY POINT 
 
 THE FIRST TIME T 5678 
 
 TWENTY-FOUR POINT 
 
 THE FIRST TIME 901 
 
 THIRTY POINT 
 
 THE FIRST TI 234 
 
 THIRTY-SIX POINT 
 
 THE FIRST 56 
 
 FORTY-EIGHT POINT 
 
 THE FI 78 
 
 SIXTY POINT 
 
 THE 901
 
 194 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 CHELTENHAM OLD STYLE 
 
 When thoughtful Greek* like Polybiui saw the fall of Carthage and of Corinth, they mu 1 2345 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD FO 
 
 EIGHT POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and of C 67890 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEE 
 
 TEN POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Ca 12345 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPEC 
 
 TWELVE POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the f 67890 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PR 
 
 ACCENTED LETTERS SIX TO TWELVE POINT 
 
 AAA 111 660 000 g N 
 
 aaaa eee iiii 6666 u u ft ii 5 n 
 CHELTENHAM OLD STYLE ITALIC 
 
 SIX POINT 
 
 W hen thoughtful Greeks like Polubius saw the fall of Carthage and of Corinth, they 12345 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD 
 
 EIGHT POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and 67890 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BE 
 
 TEN POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of 12345 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPE 
 
 TWELVE POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw th 67890 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND P
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 195 
 
 CHELTENHAM OLD STYLE ITALIC 
 
 FOURTEEN POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polyhius 1234 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GR 
 
 EIGHTEEN POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like 5678 
 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT T 
 
 TWENTY-FOUR POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greek 901 
 
 THE FIRST TIME TH 
 
 THIRTY POINT 
 
 When thoughtful 1908 
 
 THIRTY-SIX POINT 
 
 SPECIAL CHARACTERS ALL SIZES 
 
 ACCENTED LETTERS SIX TO TWELVE POINT 
 
 A o u n 
 
 ad a a e e e ill dodo u u u u f n
 
 196 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 CHELTENHAM WIDE 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the (all of Carthage and of Co 12345 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD FO 
 
 EIGHT POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage 67890 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEE 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fa 12345 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPEC 
 
 TWELVE POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw 67890 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PR 
 
 FOURTEEN POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polyb 1 234 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRA 
 
 EIGHTEEN POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks lik 5678 
 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT TH 
 
 TWENTY-FOUR POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Gr 90 1 2 
 
 THE FIRST TIME THA
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 197 
 
 CHELTENHAM WIDE 
 
 THIRTY POINT 
 
 When thoughtful 345 
 
 THE FIRST TIME T 
 
 THIRTY-SIX POINT 
 
 When though 678 
 
 THE FIRST TIM 
 
 FORTY-TWO POINT 
 
 When thou 90 
 
 THE FIRST T 
 
 FORTY-EIGHT POINT 
 
 When tho 1 2 
 
 ACCENTED LETTERS SIX TO TWELVE POINT 
 
 AAA EEE III 00 000 Q ft 
 aaaa eee ii 666 u u ft ti q n
 
 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHIACGO PRESS 
 
 CHELTENHAM CONDENSED 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the (all of Carthage and of Corinth, they must ha 12345 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD FORTH TO THE W 
 
 EIGHT POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and of Corint 67890 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD FORT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage 1 2345 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEE 
 
 TWELVE POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of 67890 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT H 
 
 FOURTEEN POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw 1 2345 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PRO 
 
 EIGHTEEN POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Pol 67890 
 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRA 
 
 TWENTY-FOUR POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks 1 234 
 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT TH
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 199 
 
 CHELTENHAM BOLD EXTRA CONDENSED 
 
 SIX POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and of Corinth, they must hare felt that the 12345 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD FORTH TO THE WORLD. WHEN AL 
 
 EIGHT POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and of Corinth, they most 67890 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD FORTH TO THE WO 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and of 12345 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD FO 
 
 TWELVE POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Cartha 67890 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HE 
 
 FOURTEEN POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fal 12345 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HA 
 
 EIGHTEEN POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius s 67890 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PRO
 
 200 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 CHELTENHAM BOLD EXTRA CONDENSED 
 
 TWENTY-FOUR POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Po 123 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GR 
 
 THIRTY POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks 1 456 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE 
 
 THIRTY-SIX POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Gr 789 
 THE FIRST THE THAT
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 2OI 
 
 CHELTENHAM BOLD CONDENSED 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and of Corinth, they must 12345 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD FORTH TO THE W 
 
 EIGHT POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and of Cor 67890 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD FOR 
 
 TEN POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Car 12345 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HELD F 
 
 TWELVE POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall 67890 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT H 
 
 FOURTEEN POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius sa 12345 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PRO 
 
 EIGHTEEN POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like P 67890 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRA
 
 202 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 CHELTENHAM BOLD CONDENSED 
 
 TWENTY-FOUR POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks 1234 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT T 
 
 THIRTY POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Gre 567 
 THE FIRST TIME THA 
 
 THIRTY-SIX POINT 
 
 When thoughtful 890 
 THE FIRST TIME T
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 203 
 
 CHELTENHAM BOLD 
 
 When thoughtful Greek* like Poly bi us saw the fall of Carthage and o 12345 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD F 
 
 EIGHT POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of C 67890 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BE 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw t 12345. 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPE 
 
 TWELVE POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius s 67890 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PR 
 
 FOURTEEN POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Po 1234 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GR 
 
 EIGHTEEN POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks 5678 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT TH 
 
 TWENTY-FOUR POINT 
 
 When thoughtful G 901 
 THE FIRST TIME THA
 
 204 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 CHELTENHAM BOLD 
 
 THIRTY POINT 
 
 When thoughtf 234 
 THE FIRST TIME T 
 
 THIRTY-SIX POINT 
 
 When thoug 567 
 
 THE FIRST TIM 
 
 FORTY-TWO POINT 
 
 When thou 89 
 
 THE FIRST T 
 
 FORTY-EIGHT POINT 
 
 When th 23 
 THE FIRST
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 205 
 
 CHELTENHAM BOLD 
 
 SIXTY POINT 
 
 When 14 
 
 THE FIR 
 
 SEVENTY-TWO POINT 
 
 ACCENTED LETTERS SIX TO TWELVE POINT 
 
 AAA EE III 66O 000 C N aaaa eeee ml 6666 uuuii ? n 
 CHELTENHAM BOLD CONDENSED 
 
 SEVENTY-TWO POINT 
 
 When 6
 
 206 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 CHELTENHAM BOLD CONDENSED 
 
 NINETY-SIX POINT 
 
 Whe7 
 
 ONE-HUNDRED-AND-TWENTY POINT 
 
 ThiO 
 
 ONE-HUNDRED-AND-FORTY-FOUR POINT 
 
 Wil
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 
 
 CHELTENHAM BOLD CONDENSED 
 
 ONE-HTJNDRED-AND-EIGHTY POINT 
 
 TWO-HtTNDRED-AND-SIXTEEN POINT
 
 208 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 CHELTENHAM BOLD EXTRA CONDENSED 
 
 SEVENTY-TWO POINT 
 
 When 
 
 NINETY-SIX POINT 
 
 Tho96 
 
 ONE-HUNDRED-AND-TWENTY POINT 
 
 Gre
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 209 
 
 CHELTENHAM BOLD EXTENDED 
 
 SIX POINT 
 
 'When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the 1234S6 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD 
 
 EIGHT POINT 
 
 'When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw 6789 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPE 
 
 TEN POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Po 1234 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND 
 
 TWELVE POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks lik 1234 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GR 
 
 FOURTEEN POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Gree 5678 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT TH 
 
 EIGHTEEN POINT 
 
 When thoughtful 1234 
 THE FIRST TIME TH 
 
 TWENTY-FOUR POINT 
 
 When thou 1234 
 THE FIRST TIME 
 
 THIRTY POINT 
 
 When tho 567 
 THE FIRST TI
 
 210 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 CHELTENHAM BOLD ITALIC 
 
 SIX POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greek* like Polybiut taw the fall of Carthage a 12345 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD 
 
 EIGHT POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fatt of C 67890 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BE 
 
 TEN POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw 12345 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROS 
 
 TWELVE POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius 67890 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND P 
 
 FOURTEEN POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like P 12345 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GR 
 
 EIGHTEEN POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks 5678 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT T 
 
 TWENTY-FOUR POINT 
 
 When thoughtful 9012 
 THE FIRST TIME TH
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 211 
 
 CHELTENHAM BOLD ITALIC 
 
 THIRTY POINT 
 
 When thought 345 
 THE FIRST TIME 
 
 THIRTY-SIX POINT 
 
 When thou 678 
 THE FIRST TI 
 
 FORTY-TWO POINT 
 
 When tho 90 
 
 THE FIRST 
 
 FORTY-EIGHT POINT 
 
 When th 12 
 THE FIRS 
 
 ACCENTED LETTERS SIX TO TWELVE POINT 
 
 Add e i Odd Uuii ft n
 
 212 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 CLARENDON 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Folybius saw the fall of Carthage an 12345 
 THE FIEST TIME THAT THE GEAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HEL 
 
 NINE POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of 67890 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GEAND PEOSPECT HA 
 
 ELEVEN POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius sa 12345 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PRO 
 
 SEVEN POINT FIGURES 
 
 1234567890 
 
 IONIC 
 
 SIX POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Car 12345 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD B 
 
 TITLE GOTHIC 
 
 SIX POINT NO. SEVENTY-ONE 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD FORT 12345 
 
 SIX POINT NO. SEVENTY-TWO 
 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN 67890
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 213 
 
 DELLA ROBBIA 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and of Corinth, they 12345 
 THE FIRST TIME .THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN SET FORTH 
 
 EIGHT POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and of 67890 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN S 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall o 12345 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPE 
 
 TWELVE POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw th 67890 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PR 
 
 FOURTEEN POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybi 1234 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE G 
 
 EIGHTEEN POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks li 5678 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT T 
 
 TWENTY-FOUR POINT 
 
 When thoughtful G 9012 
 THE FIRST TIME TH
 
 214 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 DELLA ROBBIA 
 
 THIRTY POINT 
 
 When thought 3456 
 THE FIRST TIME 
 
 THIRTY-SIX POINT 
 
 THE FIRST TI 
 
 FORTY-TWO POINT 
 
 When tho 123 
 
 THE FIRST I 
 
 FORTY-EIGHT POINT 
 
 When th 45 
 THE FIRST
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 215 
 
 GUSHING OLD STYLE 
 
 FOURTEEN POINT NO. ONE 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius 12345 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND P 
 
 FOURTEEN POINT NO. TWO 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like P 67890 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GR 
 
 EIGHTEEN POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks 1 1234 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT TH 
 
 TWENTY-FOUR POINT 
 
 When thoughtful G 567 
 THE FIRST TIME TH 
 
 THIRTY-SIX POINT 
 
 When thoug 890 
 THE FIRST TI 
 
 FORTY-EIGHT POINT 
 
 When tho 12 
 THE FIRST
 
 2i6 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 CENTURY EXPANDED 
 
 SIX POINT 
 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HEL 12345 
 
 EIGHT POINT 
 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT 67890 
 
 TEN POINT 
 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PRO 12345 
 
 ELEVEN POINT 
 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND 67890 
 
 TWELVE POINT 
 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAN 12345 
 
 FOURTEEN POINT 
 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE 1234 
 
 EIGHTEEN POINT 
 
 THE FIRST TIME THA 5678 
 
 TWENTY-FOUR POINT 
 
 THE FIRST TIME 9012 
 
 THE FIRST TI 345
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 217 
 
 GOUDY OLD STYLE 
 
 SIX POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and ot Corint 12345 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN SET FORT 
 
 EIGHT POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Cartha 67890 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BE 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall 12345 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT 
 
 TWELVE POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw 67890 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PRO 
 
 FOURTEEN POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Poly 12345 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRA 
 
 EIGHTEEN POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks 67890 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT TH 
 
 TWENTY-FOUR POINT 
 
 When thoughtful G 1234 
 THE FIRST TIME THA 
 
 THIRTY POINT 
 
 When thoughtf 5678 
 THE FIRST TIME ?
 
 2i8 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 GOUDY OLD STYLE 
 
 THIRTY-SIX POINT 
 
 When thou 1234 
 THE FIRST TI ? 
 
 FORTY-TWO POINT 
 
 When tho 567 
 THE FIRST T 
 
 FORTY-EIGHT POINT 
 
 When th 89 
 THE FIRST 
 
 GOUDY OLD STYLE ITALIC 
 
 When thoughtful Qreeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and of Corinth, they 12345 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE QRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN SET FORTH 
 
 EIGHT POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Qreeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and 67890 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE QRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 219 
 
 GOUDY OLD STYLE ITALIC 
 
 TEN POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Qreeks like Polybius saw the fall o} 12345 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE QRAND PROSPECT 
 
 TWELVE POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Qreeks like Polybius saw the 67890 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE QRAND PROS 
 
 FOURTEEN POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Qreeks like Polybius s 1234 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE QRAN 
 
 EIGHTEEN POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Qreeks like 5678 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE 
 
 TWENTY-FOUR POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Qree 9012 
 THE FIRST TIME THA 
 
 THIRTY POINT 
 
 When thoughtful 3456 
 
 THE FIRST TIME T 
 
 THIRTY-SIX POINT 
 
 When thought 789 
 
 THE FIRST TIM
 
 220 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 GOUDY BOLD 
 
 SIX POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and of C 12345 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN SET F 
 
 EIGHT POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Ca 67890 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw th 12345 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSP 
 
 TWELVE POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius 67890 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND P 
 
 FOURTEEN POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Po 1234 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GR 
 
 EIGHTEEN POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks 5678 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT T 
 
 TWENTY-FOUR POINT 
 
 When thoughtful 9012 
 THE FIRST TIME TH
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 221 
 
 GOUDY BOLD 
 
 THIRTY POINT 
 
 When though 3456 
 THE FIRST TIME 
 
 THIRTY-SIX POINT 
 
 When thou 789 
 THE FIRST TI 
 
 FORTY-TWO POINT 
 
 When tho 123 
 THE FIRST I 
 
 FORTY-EIGHT POINT 
 
 When th 45 
 THE FIRS
 
 222 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 PACKARD 
 
 EIGHT POINT 
 
 When tKougKtful Greeks like Polybius saw tke fall of Carthage and of C 12345 
 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN 
 
 TEN POINT 
 
 WHen tKougKtful Greeks like PolyKius saw tKe fall of Ca 67890 
 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT 
 
 TWELVE POINT 
 
 When tKougKtful Greeks like Polybius saw tKe fall 12345 
 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROS 
 
 FOURTEEN POINT 
 
 WHen tKougKtful Greeks like Polybius s 67890 
 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND 
 
 EIGHTEEN POINT 
 
 WKen tKougKtful Greeks like P 11345 
 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE 
 
 TWENTY-FOUR POINT 
 
 WKen tKougKtful Greek 67890 
 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT 
 
 THIRTY POINT 
 
 WKen tHougHtful G 
 
 THE FIRST TIME T
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 223 
 
 PACKARD 
 
 THIRTY-SIX POINT 
 
 WKen thought 4567 
 
 THE FIRST TIM 
 
 FORTY-EIGHT POINT 
 
 When tko 890 
 
 THE FIRST 
 
 SPECIAL CHARACTERS ALL SIZES 
 
 CLOISTER BLACK 
 
 TWELVE POINT 
 
 ttougijrtul <greefe* like $olpfc 1234567890
 
 224 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 DE VINNE 
 
 SIX POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Qreeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and o 12345 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD FO 
 
 EIGHT POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of 67890 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD B 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the 12345 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT 
 
 TWELVE POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Qreeks like Polyb 67890 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND 
 
 EIGHTEEN POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greek 1234 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT T 
 
 TWENTY-FOUR POINT 
 
 When thoughtful 567 
 THE FIRST TIME T 
 
 THIRTY POINT 
 
 When though 890 
 THE FIRST TIM
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 225 
 
 DE VINNE 
 
 THIRTY-SIX POINT 
 
 When thou 12 
 THE FIRST S 
 
 FORTY-TWO POINT 
 
 When th 34 
 THE FIRST 
 
 SIXTY POINT 
 
 When 15 
 THE FI
 
 226 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 DE VINNE 
 
 SEVENTY-TWO POINT 
 
 Whei6 
 THE F 
 
 SEVENTY-TWO POINT A 
 
 VISE
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 227 
 
 DEVINNE 
 
 NINETY-SIX POINT 
 
 Oh 8 
 HIM 
 
 ONE-HUNDRED-AND-TWENTY POINT 
 
 Bel
 
 228 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 DEVINNE CONDENSED 
 
 SEVENTY-TWO POINT 
 
 Whenl 
 
 NINETY-SIX POINT 
 
 ONE-HUNDRED-AND-TWENIY POINT 
 
 His 3
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 229 
 
 DE VINNE CONDENSED 
 
 ONE-HUNDRED-AND-EIGHTY POINT 
 
 JENSON OLD STYLE ITALIC 
 
 FORTY-EIGHT POINT 
 
 BOLD-FACE ITALIC 
 
 TF7j.cn thoug7itful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Cartha 
 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN 
 
 NINE POINT 
 
 IVlien thotightful Greeks like Polybius saiv the 6789O 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPE
 
 230 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 SCOTCH ROMAN 
 
 EIGHTEEN POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks 1234 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks 123 
 
 TWENTY-FOUR POINT 
 
 When thoughtful 5678 
 THE FIRST TIME T 
 
 When thoughtful Gr 1 
 
 THIRTY POINT 
 
 When thought 901 
 THE FIRST TIM 
 
 THIRTY-SIX POINT 
 
 When thou 456 
 THE FIRST T
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 231 
 
 SCOTCH ROMAN 
 
 FORTY-EIGHT POINT 
 
 When th 78 
 
 THE FIRS 
 
 SIXTY POINT 
 
 When 90 
 THE FI 
 
 SEVENTY-TWO POINT 
 
 Whel2
 
 232 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 LIGHT-FACE GOTHIC 
 
 When thoughtful Greek* like Polybiu* taw the fall of Carthage and of Corinth, they 12345 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD FORTH TO 
 
 EIGHT POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage 67890 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HE 
 
 SIX POINT COMBINATION GOTHIC NO. ONE HUNDRED AND SIXTY-THREE 
 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD FORTH TO THE WORLD 12345 
 
 GOTHIC CONDENSED 
 
 SIX POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and of Corinth, th 1 2345 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD FORTH TO TH 
 
 EIGHT POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthag 67890 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HE 
 
 TEN POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall 12345 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD 
 
 TWELVE POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius sa 6789 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPE 
 
 EIGHTEEN POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like P 1234 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRA 
 
 TWENTY-TWO POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks 5678 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE G
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 233 
 
 COPPERPLATE 
 
 SIX POINT 
 NO. ONE 
 
 THC FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD FORTH TO THE WOR 1234* 
 
 NO. TWO 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD FORTH 6789O 
 
 NO. THREE 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN H 12345 
 
 NO. FOUR 
 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT 6789O 
 
 TWELVE POINT 
 NO. ONE 
 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PR 12345 
 
 NO. TWO 
 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GR 6789O 
 
 WHITTIER 
 
 TWELVE POINT 
 NO. THREE 
 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT 12345 
 
 NO. FOUR 
 
 THE FIRST TIME T 6789 
 
 EIGHTEEN POINT 
 NO. ONE 
 
 THE FIRST TIM 1234 
 
 NO. TWO 
 
 THE FIRST T 1678 
 
 BLACK GOTHIC 
 
 SIX POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Carthage and of Corln 67890
 
 234 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 LINING GOTHIC CONDENSED 
 
 SIX POINT 
 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD FORTH TO THE WORL 1234S6789G 
 
 EIGHT POINT 
 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD FORTH TO THE WOR 12345 
 
 TEN POINT 
 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD FORTH 67890 
 
 TWELVE POINT 
 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN 12345 
 
 FOURTEEN POINT 
 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HA 6789 
 
 EIGHTEEN POINT 
 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROS 1234 
 
 TWENTY-FOUR POINT 
 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GR 5678 
 
 THIRTY POINT 
 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT T 90 1 2 
 
 THIRTY-SIX POINT 
 
 THE FIRST TIME TH 3456 
 
 FORTY-TWO POINT 
 
 THE FIRST TIME 789
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 235 
 
 LINING GOTHIC CONDENSED 
 
 FORTY-EIGHT POINT 
 
 THE FIRST Tl 123 
 
 SIXTY POINT 
 
 SEVENTY-TWO POINT 
 
 THE FIRST 6 
 
 MONARCH 
 
 SIXTY POINT 
 
 When 12 
 THE FIR
 
 236 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 INTERCHANGEABLE GOTHIC 
 
 SIX POINT 
 NO. ONE 
 
 THK MUST TIME THAT TMB GRAND PROSPECT HAD BCCN HELD FORTH TO THE * 
 
 NO. TWO 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD FORTH TO THE 67B9O 
 
 NO. THREE 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD 12345 
 
 NO. FOUR 
 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BE 6789O 
 
 NO. FIVE 
 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPE 12345 
 
 EIGHT POINT 
 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND P 67890 
 
 TEN POINT 
 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GR 1 234 
 
 TWELVE POINT 
 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT 567 
 
 EIGHTEEN POINT 
 
 THE FIRST TIM 89 
 
 TWENTY-FOUR POINT 
 
 THE FIRST 3
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 237 
 
 ENGRAVER'S BOLD 
 
 SIX POINT 
 NO. ONE 
 
 THK FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD FORTH TO THE WOR 12O4B 
 
 NO. TWO 
 TIIK FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD FORTH GT8OO 
 
 NO. THREE 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE CRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN 18348 
 
 NO. FOUR 
 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT OT89O 
 
 NO HVE 
 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAIVD PR 12345 
 
 TWELVE POINT 
 NO. ONE 
 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE 6T89O 
 
 NO. TWO 
 
 THE FIRST TIME THA 1234 
 
 NO. THREE 
 
 THE FIRST TIME S6T8 
 
 ADVERTISING FIGURES 
 
 EIGHTEEN POINT NO. ONE 
 
 1234567890 
 
 EIGHTEEN POINT NO. TWO 
 
 1234567890 
 
 THIRTY POINT 
 
 1234567890 
 
 THIRTY POINT OUTLINE
 
 238 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 LITHO ROMAN 
 
 SIX POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius snw the fall of Cart 12345 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEE 
 
 EIGHT POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the 6789O 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT 
 
 TEN POINT 
 
 When 41m uglit ful Greeks like Polyh 12345 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND 
 
 TWELVE POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like P 6789O 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GR 
 
 FOURTEEN POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks 1 1234 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT TH 
 
 EIGHTEEN POINT 
 
 When thoughtful G 5678 
 THE FIRST TIME THA 
 
 TWENTY-FOUR POINT 
 
 When though 9012 
 THE FIRST TIME
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 239 
 
 CONDENSED TITLE 
 
 EIGHT POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of C 1908 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD B 
 
 TEN POINT 
 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PR 1908 
 
 MACFARLAND 
 
 TEN POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the 12345 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPE 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the 12345 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPEC 
 
 FOURTEEN POINT 
 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE 1234 
 
 PAUL REVERE 
 
 EIGHT POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of Garth 67890 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEE 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of 123456 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BE 
 
 NINE POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of 12345 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD 
 
 TEN POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fa 67890 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT
 
 240 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 REPRODUCING TYPEWRITER 
 
 SIX POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw the fall of 
 Carthage and of Corinth, they must have felt that the/ had 
 reached one of the great turning-points in the world's 
 history. There was no longer any doubt that all the 
 civilized nations hitherto at variance, or at war, 12345 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD BEEN HELD FOR 
 
 NEW MODEL ELITE REMINGTON TYPEWRITER 
 
 TEN POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Polybius 
 saw the fall of Carthage and of Corinth, 
 they must have felt that they had reached 
 one of the great turning-points in t 67890 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPECT HAD 
 
 REMINGTON TYPEWRITER 
 
 TWELVE POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Poly- 
 bius saw the fall of Carthage and 
 of Corinth, they must have felt that 
 they had reached one of the gr 12345 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROSPE 
 
 NEW MODEL REMINGTON TYPEWRITER 
 
 TWELVE POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Poly- 
 "bius saw the fall of Carthage and 
 of Corinth, they must have felt 
 that they had reached one of 67890 
 THE FIRST TIME THAT THE GRAND PROS
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 241 
 
 BRADLEY TEXT 
 
 TEN POINT 
 
 When thoughtful Greeks like Poiybius $<w the fall of 12345 
 
 TWELVE POINT 
 
 Often thoughtful Greeks like Polybius saw th 12345 
 
 EIGHTEEN POINT 
 
 Ulhen thoughtful Greeks like Pol 1234 
 
 TWENTY-FOUR POINT 
 
 Uihen thoughtful Greek 567$ 
 
 TUDOR BLACK 
 
 SIX POINT 
 
 TKHben tbougbtful rcefcs Hfce polbiu0 saw tbe (all of Cartbage ant> of Cor 12345 
 
 EIGHT POINT 
 
 Ulbcn tboucibtful Freehs Uhc pol^biue daw tbe tall 67390 
 
 TEN POINT 
 
 Mben tbougbtful Greefts lifte polpbius 12345 
 
 TWELVE POINT 
 
 Mben tbouabtful (Breefcs like ipol^ 67890 
 
 EIGHTEEN POINT 
 
 When thoughtful (Breeds 1234 
 
 TWENTY POINT 
 
 Mben tbougbtful (5 5678 
 
 THIRTY-SIX POINT 
 
 When tbou 9012
 
 242 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 PRIORY TEXT 
 
 EIGHT POINT 
 
 tfoouobtful (SceehjS Itfce polpbhtf $aw tbe fan of (Cartbage 12345 
 
 TEN POINT 
 
 t&ottff&tf ttl (Sreefcg Itfce fjolpbitw caru tlje fall of 67890 
 
 TWELVE POINT 
 
 tljougljcful ^wefes! libe pol^btug sfatu tl) 12345 
 
 FOURTEEN POINT 
 
 t^oug^tful (0reeW Itfee ^ol^ 6789 
 
 EIGHTEEN POINT 
 
 tfjougljtful (greeks life 1234 
 
 TWENTY-FOUR POINT 
 
 tf)ougl)tful (^ree 5678 
 
 9012 
 
 THIRTY POINT 
 
 THIRTY-SIX POINT 
 
 SIX POINT BLACK NO. THIRTEEN 
 
 OTfjrn tfjouflfjtful ffirteka like ^polobiua sato tlje fall of Cartilage anH of Count 123^5 
 
 TWELVE POINT ENGLISH 
 
 tj)ougi)tful (Breeltfii Ufce
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 243 
 
 SHifcflt HougWuI (Srwfcs life? Polpbius sato 12345 
 
 EIGHTEEN POINT 
 
 tbougljtful (gmto life Pole 6789 
 
 TWENTY-FOUR POINT 
 
 tljou0l)tful (grttfts 12345 
 
 THIRTY POINT 
 
 timitfoi <S 6789 
 
 THIRTY-SIX POINT 
 
 34 
 
 FORTY-EIGHT POINT 
 
 tail 1 2
 
 244 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 WEDDING TEXT 
 
 SIX POINT 
 thoughtful <Brfe lUu JaI B biu afo ify fail of Citriff s an!> of Corintlj, tljig 12345 
 
 EIGHT POINT 
 
 fflfycn tfyaugfytful (greeks like ^oigbius snfa 11] e fall of (Carthage mtb 67890 
 
 TEN POINT 
 
 en ttjmtgljifui OircekB like -Jjloigbuts safe tije fall of 12345 
 
 TWELVE POINT 
 
 like 
 
 jett t^ou^tful 
 
 [jcn tfymtgljtful Cireeks like 
 
 FOURTEEN POINT 
 
 EIGHTEEN POINT 
 NO. ONE 
 
 en 
 
 m 
 
 ert 
 
 like 
 
 EIGHTEEN POINT 
 NO. TWO 
 
 TWENTY-FOUR POINT 
 NO. ONE 
 
 TWENTY-FOUR POINT 
 NO. TWO 
 
 67890 
 
 12345 
 
 67S9 
 
 0123 
 
 4567 
 
 lib S90
 
 _ SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE _ 245 
 ENGRAVER'S OLD ENGLISH 
 
 SIX POINT 
 
 Sljr it t Ijnugljtf ul (Srrrka Ilk* |In ly blua earn tljr fall of CCartfyaijr anil of <Bor 12345 
 
 EIGHT POINT 
 
 SUjrn ttpwgfitful Oirrrha like JliilyhiitH Baiu Ifjr fall of (Carlljaijr BniUlI 
 
 TEN POINT 
 
 6rrrUa likr JIolnlttitH aalu tl|r fall 12345 
 
 TWELVE POINT 
 
 FOURTEEN POINT 
 
 1234 
 
 EIGHTEEN POINT 
 
 TWENTY-FOUR POINT 
 
 tlj001jtfl Olr^ 0012 
 
 345fi 
 
 THIRTY POINT 
 
 THIRTY-SIX POINT 
 
 tljnug rB9fl 
 
 FORTY-EIGHT POINT
 
 246 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 TIFFANY SCRIPT 
 
 FOURTEEN POINT 
 
 Me gfayfa* to*, tie &# </ ^artia, 42345 
 
 if ft 
 
 EIGHTEEN POINT 
 
 W/nen wcwiM(tt c/veeKb UKe <_/oiw(iwk tou we 67890 
 
 TWENTY-FOUR POINT 
 
 f4nen mcuanM(M ?wefi& une ^Jol 42345 
 
 THIRTY POINT 
 
 t &reeKb line 67890 
 
 TIFFANY UPRIGHT 
 
 TWELVE POINT 
 tKou/lfuf 0*^ Me ^Pol'/iuA ^Z & faff of GwtRa^ 123*5 
 
 FOURTEEN POINT 
 
 Me ^afykuA A aW tg faff of C 67890 
 
 EIGHTEEN POINT 
 
 (JUncn tnaumXai orccfcA liJc <JautoiuA
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 
 
 247 
 
 TIFFANY UPRIGHT 
 
 TWENTY-FOUR POINT 
 NO. ONE 
 
 M 
 
 TWENTY-FOUR POINT 
 NO. TWO 
 
 THIRTY POINT 
 
 5678 
 
 &JL 9012 
 
 3-V56 
 
 TIFFANY SHADED 
 
 FOURTEEN POINT 
 
 EIGHTEEN POINT 
 
 9eCA M 
 
 TWENTY-FOUR POINT 
 NO. ONE 
 
 TWENTY-FOUR POINT 
 NO. TWO 
 
 12345 
 
 iuA A 67890 
 
 67890 
 
 ^2345
 
 248 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 CAXTON INITIALS 
 
 THIRTY-SIX POINT 
 
 INITIALS
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 
 
 249 
 
 INITIALS 
 
 FORTY-EIGHT POINT BURFORD
 
 250 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 INITIALS 
 
 SEVENTY-TWO POINT BURFORD
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 
 
 25 1 
 
 INITIALS 
 
 SEVENTY-TWO POINT BURFORD 
 
 FORTY-EIGHT POINT DELLA ROBBIA
 
 252 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 INITIALS 
 
 TORTY-EIGHT POINT DELLA ROBBIA 
 
 SEVENTY-TWO POINT DELLA ROBBIA
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 
 
 253 
 
 INITIALS 
 
 SEVENTY-TWO POINT DELLA ROBBIA
 
 254 TH E UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 INITIALS 
 
 SEVENTY-TWO POINT DELLA ROBBIA 
 
 SIXTY POINT ROYCROFT
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 
 
 255 
 
 INITIALS 
 
 SIXTY POINT ROYCROFT
 
 256 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 INITIALS 
 
 THIRTY POINT JENSON 

 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 257 
 
 INITIALS 
 
 MISCELLANEOUS
 
 258 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 INITIALS 
 
 MISCELLANEOUS 
 
 12 
 
 14 
 
 17 
 
 18 
 
 19
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 
 
 259 
 
 23 
 
 INITIALS 
 
 MISCELLANEOUS 
 
 22 
 
 24
 
 260 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO COAT-OF-ARMS 
 
 ''Cra3''vitu T-n 
 -^ catScv Gxccv r 
 ta | lanir ' '
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 261 
 
 BRASS CIRCLES
 
 262 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 ORNAMENTS 
 
 15
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 
 
 263 
 
 ORNAMENTS 
 
 28
 
 264 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 ORNAMENTS 
 
 36 
 
 39
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 
 
 265 
 
 ORNAMENTS
 
 266 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 ORNAMENTS 
 
 53 
 
 54 
 
 55 56 
 
 57 
 
 58 
 
 59 
 
 60 
 
 65 
 
 67
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 267 
 
 ORNAMENTS 
 
 W 
 
 68 
 
 * 
 
 * "fr 
 
 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 
 
 76 
 
 77 78 79 80 81 82 
 
 92 
 
 93 94 
 
 89 90 
 
 
 
 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 
 
 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 
 
 D 
 
 113 
 
 ffi 
 
 BB1 & * $ 
 
 H '^^^ 117 
 
 91 ffi ifi * 
 
 121 120 119 H8 
 
 .t 
 
 _ _ 
 
 122 123 124 125* 126 127 128 129
 
 268 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 ORNAMENTS 
 
 130 
 
 131 
 
 132 
 
 133 
 
 134 
 
 135 
 
 136 
 
 137 
 
 138 
 
 139 
 
 jJitK^ 
 
 140 
 
 141 
 
 142 
 
 143 144 145 
 
 146 147 148 149
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 
 
 260 
 
 ORNAMENTS 
 
 152 
 
 155 
 
 156
 
 270 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 ORNAMENTS 
 
 158
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 
 
 27,1 
 
 ORNAMENTS 
 
 \\t 
 
 164 165 166 167 168 
 
 169 170 171 172 
 
 173 174 175 176 
 
 160 
 
 179 
 
 180
 
 272 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 ORNAMENTS 
 
 M 
 
 i 
 
 181
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 
 
 273 
 
 ORNAMENTS 
 
 191 
 
 195
 
 274 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 ORNAMENTS 
 
 196
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 275 
 
 ORNAMENTS 
 
 i 5 
 
 204 
 
 205 
 
 i 
 
 203 
 
 206 
 
 207 
 
 211
 
 276 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 ORNAMENTS 
 
 + || 215 
 
 214 
 
 213 
 
 212 
 
 216 
 
 217
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 277 
 
 ORNAMENTS 
 
 219 
 
 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 
 
 228 
 
 229 
 
 230
 
 278 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 BRASS RULE FACES 
 
 HAIRLINE (ON ONE- AND TWO-POINT BODY) 
 
 DOTTED (ON ONE-POINT BODY) 
 
 DOTTED (ON TWO-POINT BODY) 
 
 HAIRLINE PARALLEL (ON TWO-POINT BODY) 
 
 HALF-POINT SIDE FACE (ON TWO-POINT BODY) 
 
 ONE-POINT SIDE FACE (ON TWO- AND THREE-POINT BODY) 
 
 TWO POINT 
 THREE POINT 
 FOUR POINT 
 
 EIGHT POINT 
 
 TEN POINT 
 
 TWELVE POINT 
 
 PRESCRIPTION SIGNS
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 279 
 
 BORDERS 
 
 TWO POINT 
 NO. ONE 
 
 THREE POINT 
 NO. TWO 
 
 FOUR POINT 
 NO. FOUR 
 
 SIX POINT 
 NO. FIVE 
 
 ; . 
 
 NO. EIGHT 
 
 ni 11 ii ii ini ini ~nr~~ii_ n ~1D 
 
 EIGHT POINT 
 NO. TEN 
 
 NO. ELEVEN 
 
 NO. TWELVE 

 
 2&o THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 BORDERS 
 
 TWELVE POINT 
 NO. THIRTEEN 
 
 NO. FOURTEEN 
 
 NO. FIFTEEN 
 
 NO. SIXTEEN 
 
 NO. SEVENTEEN 
 
 NO. EIGHTEEN 
 
 NO. NINETEEN 
 
 KKKKKKKKKKKSKKKSKXSKK 
 
 TWENTY-FOUR POINT 
 NO. TWENTY
 
 SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN USE 
 
 281 
 
 BORDERS 
 
 THIRTY POINT 
 NO. TWENTY-ONE 
 
 ******** 
 
 THIRTY-SIX POINT 
 NO. TWENTY-TWO 
 
 NO. TWENTY-THREE 
 
 NO. TWENTY-FOUR 
 
 NO. TWENTY-FOUR A 
 
 
 FORTY-EIGHT POINT 
 NO. TWENTY-FIVE
 
 INDEXES
 
 INDEX TO MANUAL 
 
 [The numbers, unless otherwise indicated, refer to sections] 
 
 "A" and "an": use of, before h and , 
 114; spacing of, 268. 
 
 "a-" (negative particle), compounds with; 
 a.a.O., use of, 233. 
 
 Abbreviations: in literary references, no, 
 237 (cf. 37); no space between elements 
 of, 52, 103; not to be divided, 219; 
 of academic titles, 22; of biblical and 
 apocryphal books, list of, 100; of di- 
 rections, street names, locations of 
 property, 1230; of names of states, 106; 
 of technicaj terms, list of, in; of titles 
 of publications, omission of period after 
 initials used for, 1234,- rules for, 106-11; 
 omission of period in, i23c; use of apos- 
 trophe in, 1236; when not to use, 105; 
 of period after, 1230; no period after 
 Mile, 123. 
 
 "-able" and "-ible," in divisions, 224. 
 
 Academic degrees, abbreviation and capi- 
 talization of, 21-22. 
 
 Accents, retention of, in foreign words 
 incorporated into English, 59. 
 
 Acquired, limited, or special meaning, 
 words having, capitalization of, 25. 
 
 Acts, juridical, capitalization of names of, 
 18. 
 
 A.D. (anno Domini): spacing of, 52, 210; 
 use of small caps for, 52. 
 
 Address, capitalization of titles in direct, 
 21. 
 
 Address line: at end of letters, etc., how to 
 set, 50; at opening of letters, etc., how 
 to set, 64; omission of comma after, 161. 
 
 Addresses, titles of: capitalization of prin- 
 cipal words in, 41; to be roman-quoted, 
 82. 
 
 Adjectives: capitalization of, in titles, 
 of publications, 41; compound, 183; 
 capitalization of, derived from proper 
 nouns, i, 9; ending in "-ical," how to 
 divide, 229; foreign words not hyphen- 
 ated, 59 (p. 27); omission of comma 
 between two, 147; proper, capitaliza- 
 tion of, 5 (cf. i, 53). 
 
 Administrative bodies, capitalization of 
 names of, 12. 
 
 Adverbial clauses, 150. 
 
 Adverbs: capitalization of, in titles of 
 publications, 41; ending in "-ly," not 
 to be hyphenated with adjectives or par- 
 ticiples, 183; use of comma in connec- 
 tion with, 145. 
 
 at, rules for use of, 115. 
 
 Ages: historical, linguistic, and geological, 
 capitalization of, 14; to be spelled out, 
 09. 
 
 Algebraic formulas: italic letters used to 
 designate unknown quantities in, 67; 
 spacing of, 273. 
 
 Aligning figures, 257, 2736. 
 
 Alignment: in columns of tables, 246; 
 of decimals and dollar signs, 245; quo- 
 tation marks to be "cleared" in, 90. 
 
 Alliances, political, capitalization of names 
 of, 16. 
 
 Alphabetizing of names, rules for, 240. 
 
 A.M. (ante meridiem): 52, 219; use of small 
 caps for, 52. 
 
 American system of divisions, 221. 
 
 "Ampersand": definition of, 107; when 
 used, 107. 
 
 And: "short," 107; when to use comma 
 before, 143. 
 
 Anglicized derivatives from Latin and 
 Greek, form of diphthongs ce and <x in, 
 115- 
 
 "Angstrom units," abbreviation for, 23, 
 in. 
 
 "Ante," compounds with, 208. 
 
 " Anti," compounds with, 208. 
 
 Antithetical clauses, punctuation of, 149 
 
 Apocrypha: list of abbreviations for, 109; 
 titles of, to be set in roman, 60. 
 
 Apostles, omission of "St." in connection 
 with names of, 108. 
 
 Apostrophe: rules for use of, 163-65; use 
 of, in .inlractions, 1236; to form 
 plural vi numerals, 165; to form pos- 
 sessive, 164 (cf. 113); to mark omis- 
 sion of figures or letters, 163 (cf. 1236). 
 
 Appositional clauses, punctuation of, 150. 
 
 Arabic numerals: spacing of, at beginning 
 of lines, 271; in headlines, spacing of, 271; 
 used for biblical references, 134, 173. 
 
 285
 
 286 
 
 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 Art, titles of works of, to be roman- 
 quoted, 84. 
 
 Article: definite, not to be used in connec- 
 tion with "Rev." and "Hon.," 92; 
 not to be treated as part of title of peri- 
 odicals, 43; indefinite, form of, before en, 
 sounded h, "one," etc., and long , 114. 
 
 Articles, titles of: capitalization of prin- 
 cipal words in, 41; to be roman-quoted, 
 82. 
 
 Artificial noun-formations, plural of, 165. 
 
 Artistic schools, capitalization of names 
 of, 9. 
 
 "As follows," use of colon in connection 
 with, 132. 
 
 Asterisk, use of, for footnote index, 232. 
 
 Astronomical terms: capitalization of, 48; 
 italics not used for, 71. 
 
 Astro physical Journal: connecting num- 
 bers in, 173, note; metric symbols in, 
 123, note; style for footnotes in, 239, 
 note; use of comma with figures in, 
 159, note. 
 
 Authors: hints to, pp. 121-24; names of, 
 if in text, not repeated in footnotes, 
 23S- 
 
 Averages and generalizations, columns 
 of, in tables, sometimes in distinctive 
 type, 241, 250 (Table III). 
 
 Bastard title. See Half-title. 
 
 B.C. ("before Christ"): spacing of, 52, 
 219; use of small caps for, 52; hundreds 
 to be repeated with, 173. 
 
 "Bi-," compounds with, 197. 
 
 Bible: books of, abbreviations for, 109; 
 capitalization of names for, 29; titles 
 of books of, to be capitalized, 31; to be 
 set in roman, 60; versions of, abbrevia- 
 tions for, 109; capitalized, 30. 
 
 Biblical: books, abbreviations for, 109, 
 and capitalization of names of, 31; 
 parables, capitalization of, 32; terms, 
 miscellaneous, capitalization of, 33. 
 
 Bills, legislative, capitalization of, 18. 
 
 Biological terms, use of capitals in, 46. 
 
 Black face. See Bold-face type. 
 
 Blank verse, indention of, 275. 
 
 Blanks, use of leaders for, in ruled columns 
 of figures, 245; in open tables, see 
 specimen tables in, 250. 
 
 Blocks, capitalization of names of, 8. 
 
 Bodies: legislative, judiciary, and admin- 
 istrative, capitalization of names of, 12; 
 military, numbers of, to be spelled 
 out, 100. 
 
 Bold-face type: defined, 255; how indi- 
 cated, 255. 
 
 "Book," compounds of, 186. 
 
 Books: biblical, abbreviation of, 109, and 
 capitalization ot, 31; capitalization of 
 titles of, 41; italics for titles of, 60. 
 
 Botanical Gazette: exception to rule for 
 capitalization of titles of publications 
 in, 41, note; to hyphenization of com- 
 pounds of "co-," etc., 203, note; to rule 
 for italics, 60, note; to rule for quotation 
 marks, 82, note; metric symbols in, 
 123, note; footnotes in, 239, note; thou- 
 sands in, 159, note. 
 
 Botanical terms: use of capitals in, 46; 
 of italics, 46, 71. 
 
 Bourgeois, explained, 252. 
 
 Box-heads: defined, 282; how to set, 
 242; illustrated, 250; . omission of 
 period after, 125; use of capitals in, 41. 
 
 Brackets, rules for use of, 178-79. 
 
 Break, or change, in sentence, to be indi- 
 cated by dash, 166. 
 
 Breakline: defined, 217; spacing of, 267. 
 
 Brevier, explained, 252. 
 
 'Brother," compounds of, 190. 
 
 "Brothers," forming part of name of 
 firm, 107. 
 
 Buildings, capitalization of names of, 8. 
 
 But-clauses, use of comma in connection 
 with, 144. 
 
 " By-," compounds with, 202* 
 
 C, soft, do not divide on, 223. 
 
 Capitalization: of abbreviations of aca- 
 demic degrees, celestial objects, etc., 
 22; of abbreviations of one letter, 
 23; of abbreviations of journals, 42; 
 of adjectives derived from proper nouns, 
 i, 42; of adjectives and nouns desig- 
 nating definite geographical regions, 
 5; of books of the Bible and other 
 sacred books, 31; botanical terms, 46; 
 of church fathers, 27; of conventions, 
 congresses, expositions, etc., 17; of 
 creeds and confessions of faith, 19; 
 of Egyptian dynasties, 13; epithets, 
 used as proper names, 2; of exclama- 
 tions "O" and "Oh," 40, 117; of 
 familiar names applied to particular 
 persons, 21; of first words, 34-36, 38, 
 39; of feast days and civic holidays, 20; 
 of geographical names, 4-5; of geo- 
 logical epochs, 14, 46; of governmental 
 departments, 12; of Greek and Latin 
 poetry, 34; of historical epochs, 14; of 
 important events^ 15; of legislative, 
 judiciary, and administrative bodies, 12.
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: INDEX 
 
 287 
 
 of linguistic and literary periods, 14, 1 23 ; 
 of miscellaneous terms, g, 16, 33; of 
 monastic orders, 10; of names for the 
 Bible, 29; of names of regiments, 13; 
 of names and epithets of peoples, races, 
 and tribes, 47; of names of bodies of 
 solar system, 48; of "nature," etc., and 
 abstract ideas, personified, 26; of nouns 
 and adjectives used to designate the 
 Supreme Being, or any member of the 
 Tnnity, 24; of nouns followed by a 
 numeral, 37; of organizations and 
 institutions, 11-12; of particles (in 
 French, Dutch, German names), 3; of 
 periods in history or literature, 14; 
 of philosophical, literary, and artistic 
 schools, 9; of poetry, 34; of political 
 alliances, 16; of political divisions, 6-7; 
 of political parties, 9, 16; of principal 
 words, 41; of pronouns referring to the 
 Supreme Being, 24; of proper nouns 
 and adjectives, i, 5, 24, 53; of regions 
 or parts of world, 5; of terms applied 
 to groups of states, 5; of religious 
 denominations and edifices, 9, 28; 
 of scientific names of divisions, orders, 
 genera, species, etc., 46; of sessions of 
 Congress, 13; of thoroughfares, parks, 
 squares, blocks, buildings, etc., 8; 
 of titles, academic degrees, orders 
 (decorations), etc., 21 (cf. 49); of titles 
 of publications, 41; of titles of manu- 
 scripts, 44; of treaties, acts, laws, bills, 
 etc., 18; of versions of the Bible, 30; 
 of words with an acquired, limited, or 
 special meaning, i, 25; of zoological 
 and paleontological matter, 46; verbs 
 derived from proper names and haying 
 a specialized meaning, not capitalized, 
 i; rules for, 1-57; word-lists, 4. 
 
 Capitals: how indicated, 257; rules for 
 use of, 1-49. 
 
 Capitals and small capitals, rules for use 
 of, 50, 51. 
 
 Caps. See Capitals. 
 
 Catalogues, designation of celestial ob- 
 jects in, 71. 
 
 Center-heads: defined, 279; illustrated, 
 279; use of capitals in, 41. 
 
 "Centigrade," abbreviation for, in. 
 
 Centuries, numbers of, to be spelled out, 
 
 100. 
 
 Cf., to be set in roman, 61. 
 
 Chapters, titles of: capitalization of prin- 
 cipal words in, 41; to be roman-quoted, 
 82. 
 
 Chemical symbols, how to treat, 71, 123. 
 
 Christian names, to be spelled out, 93. 
 
 "Church," when capitalized, 28. 
 
 Church fathers: omission of " St." in con- 
 nection with names of, 108; when capi- 
 talized, 27. 
 
 Citations: from different authors follow- 
 ing each other uninterrupted by any 
 intervening original matter, 73; of pas- 
 sages in author's own words, 74 (cf. 
 85); rules for reduction of, 85-87; for 
 punctuation of, 112. 
 
 Civil titles, capitalization of, 21. 
 
 Classical references, rules for punctuation, 
 237- 
 
 Clauses, punctuation of: adverbial, 150; 
 antithetical, 149; appositional, 150; 
 complementary, 169; conjunctive, 144; 
 parenthetical, 150, 167, 169, 177; 
 participial, 148; summarizing, 170. 
 
 "Cleared," definition of, 90. 
 
 "Co-," compounds with, 203. 
 
 Colon: definition and illustration of use 
 of, 131; rules for use of, 131-36; use 
 of, after salutatory phrase at beginning 
 of letters, 133; between place of publi- 
 cation and publisher's name, 135; in 
 connection with introductory remarks 
 of speaker, 133; to emphasize close 
 connection between two clauses, 131; 
 to introduce statement, extract, etc., 
 131; to separate chapter and verse in 
 Scripture passages, 134; to separate 
 volume and page references, 134; clause 
 from illustration or amplification, 131; 
 hours and minutes in tune indications, 
 134- 
 
 Columns of figures, spacing of, 245. 
 
 Combination of words into one adjective 
 preceding noun, use of hyphen for, 
 
 Comma: definition and illustrations of 
 use of, 141; omission of, between two 
 adjectives, 147; in signatures and after 
 author's name at beginning of articles, 
 161; use of, after digits indicating 
 thousands, 159; before "and,'' "or, 
 and "nor," 143; before "of" in con- 
 nection with residence or position, 157; 
 omission of, between consecutive pages, 
 etc., 158; between month and year, 160; 
 in connection with adjectival phrases, 
 152; omitted before "rather," 146; 
 with adverbial clauses, 150; with anti- 
 thetical clauses, 149; with appositional 
 clauses, 150; with brief quotations or 
 maxims, 156; with clauses ending in 
 different prepositions, 153; with con- 
 junctions, 144; with conjunctions, 
 adverbs, connective particles, and 
 phrases, 145; with parenthetical clauses, 
 150; with participial clauses, 148; to
 
 288 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 indicate omissions, 155; to separate 
 identical, or similar, words, 151; to 
 separate numbers, 154; to separate 
 proper nouns, 142; rules for use of, 
 141-62. 
 
 Commercial: firms, how to treat titles of. 
 107 1 organizations and institutions, 
 capitalization of names of, n. 
 "Company," to be abbreviated when 
 
 forming part of name of firm, 107. 
 Complementary clauses, use of dashes in 
 
 connection with, 169. 
 Component elements, omission of, in 
 
 compound words, 211. 
 Compound adjectives, 183. 
 Compound words, etymological division 
 of, 221; omission of element common 
 to two or more, to be indicated by 
 hyphen, 211. 
 
 Compounds: hyphenated, capitalization 
 of nouns constituting parts of, in titles, 
 45; of "book," "house," "mill," 
 "room," "shop," "work," 186; of 
 "father," "mother," "brother," "sister," 
 "daughter," "parent," and "foster," 
 190; of "fellow," 189; of "god," 195; 
 of "half," "quarter," etc., 196; of 
 "life" and "world," 192; of "maker" 
 and "dealer," 187; of "master," 194; 
 of present participles with nouns or 
 prepositions, 185; of "self," 198; of 
 "skin," 193; of "st9re," 188; with 
 "ante," "infra," "inter," "intra," 
 "post," "sub," "super," "supra," and 
 "anti," 208; with "by-," 202; with 
 "co-," "pre-," and "re-," 203; with 
 "extra," "pan," and "ultra," 209; 
 with "fold," 199; with "great," in lines 
 of descent, 191; with "like," 200; with 
 negative particles "un-," "in-," il-," 
 "im-," and "a-," 205; with "non-," 
 205; with "over" and "under," 207; 
 with "quasi-," 206; with "semi-," 
 "demi-," "tri-," "bi-," etc., 197; with 
 "vice," "ex-," "elect," and "general," 
 in titles, 201. 
 Confessions of faith, capitalization of 
 
 names of, 19. 
 
 Congress: capitalization of names of 
 
 houses of, 12; of sessions of, 13; mem- 
 
 bers-of, to be lower-cased, 21; numbers 
 
 of sessions of, to be spelled out, 100. 
 
 Congresses, capitalization of names of, 17. 
 
 Conjunctions, use of comma in connection 
 
 with, 145. 
 Connective particles, use of comma in 
 
 connection with, 145. 
 " Continued": after headlines, to be set in 
 italics, 73; at end of articles, etc., to be 
 
 placed between brackets, and in reduced 
 
 type, 179. 
 Contraction of word, use of apostrophe in, 
 
 1236, 163. 
 
 Conventions, capitalization of names of, 17. 
 Copyholders, hints to, pp. 130-32. 
 Creeds, capitalization of names of, 19. 
 Cut-in heads: defined and illustrated, 
 
 281; omission of period after, 125; use 
 
 of capitals in, 41. 
 Cycles of poems, titles of: capitalization 
 
 of principal words in, 41; to be itali- 
 cized, 60. 
 "Czar," when capitalized, 21. 
 
 Dagger, use of, for footnote index, 232. 
 
 Danish titles of publications, use of capi- 
 tals in, 42c. 
 
 Dashes: definition and illustrations of use 
 of, 166; different sizes of, explained, 
 261; illustrated, 261; rules for use of, 
 in punctuation, 166-75; use of, at end 
 of word or phrase implied at beginning 
 of each of succeeding paragraphs, 171; 
 for emphasis, 168; in connection with 
 literary references, 174; with other 
 points, 175; with parenthetical clauses, 
 168-69; with complementary clauses, 
 169; with direct discourse in French 
 and Spanish, 1716; to connect numbers, 
 173; to denote break, stop, transition, 
 or change in sentence, 166; to precede 
 summarizing clauses, 170; for purposes 
 other than punctuation, 261. 
 
 Dates: hundreds repeated, when and 
 when not, 173; of publications, to follow 
 volume numbers in references to periodi- 
 cals, 238; other order of citation, 238; 
 st, d, and th to be omitted from, 102; 
 use of comma between month and year 
 in, 160. 
 
 "Daughter," compounds of, 190. 
 
 "De," rule for treatment of, 240*:. 
 
 "Dealer," compounds of, 187. 
 
 Decades, references to, to be spelled out, 
 101. 
 
 Decimal point, period leader used for, 244. 
 
 Decorations, capitalization of names of , 21 . 
 
 Degrees, academic, abbreviation and capi- 
 talization of, 21-22. 
 
 "Demi-," compounds with, 197. 
 
 Denominations, religious, capitalization 
 of names of, 9. 
 
 Departments: governmental, capitaliza- 
 tion of names of, 12; of University of 
 Chicago, 49-
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: INDEX 
 
 Derivation, division according to, to be 
 avoided, 221. 
 
 Derivatives: from Greek and Latin, 115; 
 from proper names, 53; English, from 
 scientific names not capitalized, 46; from 
 words ending in /, how to divide, 227. 
 
 Diagrams, letters referring to, 68. 
 
 Digraphs. Ste Ligature. 
 
 Dimensions, punctuation, 94, 159. 
 
 Diphthongs, to be treated as one letter in 
 divisions, 226. 
 
 Divided word to be avoided: at end of 
 next to last line of paragraph, 217; at 
 bottom of recto page, 217. 
 
 Division of words: rules for, 215-31; 
 systems of, 221; use of hyphen to indi- 
 cate, 182; avoidance of unnecessary, 
 215; on two letters, to be avoided, 216; 
 of foreign words, 231; never on syllable 
 with silent vowel, 221; in foreign lan- 
 guage, 231. 
 
 Divisional mark in middle of sentences, 
 not to be put at end of line, 220. 
 
 Divisions of publications, titles of: capi- 
 talization of principal words in, 41 ; to be 
 roman-quqted, 82. 
 
 Divisions, political: capitalization of 
 names of, 6-7; numbered, to be spelled 
 out, 100. 
 
 Divisions of the University of Chicago, 
 capitalization of names of, 49. 
 
 Documents, titles of: capitalization of 
 principal words in, 41; to be italicized, 
 60 (cf. 18). 
 
 Double dagger, use of, for footnote index, 
 232. 
 
 Double rules, use of, in tables, 247. 
 
 Doubt, use of interrogation point to ex- 
 press, 129. 
 
 Drop-folio, defined, 291. 
 
 Dutch names, capitalizing of "Van" and 
 "Ten" in, 3; indexing of, 24oc; titles of 
 publications, use of capitals in, 42^. 
 
 Dynasties, Egyptian: capitalization of 
 names of, 13; to be spelled out, 100. 
 
 Editions: number of, indicated by superior 
 figure within punctuation, 237 (n. 6). 
 
 Editors, hints to, pp. 121-24. 
 
 Educational organizations and institu- 
 tions, capitalization of names of, ir. 
 
 E.g., to be set in roman, 61. 
 
 "Elect," suffixed to titles, 201. 
 
 Ellipses: rules for use of, 180-81; to be 
 
 treated as part of quotation, 88, 181; 
 use of, to indicate omissions, 180. 
 
 Em, defined, 261. 
 
 Em dash: defined, 261; illustrated, 261; 
 use of, for "to" in time indications, 
 173- 
 
 Em quad: after sentences, 261, 262; de- 
 fined, 261; illustrated, 261. 
 
 Emphasis: use of dashes for, 168; of 
 exclamation points, 127; of italics, 58. 
 
 En dash: defined, 261; illustrated, 261; 
 use of, instead of comma between con- 
 secutive pages in literary references, 158 
 (cf. 173); instead of hyphen, in com- 
 pounds, 183; for "to" connecting two 
 words or figures, 173. 
 
 English: equivalent of foreign word or 
 phrase, to be quoted, 78 ;_ system of 
 division, 221; titles of publications, use 
 of capitals in, 41. 
 
 En quad: defined, 261; illustrated, 261. 
 
 Enumerations, use of parentheses in con- 
 nection with letters or figures used to 
 indicate subdivisions in, 176. 
 
 Epigrammatic turn, use of dash to indi- 
 cate, 166. 
 
 Epithets, capitalized, when used as proper 
 names, 2. 
 
 Epochs, historical and geological, capitali- 
 zation of names of, 14. 
 
 Equivalent, English, of word or phrase 
 from foreign language, to be roman- 
 quoted, 78. 
 
 Errata, for and read italicized in, 62. 
 
 Essays, titles of: capitalization of prin- 
 cipal words in, 41; to be italicized, 60. 
 
 Etc.: use of comma before, 143; when 
 to be treated as part of quotation, 88. 
 
 Etymology, division according to (Eng- 
 lish system), 221. 
 
 eu, form of indefinite article before, 114. 
 
 Even spacing, importance of, 265. 
 
 Events, important historical, capitaliza- 
 tion of names of, 15. 
 
 "Ex-," prefixed to titles, 201. 
 
 Exclamation point, rules for use of, 127- 
 28. 
 
 Exclamatory "Oh," 117. 
 
 Explanation: of technical terms, 251-94; 
 use of brackets for, 178. 
 
 Expositions, capitalization of names of, 17. 
 
 "Extra," compounds with, 209. 
 
 Extracts, rules for punctuation of, 112.
 
 2QO THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 F., ff. (=" following"): spacing of, 269; 
 use of, no. 
 
 Face, defined, 256. 
 
 "Fahrenheit," abbreviation for, in. 
 
 "Farther" and "further," differentiation 
 of, 1 1 6. 
 
 "Father": compounds of, igo; when 
 capitalized, 27. 
 
 Feast days, capitalization of names of, 20. 
 
 "Fellow," compounds of, 189. 
 
 Figures: columns of, in tables, 245; rules 
 for use of, 94-98. 
 
 Figures (illustrations) in text, letters re- 
 ferring to, 68, 93. 
 
 Firms, names of commercial: abbrevia- 
 tion of, 107; capitalization of, u. 
 
 First words: after a colon, when capital- 
 ized, 35; following "Whereas" and 
 "Resolved" in resolutions, capitali- 
 zation of, 39; in sections of enumera- 
 tion, when capitalized, 36; in titles of 
 publications, capitalization of, 41; of 
 citations, when capitalized, 38 (cf. 131); 
 of lines of poetry, capitalization of, 34; 
 of quotations, when lower case is used 
 for, 57 (cf. 131); of sentences, capitali- 
 zation of, 34. 
 
 Five-em space, denned, 261. 
 
 "Flush," defined, 280. 
 
 "Fold," combinations with, igg. 
 
 Folio, defined, agi. 
 
 Font, defined, 257. 
 
 Footnotes: exceptions to general style 
 for, 237, 239, note; general style for, 
 237; indexes for references to, 232; 
 numbering of, 239; placing of index 
 figure, 236; rules for, 232-39; samples 
 of, 237; to tables, 234. 
 
 Foreign institutions and organizations, 
 capitalization of titles of, n. 
 
 Foreign languages: division of words in, 
 231; English translation accompany- 
 ing word, phrase, or passage cited from, 
 to be quoted, 78; sentences and passages 
 quoted from, how to treat, 59, 85; words 
 and phrases from, use of italics for, 59; 
 words and phrases borrowed from, in- 
 corporated into English, how to treat, 59. 
 
 Foreign titles of publications, capitaliza- 
 tion of, 42. 
 
 "Format" of books (410, 8vo, etc.), not 
 to be treated as abbreviations, I23C. 
 
 Formulas: spacing of, 273; use of italics 
 in, 67. 
 
 "Fort," to be spelled out, 104. 
 
 "Foster," compounds of, 190. 
 
 Foul proof, defined, 288. 
 
 Foundry-proof, defined, 287. 
 
 Four-em space, defined, 261. 
 
 Fractions, use of hyphen in, 210. 
 
 French: ellipsis, 180; titles of publications, 
 use of capitals in, 426; use of ligatures 
 as or <e in, 115; words, division of, 231. 
 
 "Further" and "farther," differentiation 
 of, 116. 
 
 G, soft, do not divide on, 223. 
 Galley, defined, 283. 
 Galley-proof, defined, 285. 
 "General," combined with title, 201. 
 Geographical names, capitalization of, 4, 
 
 5,6. 
 Geological terms, capitalization of, 14, 46; 
 
 italicizing of, 71. 
 Geometry, letters used to designate lines, 
 
 etc., in, 67. 
 German: index figures in, 232: names 
 
 with umlaut, indexing of, 240*2 ; titles 
 
 of publications, use of capitals in, 42^; 
 
 words, division of, 231. 
 Given names. See Christian names. 
 "God," compounds of, 195. 
 Governmental departments, capitalization 
 
 of names of, 12. 
 Grain, abbreviation for, in. 
 Gram, abbreviation for, in. 
 " Great," compounds of, 191. 
 Greek words, division of, 231. 
 
 H, form of indefinite article before 
 sounded, 114. 
 
 Hair-space, defined, 261: illustrated, 261. 
 
 Hair-spacing, tabooed, 266. 
 
 "Half," combinations of, with nouns, 
 196. 
 
 Half-title, defined, 292. 
 
 Hanging indention: defined and illus- 
 trated, 279, 284; indention in, 274. 
 
 Headings, described, 279-83. 
 
 Headlines: of tables, how to set, 249; 
 omission of period after, 125; spacing 
 of, 271; word "continued" following, 
 to be set in italics, 73. 
 
 Heads. See Headings, Headlines. 
 
 Historical: epochs, capitalization of apel- 
 lations for, 14; events, capitalization of, 
 15; terms of special significance, capi- 
 talization of, 16. 
 
 Holidays. See Feast days.
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: INDEX 
 
 291 
 
 Honorary titles, capitalization of, 21. 
 
 "Horse-power," abbreviation for, in. 
 
 "House," compounds of, 186. 
 
 Hyphen leader, denned, 244. 
 
 Hyphenated words: division of to be 
 avoided, 225; list of, 214; foreign terms 
 used as adjectives not to be hyphen- 
 ated, 59. 
 
 Hyphens: number of consecutive, allow- 
 able at ends of lines. 217; rules for use 
 of, 182-214. 
 
 Ibid., use of, 233. 
 
 Ideas, abstract, capitalization of, when 
 
 personified, 26. 
 I.e., to be set in roman, 61. 
 If-clauses, use of comma in connection 
 
 with, 144. 
 Illustrations, letters referring to parts of, 
 
 68. 
 
 Implication of word or phrase, to be indi- 
 cated by dash, 171. 
 Importance, use of italics for, 58. 
 "In-" (negative particle), compounds 
 
 with, 205. 
 
 Indentation. See Indention. 
 Indention: explained, 274; of poetry, 
 
 275; rules for, 274-76. 
 Index figure, placing of, 236. 
 Indexes for footnote references: how to 
 
 number, 239; placing of, 236; sequence 
 
 of, 232; what to use for, 232. 
 Indexing: italicizing of "See," "See also," 
 
 in cross-references, 62; rules for, 240; 
 
 sizes of type and style for setting, 240; 
 
 treatment of prefixes and particles in 
 
 proper nouns, 240. 
 Industrial organizations and institutions, 
 
 capitalization of names of, n. 
 " Infra," compounds with, 208. 
 Initials: of titles of publications, use of, 
 
 123; separation of, in different lines, to 
 
 be avoided, 219. 
 Institutions: capitalization of names of, 
 
 n; use of roman type for foreign, 59. 
 "Inter," compounds with, 208. 
 Interpolations, use of brackets for, 178. 
 Interrogation point, use of, 129-30. 
 "Intra," compounds with, 208. 
 Ironical word or phrase: use of quotation 
 
 marks for, 77; use of exclamation 
 
 point for, 127. 
 ise and -ize, differentiation between, as 
 
 terminations, 120. 
 
 Italian titles of publications, use of 
 capitals in, 426; words, division of, 231. 
 
 Italics: defined, 254; how indicated, 254; 
 need not be used in lengthy biblio- 
 graphical lists, 60; rules for use of, 
 58-73. 
 
 Italicizing: of address lines, 64; of astro- 
 nomical names, 71; of letters designating 
 unknown quantities, 67; of letters refer- 
 ring to letters in illustrations, 68; of 
 names of genera and species, 71; of 
 initial word, Resolved, 72; of names of 
 catalogues of planets, constellations, and 
 stars. 71; of symbols indicating sub- 
 divisions, 66; of symbols for shillings and 
 pence, 70; of titles or position after sig- 
 natures, 65; of titles of books and other 
 works, 60; of titles of legal causes and 
 proceedings, 63; of titles of newspapers, 
 to include name of city where published, 
 when, 60; of words for and read in 
 errata, 62; of words "See" and "See 
 also" in cross-references in indexing, 62; 
 of words and phrases to which emphasis 
 is to be given, 58; of words and phrases 
 from foreign languages, 59; of words 
 used in literary references, 6 1 ; of words 
 representing continuation of article or 
 chapter, 73. 
 
 J, do not divide on, 223. 
 
 Journals. See Periodicals. 
 
 Judiciary bodies, capitalization of names 
 
 of, 12. 
 Juridical acts, laws, bills, capitalization of 
 
 names of, 18. 
 "Justification," defined, 264. 
 
 Kern, defined, 256. 
 
 Lanston. See Monotype. 
 
 Last words, capitalization of, in titles of 
 publications, 41. 
 
 Latin: non-uses of ligatures and ce in, 
 115; titles of publications, use of capi- 
 tals in, 420; words, division of, 231. 
 
 Laws, juridical, capitalization of names 
 of, 18. 
 
 "Leaded," defined, 277. 
 
 Leaders: definition and use of, 244; in 
 tables, 245, 250. 
 
 Leads, defined, 277. 
 
 Lectures, titles of: capitalization of prin- 
 cipal words in, 41; to be roman-quoted, 
 82. 
 
 Legends: letters in, 68; omission of period 
 after, 125. 
 
 Legislative bodies, capitalization of names 
 of, 12.
 
 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 Letters: in text or legends referring to 
 corresponding letter in accompanying 
 illustrations (diagrams), 68; references 
 to particular, to be set in italics, 69. 
 
 "Life," compounds of, 192. 
 
 Ligatures <z and ce, use of, 115. 
 
 "Like," adjectives ending in, 200. 
 
 Linguistic periods: abbreviation of names 
 for, 123; capitalization of, 14. 
 
 Linotype machine (Mergenthaler) : de- 
 scribed, 294; how to number footnotes 
 in matter set on, 239; spacing on, 260. 
 
 List: of hyphenated words, 214; of words 
 of more than one spelling, 119. 
 
 Literary references: abbreviations in, 54, 
 107, no, 237; words representing divi- 
 sions, when capitalized, 37; list of 
 phrases and abbreviations used in, 61. 
 
 Literary -schools, capitalization of names 
 of, 9. 
 
 Loc. cit., use of, 233. 
 
 Long primer, explained, 252. 
 
 Lower case: defined, 257; exceptions in- 
 cluded in do not's of, i, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 9, 
 n, 12, 14, 21, 24, 25, 28, 29, 31, 35, 37. 
 45, 46 (see under Capitalization); for 
 English derivatives from scientific 
 names, 46; rules for use of, 53~S7- 
 
 Machines, typesetting, different styles 
 
 of, 293-94- 
 
 Magazines. See Periodicals. 
 "Maker," compounds of, 187. 
 Make-up, defined. 290. 
 "Manuscript," abbreviation for, 44, 123. 
 Manuscripts, titles of: to be set in roman, 
 
 60; use of capitals in, 44. 
 " Master," compounds of, 194. 
 Mathematical signs, spacing of, 273. 
 Measurement: units of, 94; spelled with 
 
 lower-case initial letter, 55; spelled out 
 
 at beginning of sentence, 96. 
 Measures, metric, how to designaie, ill. 
 Medical terms, capitalization oi, 46; use 
 
 of italics in, to be avoided, 71. 
 "Mac," "Me," "M 1 ," rule for treatment 
 
 of, 240. 
 Merganthaler. See Linotype. 
 
 Metric: symbols, how to treat, I23c; spa- 
 cing of, 269; system, designation of 
 weights and measures in, in. 
 
 Military titles, capitalization of, 21. 
 "Mill," compounds of, 186. 
 
 Minion, explained, 252. 
 Miscellaneous terms, capitalization of, 33. 
 Mile and Mme, abbreviations, 123. 
 Monastic orders, capitalization of names 
 
 of, 10. 
 
 Monetary symbols, spacing of, 270. 
 Money; sums of, how to treat, 94, 97; 
 
 in various countries, 37, 270. 
 Monotype machine (Lanston): described, 
 
 293; spacing on, 259. 
 Months, names of, when to be spelled 
 
 out, 102. 
 
 "Mother," compounds of, 190. 
 Mottoes: capitalization of principal words 
 
 in, 41; to be roman-quoted, 82. 
 "Mount," to be spelled out, 104. 
 Movements, historical, capitalization of 
 
 names of, 16. 
 
 "Namely," use of colon in connection 
 with, 132. 
 
 Names: alphabetization of, 240; Chris- 
 tian, to be spelled out, 93; familiar, 
 applied to particular persons, to be 
 capitalized, 21; proper, capitalization 
 of, i. 
 
 Nature, personified, capitalization of, 26. 
 
 Negative particles "un-," "in-," "il-," 
 "im-," and "a-," compounds with, 205. 
 
 Newspapers, titles of: the article not to be 
 treated as part of, 43; capitalization of 
 principal words in, 41; to be italicized, 
 60. 
 
 New Testament books, list of abbrevia- 
 tions for, 109. 
 
 Nobility, capitalization of titles of, 21. 
 
 "Non-," compounds with, 205. 
 
 Nonpareil, explained, 252 
 
 "Nor," when comma is used before. 143. 
 
 "Not," use of comma before, in anti- 
 thetical clauses, 149. 
 
 "Note" introducing note not a footnote, 
 use of cap and small caps for, 51. 
 
 "Nothing," not to be divided, 230. 
 
 Nouns: capitalization of, in titles of pub- 
 lications. 41; combination of, standing 
 in objective relation to each other, 184; 
 ending in a sibilant, formation of plural 
 of, 165; followed by numeral, capitali- 
 zation of, 37 (cf. no); proper, capi- 
 talization of, i (cf. 5, 53). 
 
 Numbered political divisions, capitaliza- 
 tion of names of, 7.
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: INDEX 
 
 293 
 
 Numbers: commencing a sentence, to be 
 spelled out, 96; consecutive, treatment 
 of, 159, 173; in connected groups to be 
 treated alike, 94; in groups of six or 
 more closely connected, to be set in 
 figures. 94; of less than three digits, to 
 be spelled out in ordinary reading- 
 matter, 94; round, treatment of, 95; 
 use of comma after digits indicating 
 thousands, 159; use of comma to sepa- 
 rate, 154; use of dash for "to" con- 
 necting, 173. 
 
 Numerals: Atabic, at beginning of lines 
 and in headlines, spacing of, 271; 
 Roman, at beginning of lines and in 
 headlines, spacing of, 271; omission of 
 period after, 124. 
 
 'O" and "Oh": capitalization of, 40; 
 differentiation in use of, 117. 
 
 Occupations, compounds denoting, 187. 
 
 <e. rules for use of, 115. 
 
 Officers: titles of, to be lower-cased, 21; 
 of University of Chicago, to be capi- 
 talized, 49. 
 
 Offices, capitalization of names of, 12, 21. 
 
 Old Testament books, list of abbreviations 
 for, 109. 
 
 Omission: of comma after signatures, etc., 
 161; of figures in numbers or letters 
 in middle of word, use of apostrophe 
 for, 163; of period after headlines, etc., 
 125; after Roman numerals, 124; of 5, 
 d, and tit in dates, 102; of word or words, 
 indicated by comma, 155; use of brack- 
 ets for. 178; use of ellipsis for, 180. 
 
 "One," "once," etc., form of indefinite 
 article before, 114. 
 
 Op. cil., use of, 233. 
 
 Open tables: headlines for, 242; how to 
 set, 241; specimens of, 250. 
 
 "Or," when comma is used before, 143. 
 
 Orders (decorations), capitalization of 
 names of, 21 
 
 Orders, monastic, capitalization of names 
 of, 10. 
 
 Ordinals: when capitalized, 13; when 
 not, 45. 
 
 Organizations, capitalization of names of, 
 n. 
 
 Outcry, use of exclamation point after, 127. 
 
 "Over," compounds with, 207. 
 
 Pages, etc., omission of comma with four 
 digits, when, 139; spelled out, when, 237; 
 symbol "p." to be used, when, 237; use 
 of en dash between consecutive, 158 
 (cf. 173). 
 
 Page-proof, defined, 286; rules for use 
 
 in, 217, and pp. 127-29. 
 Paleontolqgical terms: use of capitals in, 
 
 46; italics not used in, 71. 
 Pamphlets, titles of: capitalization of 
 
 principal words in, 41; to be italicized, 
 
 60. 
 
 Papers (addresses), titles of: capitaliza- 
 tion of ptincipal words in, 41; to be 
 
 roman-quoted, 82. 
 Parables, biblical, capitalization of names 
 
 of, 32. 
 Paragraph mark: spacing of, 269; use of, 
 
 for footnote index, 232. 
 Paragraphs: explained, 284; first lines of, 
 
 in quoted prose matter to begin with 
 
 quotation marks. 89; indention of, 274; 
 
 styles of, 276 (cf. 284). 
 
 Parallel mark, use of, for footnote index, 
 232. 
 
 "Parent," compounds of, 190. 
 
 Parentheses: rules for use of, 176-77; 
 use of, for parenthetical clauses, 177 
 (cf. 150, 177); in connection with figures 
 or letters indicating subsections, 66, 176; 
 within parentheses, use of brackets for, 
 178. 
 
 Parenthesis, placing of period in connec- 
 tion with, 126. 
 
 Parenthetical clauses: use of commas in 
 connection with, 150; of dashes, 167, 
 169; of parentheses, 177 (cf. 150, 167). 
 
 Parks, capitalization of names of, 8. 
 
 Participial clauses, use of comma in con- 
 nection with, 148. 
 
 Participle: omission or retention of final 
 e in original word, when, 118; present, 
 united with noun, or with preposition, 
 185. 
 
 Particles, in French, Dutch, and German 
 names, capitalization of, 3. 
 
 Parties, political, capitalization of names 
 of, 9. 
 
 Parts (of books, etc.), titles of: capitali- 
 zation of principal words in, 41; to be 
 roman-quoted, 82. 
 
 Pause, use of dash to indicate, 166. 
 
 Pearl, explained, 252. 
 
 Pence. See Shillings. 
 
 Peoples, races, and tribes, capitalization 
 of names or epithets of, 47. 
 
 Per cent: to be expressed in figures, 94; 
 not to be treated asan abbreviation, 123. 
 
 Percentages, columns of, in tables, some- 
 times in distinctive type, 241.
 
 294 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 Period: placing of, in connection with 
 quotation marks, 126; rules for use 
 of, 122-26; to be omitted after abbre- 
 viations for linguistic epochs, 123; after 
 headlines and legends for cuts and 
 tables, 125; after initials of titles of 
 publications, 123; after MS ^manu- 
 script), 123; use of, after abbreviations, 
 123; at end of sentence, 122 (cf. 125); 
 in classical references, 237. 
 
 Period leader, defined, 244; used for deci- 
 mal point, 244; for pointing in German 
 and Spanish numbers, 159 (note). 
 
 Periodicals, titles of: capitalization of 
 principal words in, 41; definite article 
 not to be tieated as part of, 43; to be 
 italicized, 60. 
 
 Periods, geological, historical, linguistic, 
 and literary, capitalization of names of, 
 14. 
 
 Personifications, capitalization of, 26. 
 
 Philosophical schools, capitalization of 
 names of, 9. 
 
 Phrases: adjectival, use of comma in con- 
 nection with, 152; conjunctional, etc., 
 I4S- 
 
 Pica, explained, 252. 
 
 Place of publication and publisher's name, 
 use of colon between, 135. 
 
 Place-names, foreign, how to treat, 59. 
 
 Plain paragraph: defined and illustrated, 
 284; indention of, 274. 
 
 Plate-proof, defined, 287. 
 
 Planets, names of, how treated, 71. 
 
 Plays, titles of: capitalization of prin- 
 cipal words in. 41; to be italicized, 60. 
 
 Plurals: formation of, 165; of abbrevia- 
 tions of decades, 101; in literary refer- 
 ences, how formed, no; of nouns, not 
 divisible if singulars are not, 228; of 
 numerals and of rare and artificial noun 
 coinages, formation of, 165. 
 
 P.M. (post meridiem): spacing of, 52; 
 division of, 219; use of small caps for, 52. 
 
 Poems: capitalization of first word of each 
 line in English, 34; of first word of each 
 paragraph in Greek and Latin, 34; of 
 principal words in titles of, 41; titles 
 of shorter, to be roman-quoted, 81 (cf. 
 60); titles of, when set in italics and 
 when in roman, 60. 
 
 Poetry: capitalization of first lines, 34; 
 indention of, 275; quotations from, 
 when to reduce, 85; when to run into 
 the text, 83. 
 
 Point system, explanation of 251-52. 
 
 Political: alliances, capitalization of 
 names of, 16; divisions, 6-7; organi- 
 zations, n; parties, 9. 
 
 "Pope," when capitalized, 21. 
 
 "Port," to be spelled out, 104. 
 
 Position, use of comma before "of" in 
 connection with, 157. 
 
 Possessive case, how formed, 113, 164. 
 
 "Post," compounds with, 208. 
 
 Pounds: in English money, how expressed, 
 70, 270. 
 
 "Pre-," compounds with, 203. 
 
 Preface, etc., quotation marks to be omit- 
 ted with, 82. 
 
 Prefix or suffix not complete in itself, to 
 be indicated by hyphen, 212. 
 
 Prefixes "co-," "pre-," and "re-," how 
 to treat, 203. 
 
 Prepositions: formation of nouns of pres- 
 ent participles in connection with, 185; 
 to be lower-cased in titles, 41; use of 
 comma in connection with clauses end- 
 ing in different, 153. 
 
 "President," when capitalized, 21, 49. 
 
 Principal words: capitalization of, in 
 titles of publications, 41; definition of, 
 41. 
 
 Proceedings (of societies), titles of: capi- 
 talization of principal words in, 41; to 
 be italicized, 60. 
 
 Pronouns: capitalization of, in titles of 
 publications, 41; referring to Deity, 24. 
 
 Pronunciation, division according to 
 (American system), 221. 
 
 Proofreaders: hints to, pp. 125-29; marks 
 of. p. 133- 
 
 Proofs, description of, 285-89. 
 
 Proper names: capitalization of, i; how 
 to form possessive of. 113; verbs and 
 adjectives derived from, use of lower 
 case for, 53. 
 
 Proper nouns: capitalization of, i, 5; 
 division of. to be avoided, 218; when 
 not capitalized, 53. 
 
 Prose: extracts, when to reduce, 85; 
 when to run into text, 85; indention of 
 paragraphs in, 274. 
 
 Publications: period to be omitted after 
 initials used as abbreviations for, 123; 
 titles of, capitalization of principal 
 words in, 41; titles of subdivisions of, 
 when to be roman-quoted, 82; use of 
 italics for, 60; when to be spelled out, 
 iS- 
 
 Punctuation: of extracts from modern 
 authors, 112; rules for, 121-214.
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: INDEX 
 
 295 
 
 Punctuation marks: omission of, in clas- 
 sical references, 237; placing of, with 
 reference to index figures in text, 232; 
 to be printed in same type as word or 
 letter preceding them, 121. 
 
 "Pyramid," explained and illustrated, 279. 
 
 Quad, defined, 261. 
 
 Quadrat. See Quad. 
 
 "Quarter," compounds of, 196. 
 
 4to, 8vo, etc., not to be treated as abbre- 
 viations, I23C. 
 
 "Quasi-," compounds with, 206. 
 
 Query, use of interrogation point for, 129. 
 
 Question mark. See Interrogation point. 
 
 Questions: direct, to be followed by inter- 
 rogation point, 129; indirect, not to be 
 followed by interrogation point, 129; in 
 Spanish, 129. 
 
 Quotation marks: not to be used in con- 
 nection with reduced citations, 87; 
 excepti9n to this rule, 75; placing of 
 colon in connection _ with, 136; of 
 comma, 162; of ellipsis, 181; of excla- 
 mation point, 128; of interrogation 
 point, 130; of period, 126; of semi-colon, 
 140; rules for use of, 74-91; French 
 and German, p. 33, footnote; to be 
 omitted in references to Preface, Index, 
 etc., 82; use of double and single, 91. 
 
 Quotations, how to treat, 74-91; first 
 word of, lower-cased when connected 
 with previous sentence, 57. 
 
 Races, tribes, and peoples, capitalization 
 of names or epithets of, 47. 
 
 "Railroad" and "Railway," to be spelled 
 out, 104. 
 
 "Re-," compounds with, 203. 
 
 Reading-matter in columns of ruled tables, 
 how to set, 246, 250. 
 
 Recto, defined, 283. 
 
 Reductions: rules for, 85-87, 179; scale 
 of, 86. 
 
 Reference indexes, what to use for, 232. 
 
 References, legal, list of words and phrases 
 used in, 61; literary: list of words to 
 be abbreviated in, no (cf. 37, 54, 237); 
 in text, spelled out. 92; punctuation of, 
 etc., 237, 239, note; use of dash in 
 connection with, 174. 
 
 "Reformer," when capitalized, 27. 
 
 Regiments, capitalization of names of, 13. 
 
 Regions or parts of the world, capitali- 
 zation of names of, 5. 
 
 Regular paragraph. See Plain paragraph. 
 
 Religious: denominations, capitalization 
 of names of, 9; organizations, n. 
 
 Residence, use of comma before "of" in 
 connection with, 157. 
 
 Resolutions: how to introduce para- 
 graphs in, 39, 51, 72; word "Resolved" 
 in, how to set, 72; word "Whereas," 
 Si- 
 
 "Resolved," in resolutions, to be set in 
 italics, 73. 
 
 Revise, defined, 289. 
 
 Rhymed lines, in poetry, indention of, 
 275- 
 
 Roman numerals: at beginning of lines, 
 spacing of, 271 ; in headlines, spacing of, 
 271; omission of period after, 124*. 
 
 "Roman-quote," defined, 74, 253. 
 
 Roman type: defined, 253; illustrated, 
 257; anglicized foreign words in, 59; 
 bibliographical list of books, 60; e.g., 
 i.e., v. or vs., viz., 61; Fraunhofer 
 lines, 710; letter used in place of name, 
 69; lines of hydrogen, 71; spectral types 
 of stars, 71; symbols for chemical ele- 
 ments, 71. 
 
 "Room," compounds of, 186. 
 
 Round numbers, definition and treatment 
 of, 95- 
 
 Ruled tables: blanks in, how expressed, 
 245; box-heads for, 242; reading- 
 matter in, 246; size to set, 241; space 
 between rules and type, 243; specimens 
 of, 250; stub, how to set, 244. 
 
 Sacred books, capitalization of names of, 
 29. 
 
 "Saint": to be omitted in connection 
 with names of apostles, church fathers, 
 etc., 108; when abbreviated, 108. 
 
 Salutatory phrase at beginning of letters, 
 rules for setting, 50. 
 
 Scandinavian titles of publications, use of 
 capitals in, 42. 
 
 Schools, philosophical, literary, and artis- 
 tic, capitalization of names of, 9. 
 
 Scientific terms, use of capitals in, 46; of 
 italics in, 71. 
 
 Scripture passages: names of books of 
 Bible to be abbreviated in, 109; punc- 
 tuation of, 134, 139; spacing of, 272. 
 
 "Section," introducing paragraphs and 
 followed by a number, use of cap and 
 small caps for, 51. 
 
 Section mark: spacing of, 269; use of, for 
 footnote index, 232. 
 
 Sects, religious, capitalization of names 
 of, 9. 
 
 See and See also italicized, when, 62.
 
 296 
 
 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 "Self," compounds of, 198. 
 "Semi-," compounds with, 197. 
 
 Semicolon: separating two or more dis- 
 tinct clauses in enumerations, 36; illus- 
 ttation of use of, compared with that of 
 comma, 137; placing of, in connection 
 with quotation marks, 140; rules for 
 use of, 137-40; use of, in enumerations, 
 138; to mark division of sentence, 137; 
 to separate passages in Scripture refer- 
 ences containing chapters, 139. 
 
 Separation: of terms complete in them- 
 selves not to be made, 219; of word at 
 end of recto page, 217. 
 
 Sequences: of footnote indexes, 232; of 
 subdivisional numberings, 176; of three 
 or more links, use cf comma before 
 "and," "or," and "nor" in, 143. 
 
 Series titles, to be roman-quoted, 80. 
 
 Series, use of comma before final "and," 
 "or," and "nor" in, 143. 
 
 Sermons, titles of, to be roman-quoted, 
 82. 
 
 Shank, defined, 256. 
 
 Shillings and pence, how to treat abbre- 
 viations for, 70. 
 
 Ships, names of, to be roman-quoted, 83. 
 
 " Shop," compounds of, 186. 
 
 "Short and": definition of, 107; when 
 used, 104, 107. 
 
 Short words: avoidance of divisions of, 
 216; spacing of, 268. 
 
 Shoulder, defined, 256. 
 
 Side-heads: defined, 280; omission of 
 period after, 125; use of dash in con- 
 nection with, 172; use of lower case 
 in, 56 (cf. 172). 
 
 Signatures at end of letters or articles: 
 omission of comma after, 16 1 ; of period, 
 125; abbreviation of address in, 106; 
 rules for setting of, 50, 65. 
 
 "Sister," compounds of, 190. 
 
 Sizes of type, in ordinary use, samples of, 
 252. 
 
 "Skin," compounds of, 193. 
 
 Slug, defined, 278. 
 
 Small caps: defined, 257; how indicated, 
 257; use of, 52; in tabular work, 242, 
 249; in headings, 279. 
 
 Small pica, explained, 252. 
 
 Social organizations, capitalization of 
 names of, n. 
 
 Soft c or g, do not divide on, 223. 
 
 Solar system, capitalization of names of 
 bodies in, in works on astronomy, 48. 
 
 "Solid," defined, 277. 
 
 Space omitted between components of 
 certain abbreviations, 22, 52, 103, 163. 
 
 Spaces: different sizes of, explained, 259, 
 261; specimen of lines spaced with 
 different sizes of, 261. 
 
 Spacing: in breakline, 266-67; in foundry 
 type (and general) composition, 261-64; 
 in linotype composition, 260; in mono- 
 type composition, 259; its effect on ety- 
 mological divisions, 221; of divisional 
 signs, 269; of figure columns in tables, 
 245; of formulas, 273; of headlines, 271; 
 of metric symbols, 269; of monetary 
 symbols, 270; of numerals at beginning 
 of paragraphs, 271; of rules in tables, 
 243; of Scripture passages, 272; of short 
 words, 268; rules for, 258-73; standard, 
 262; what is considered good, 262; 
 with different sizes of spaces, samples of, 
 261. 
 
 Spanish titles of publications, use of capi- 
 tals in, 426; words, division of, 231. 
 
 Species, scientific names of: use of capi- 
 tals in, 46; of italics, 71. 
 
 Specimen tables, 250. 
 
 Spelled out, words, phrases, and titles 
 which are to be, 92-105. 
 
 Spelling: list of words of more than one, 
 119; of ages, 99; of books of Bible, 109; 
 of centuries, 100; of Christian names, 
 93; of "Company" and "Brothers" 
 in names of firms, 107; of decades, 101; 
 of Egyptian dynasties, 100; of extracts 
 from modern authors, 112; from Old 
 English, 112; of indefinite article before 
 h, u, etc., 114; of metric symbols, HI; 
 of names of months, 102; of names of 
 publications, 105; of names of regi- 
 ments, 100; of numbers commencing 
 a sentence, 96; of numbers of less than 
 three digits, 94; of possessives of proper 
 names ending in a sibilant, 113; of 
 "Railroad" and "Railway," 104; of 
 round numbers, 95; of "Saint," 108; 
 of sessions of Congress, 100; of states 
 and territories, 106; of sums of money, 
 97; of time of day, 98; of titles, 92; 
 of "United States," 103; of words 
 denoting subsections, in literary refer- 
 ences, no; rules for, 92-120. 
 
 Squares, capitalization of names of, 8. 
 
 "St.," indexing of names with, 2400. 
 
 Standard: of measurement in typography, 
 252; space used to separate words, 261. 
 
 Stars, names of, how treated, 71.
 
 MANUAL OF STYLE: INDEX 
 
 297 
 
 "State," when capitalized, 28, note. 
 
 States and territories: list of abbrevia- 
 tions for, 1 06; to be abbreviated when 
 following those of towns, 106; names of 
 groups of, when capitalized, 5. 
 
 Statistics, treatment of numbers in, 94. 
 
 "Store," compounds of, 188. 
 
 Stub: brace, when used in, 244; definition 
 of, 242; head for, 242; leaders, when 
 used in, 244. 
 
 Styles of type, 253-57. 
 
 "Sub," compounds with, 208. 
 
 Subdivisions: in literary references, use 
 of lower case for, 54 (cf. no, 237); 
 letters used to indicate, to be set in 
 italics, 66; use of parentheses in con- 
 nection with, 66; of publications, capi- 
 talization of principal words in titles of, 
 41; titles of, to be roman-quoted, or 
 capitalized without quotation marks, 82. 
 
 Suffix or prefix, indicated by hyphen, 212. 
 
 Summarizing clauses, use of dashes in 
 connection with, 170. 
 
 "Super," compounds with, 208. 
 
 Superior figures, use of, for reference 
 indexes, 232, 234; for number of edi- 
 tion, 237 (n. 6). 
 
 Superscriptions, omission of period after, 
 125- 
 
 "Supra," compounds with, 208. 
 
 Supreme Being, capitalization of names 
 for, and pronouns referring to, 24. 
 
 Syllabi, scheme of notation and inden- 
 tion of subdivisions in, 176. 
 
 Syllables, hyphen used to indicate, 213. 
 
 Symbols: chemical, treatment of, 71, 123; 
 metric, spacing of, 269; treatment of, 
 in, 123; monetary, spacing of, 270; 
 of measurement, abbreviation of, in; 
 as reference indexes, 232. 
 
 Tables: blanks in, 245 (but see 230, open 
 tables); columns representing totals, 
 percentages, etc., frequently set off by 
 different type, 241; continued, 247, 
 248, 250; footnotes to, 232, 234, 249; 
 headlines of. how to set, 249; of two 
 columns, to be set as open, 248; of more 
 than two, as pled, 248; open, headlines 
 for columns in, 242; open, how to set, 
 241; ruled, box-heads for, 242; ruled, 
 how to set, 241 ; rules for setting of, 241- 
 50; rules for use of rules in, 243, 247; 
 specimen, 250; use of braces in, 244 
 (and see specimen tables, 250); use of 
 leaders in, 244, 245 (and open tables, 
 250). 
 
 Tabular work, rules for, 241-50 (see 
 Tables). 
 
 Technical: terms, explanation of typo- 
 graphical, 251-94; words or phrases, 
 use of quotation marks for, 77. 
 
 "The" not to be treated as part of title of 
 newspapers or magazines, 43. 
 
 Thick space, defined, 261. 
 
 Thin space, defined, 261. 
 
 Thin-spacing, where to avoid, 265. 
 
 Thoroughfares: capitalization of names 
 of, 8; numbers forming part of names 
 of, to be spelled out, 100. 
 
 Thousands, use of comma after digits 
 indicating, 159. 
 
 Three-em dash: defined, 261; illustrated, 
 261. 
 
 Three-em quad, defined, 261. 
 
 Three-em space, defined, 261. 
 
 Time: indications, how to punctuate, 134; 
 of day, how to treat, 98; do not divide 
 over line, 219. 
 
 Titles: academic, to be abbreviated, 22; 
 civil and military, capitalization of, 21; 
 honorary, 21; in direct address, 21; of 
 nobility, 21; preceding names, to be 
 spelled out, 92; list of exceptions, 92; 
 "vice," "ex-," "elect." and "general," 
 constituting parts of, how to treat, 201. 
 
 Titles of legal causes and proceedings, 
 italicized, 63. 
 
 Titles of publications: capitalization of 
 principal words in s 41; use of capitals 
 in: English, Latin, French, Italian, 
 Spanish, Scandinavian, German, Dan- 
 ish, Dutch, 42; use of italics for, 60; 
 of roman-quoted, 80, 81, 82; to be 
 correctly quoted, 112; when to be 
 spelled out, 105; of addresses, 82; of 
 articles, 82; of books, 60; of chapters 
 82; of cycles of poems, 60; of divisions 
 of books, etc., 82; of documents, 60; 
 of essays, 60; of lectures, 82: of news- 
 papers, 60; of pamphlets, 60; of papers, 
 82; of periodicals, 60; of plays, 60; 
 of poems, printed in separate volume, 60; 
 of poems, short, 81 (cf. 60); of proceed- 
 ings of societies, 60; of series, 8p; of 
 tracts, 60; of transactions of societies, 
 60; of treatises, 60. 
 
 To, use dash in place of word, 158, 173. 
 
 Toasts, titles of: capitalization of prin- 
 cipal words in, 41; to be roman-quoted, 
 82. 
 
 "To be continued," at end of articles, how 
 to set, 73, 179.
 
 298 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 "Today," "tonight," "tomorrow," hy- 
 phen to be omitted with, no, 204, note. 
 
 Totals, columns of, in tables, sometimes 
 in distinctive type, 241. 
 
 Town and state, names of, in date line, 
 how to set, 50. 
 
 Tracts, titles of: capitalization of prin- 
 cipal words in, 41 ; to be italicized, 60. 
 
 Transactions (of societies), titles of: capi- 
 talization of principal words in, 41; 
 to be italicized, 60. 
 
 Transition, use of dash to indicate, 166. 
 
 Translation of foreign words or phrases, 
 quoted, 78. 
 
 Treaties, capitalization of names of, 18. 
 
 Treatises, titles of: capitalization of prin- 
 cipal words in, 41; to be italicized, 60. 
 
 "Tri-," compounds with, 197. 
 
 Tribes, races, and peoples, capitalization 
 of names and epithets of, 47. 
 
 Trinity, Christian, capitalization of names 
 of members of, 24. 
 
 Two-column tables, to be set as open> 
 248. 
 
 Two-em dash: defined, 261; illustrated, 
 261. 
 
 Two-em quad, defined, 261. 
 
 Two-letter syllables, avoidance of, in 
 divisions, 216. 
 
 Type: different parts of body of, ex- 
 plained, 256; names for different sizes 
 of, 252; styles of, 253-57. 
 
 Typesetting machines, 293-94. 
 
 Typographical terms, explanation of, 
 251-94. 
 
 U, long, form of indefinite article before, 
 114. 
 
 "Ultra," compounds with, 209. 
 
 Umlaut, indexing of names beginning with, 
 Mot, 
 
 "Un-," compounds with, 205. 
 
 "Under," compounds with, 207. 
 
 Unit, typographical, explained, 251; on 
 monotype machine, 259. 
 
 Units of measurement, abbreviations for, 
 in; spelled with lower-case initial let- 
 ter, 55. 
 
 "United States": when to be spelled out, 
 103; when to be abbreviated, 103. 
 
 University of Chicago: capitalization of 
 special terms dealing with organization, 
 administration, and curricula of, 49; 
 of titles of divisions, departments, offi- 
 cers, and courses and units of study, in 
 official work dealing with, 49. 
 
 Unusual word or phrase, use of quotation 
 marks for, 77. 
 
 "Van," rule for treatment of, 3, 24oc. 
 
 Verbs: capitalization of, in titles of pub- 
 lications, 41; derived from proper 
 names, how to treat, 53. 
 
 Verse or page, letter affixed to number of, 
 to denote fractional part: to be set in 
 italic, 66; spacing of (see example), 66. 
 
 Versions of Bible: abbreviations for, 109; 
 
 capitalization of, 30. 
 Verso, defined, 283. 
 Versus (v., vs.), 59 (word-list), 61. 
 "Vice," prefixed to titles, how to treat, 201. 
 Vocative, "O," 117. 
 "Vol," "chap.," "p.," etc., in literary 
 
 references: use of numerals with, 237; 
 
 when omitted, 237; when spelled out, 
 
 237- 
 
 "Von," rule for treatment of, 3, 2406. 
 Vowel: divide on, whenever possible, 224; 
 
 single, forming separate syllable in 
 
 middle of word, to be put in first line 
 
 in dividing, 224. 
 
 Weights and measures, metric: how to 
 designate, 94, in; punctuation in, 159 
 spacing of, 269. 
 
 "Whereas," in resolutions, use of cap and 
 small caps for, 51. 
 
 Wide spacing, where to avoid, 265. 
 
 Word or phrase: accompanied by its defi- 
 nition, to be quoted, 76; to which 
 attention is directed, use of quotation 
 marks for, 79. 
 
 Words: common, from proper names with 
 a specialized meaning, lower case, 53; 
 hyphenated, list of, 214; of more than 
 one spelling, how to spell, 119. 
 
 "Work," compounds of, 186. 
 
 Works of art, titles of, to be roman-quoted, 
 
 84. 
 "World," compounds of, 192. 
 
 Zoological terms; use of capitals in, 46; 
 of italics, 71.
 
 INDEX TO TYPES, ETC. 
 
 [The numbers in this index refer to pages] 
 
 Advertising figures, 231. 
 Antique Greek, 181. 
 Arabic, 182. 
 
 Black Gothic, 233. 
 
 Body Type (for hand composition): 
 Modern: five point No. sixty -seven, 137; 
 five point No. five hundred twenty- 
 seven, 137; six point No. fifty-seven, 
 138; seven point No. fifty-seven, 139; 
 eight point No. fifty-seven, 140; nine 
 point No. fifty-seven, 141; eleven 
 point No. sixty-five, 142; six point 
 Scotch Roman, 170; eight point Scotch 
 Roman, 171; ten point Scotch Roman, 
 172; eleven point Scotch Roman, 173; 
 twelve point Scotch Roman, 174; 
 fourteen point Scotch Roman, 175 
 Old Style: five point No. eight, 143; 
 fourteen point No. eight, 144; eighteen 
 point No. eight, 145; eight point Caslon, 
 166; ten point Caslon, 167; twelve 
 point Caslon, 168; fourteen point 
 Caslon, 169; six point Bookman, 176; 
 eight point Bookman, 177; ten point 
 Bookman, 178; twelve point Bookman, 
 179- 
 
 Bold-Face Italic, 229. 
 
 Bookman: on six-, eight-, ten-, and 
 twelve-point body, 176-79. 
 
 Borders, 270-81. 
 
 Bradley Text, 241. 
 
 Brass Circles, 261. 
 
 Brass Rule Faces, 278. 
 
 Canceled letters and figures, 183. 
 
 Caslon Old Style: monotype, 165; 
 foundry type, 186, 187. 
 
 Century Expanded, 216. 
 
 Chaucer Text, 243. 
 
 Coat-of-Arms, University of Chicago, 260. 
 
 Cheltenham: Bold, 203-5; Bold Con- 
 densed, 201-2, 205-7; Bold Extra 
 Condensed, 109-200; Bold Extended, 
 209; Bold Italic, 210-211; Condensed, 
 198; Old Style, 194; Old Style Italic, 
 194-95; Wide, 196-97. 
 
 Clarendon, 212. 
 
 Cloister Black, 223. 
 Condensed Title, 239. 
 Copperplate, 233. 
 
 Gushing: foundry type, 215; modern 
 figures with, 164; monotype, 158-64. 
 
 Delia Robbia, 213-14. 
 DeVinne, 224-27. 
 DeVinne Condensed, 228-29. 
 Elzevir Italic, 189. 
 Engraver's Bold, 237. 
 Engraver's Old English, 245. 
 thiopic, 182. 
 
 othic: Black, 233; Condensed, 232; 
 Interchangeable, 236; Lining Con- 
 densed, 234-35; Lightface, 232; Title, 
 212. 
 
 Gothic Condensed, 232. 
 
 Gothic Title, 212. 
 
 Goudy: Old Style, 217-18; Old Style 
 
 Italic, 218-19; Bold, 220-21. 
 Greek: Porson, 180; Antique, 181. 
 
 Hebrew, i8t. 
 
 Inferior letters and figures, monotype, 185. 
 
 Initials: Burford, 249-51; Caxton, 248; 
 Delia Robbia, 251-54; Jenson, 256; 
 Miscellaneous, 248, 256-59; Roycroft, 
 254-55. 
 
 Inscription Greek, 181. 
 
 Interchangeable Gothic, 236. 
 
 Ionic, 212. 
 
 Italic: Bold-Face, 229; Caslon Old Style, 
 187; Cheltenham Bold, 210-11; Chel- 
 tenham Old Style, 194-95; Elzevir, 
 189; Goudy Old Style, 218-19; Jenson 
 Old Style, 229; K, No. twenty-five, 165; 
 Old Style No. eight, 189; Scotch Roman, 
 170-75; also see body types. 
 
 Jenson, Old Style Italic, tag. 
 
 Lightface Gothic, 232. 
 
 Lining Gothic Condensed, 234-35. 
 
 Litho Roman, 238. 
 
 299
 
 300 THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS 
 
 Macfarland, 239. 
 
 Miscellaneous Signs: foundry type, 183; 
 
 monotype, 184. 
 Monarch, 235. 
 
 Monotype: Modern: six point No. one 
 138; six point No. five, 153; seven 
 point No. eight, 154; eight point No. 
 eight, 155; nine point No. eight, 136; 
 eleven point No. eight, 157; Gushing 
 figures No. twenty-five, 164; ten point 
 Scotch Roman No. thirty-six, 165; 
 twelve point Caslon No. three hundred 
 thirty-seven, 165; eight point italic 
 No. twenty-five K, 165; ten point 
 italic No. twenty-five K. 165; twelve 
 point italic No. twenty-five K, 165; 
 eleven point Person Greek (also on 
 ten-point _body), 180; miscellaneous 
 signs, on six-, seven-, eight-, nine-, ten-, 
 eleven-, and twelve-point body, 184; 
 superior letters and figures (Old Style 
 and Modern on six-, seven-, eight-, 
 nine-, ten-, and eleven-point body), 185; 
 inferior letters and figures (Old Style 
 on six-, seven-, eight-, nine-, ten-, and 
 eleven-point body and Modern on 
 ten-point body), 185. Old Style: six 
 point No. thirty-one, 146; seven point 
 No. thirty-one, 147; eight point No. 
 thirty-one, 148; nine point No. thirty- 
 one, 149; ten point No. thirty-one, 150; 
 eleven point No. thirty-one, 151; 
 twelve point No. thirty -one, 152; six 
 point Gushing No. twenty-five, 158; 
 seven point Gushing No. twenty-five, 
 ISO! eight point Gushing No. twenty- 
 five, 160; nine point Gushing No. 
 twenty-five, 161; ten point No. twenty- 
 five, 162; eleven point No. twenty-five, 
 163; twelve point No. twenty-five 
 (eleven-point face, and accents with 
 twelve-point face), 164. 
 
 Nestorian Syriac, 182 
 
 New Model Elite Typewriter, 240., 
 
 Old Style: No. eight, 143-43 (body type), 
 188; No. eight Italic, 189; Condensed, 
 190-91; Extended, 191-92; French, 
 192-^93; Cheltenham, 194; Cheltenham 
 Italic, 194-93; monotype, 146-32; 
 Goudy Old Style, 217-18; Jenson Italic, 
 229. 
 
 Ornaments, 262-77, 282. 
 
 Packard, 222-23. 
 Paul Revere, 239. 
 Porson Greek, 180. 
 Prescription Signs, 278. 
 Priory Text, 242 . 
 
 Remington Typewriter, 240. 
 Reproducing Typewriter, 240. 
 
 Scotch Roman: body type (foundry), 170- 
 
 73; (monotype), 163; job type, 230-31. 
 Script: Tiffany, 246; Tiffany Shaded, 
 
 247; Tiffany Upright, 246-47. 
 Special characters: foundry type, 183; 
 
 monotype, 184. 
 Superior letters and figures, monotype, 
 
 183. 
 Syriac, Nestorian, 182. 
 
 Text: Bradley, 241; Chaucer, 243; 
 Priory, 242; Wedding, 244; Engraver's 
 Old English, 243; English, 242. 
 
 Tiffany Script, 246. 
 
 Tiffany Shaded, 247. 
 
 Tiffany Upright, 246-47. 
 
 Title Condensed, 239. 
 
 Title Gothic, 212. 
 
 Tudor Black, 241. 
 
 Typewriter: New Model Elite Reming- 
 ton, 240; New Model Remington, 240; 
 Remington, 240; Reproducing, 240. 
 
 Wedding Text, 244. 
 Whittier, 233. 
 
 PRINTED IN THE U.S.A.
 
 University of California 
 
 SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY 
 
 405 Hilgard Avenue, Los Angeles, CA 90024-1388 
 
 Return this material to the library 
 
 from which it was borrowed. 
 
 PAS - QL 
 
 OCT 5 1992 
 
 THE LIBRARY 
 
 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA 
 LOS ANGELES
 
 3 1158 00701 8004 
 
 A 000 467272
 
 Unii